SIEMENS D900 Commissioning ITMN Offline

Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Important Notice on Product Safety

Elevated voltages are inevitably present at specific points in this electrical equipment. Some of the
parts can also have elevated operating temperatures.
Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in property damage.
Therefore only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.
The system complies with the standard EN 60950. All equipment connected has to comply with the
applicable safety standards.
Copyright (C) Siemens AG 1997

Issued by the Public Communication Network Group
Hofmannstrae 51
D-81359 Mnchen
Technical modifications possible.
Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as
they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.
AD 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Issues
Change indications (Ind.):
N = new;
G = modified;
Document
Register
Titel
0 = deleted;
Page(s)
ADMIN
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 12

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 6
Register
2
20
12
44
30
10
22
6
16
6
22
22
20
36
40
6
38
54
4
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
N
N
0
N
N
0
N
G
G
TAB
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . TABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 2

Register
2 G
PROC
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROCIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:CCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:MBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:SYP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:SN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:CCNC_CCS7 . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:LTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:DAS300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:DSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:DLUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:DLUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN-OFFLINE . . . . . . . PROC:CP113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:CP113D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:MTD_STC2922 . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN-OFFLINE . . . . . . . PROC:CP113C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:CP113C/CR . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:MTD_STC2925 . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:MTD_HP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
Register
2 G
2 G
TL
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . TL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 2

Register
Issue/Ind.
2 G
APP
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . APP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 2
2 G
This document consists of a total of 368 Pages
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
AD 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
AD 4
Commissioning
System
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 1
Overview of functional areas and subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 1
CE Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 2
Required knowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 2
Locating Modules and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 2
Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 3
List of Universal Measurement and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 3
System Voltages in the SSS-NE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 3
Error Reports on the Installation Test Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 4
Dealing with Defective Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 4
Procedure in the Event of Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 4
Procedure in the Event of Serious Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 4
Checking the Scope of Delivery and the Installation Work . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 5
Interpretation of Exchange Configuration Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 6
Task List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TL - 1
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
Procedures (PROCIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCIN - 1

Off-line Installation of Common Clock Generator . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 1
Off-line Installation of Message Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 1
Off-line Installation Test of the System Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 1
Off-line Installation of Switching Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SN - 1
Off-line Installation of Common Channel Signaling
Network Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 1
Off-line Installation of Line Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 1
Test Procedure for DAS 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DAS300 - 1
Off-line Installation of Data Service Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 1
Off-line Installation of modems for 3.1 kHz
audio bearer services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MODEM - 1
Off-line Installation of Digital Line Unit
(Frames D / E / F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 1
Testing DLUB with the TESMOD2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 1
(Frames G / E / F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUD - 1
Off-line Installation of CP113D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 1
Switching on MTD STC 2922 of Storage Tek . . . . . .PROC:MTDSTC2922 - 1
Off-line Installation of CP113C/CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113C/CR - 1
Switching on MTD STC 2925 of Storage Tek . . . . . .PROC:MTDSTC2925 - 1
Switching on the MTD HP 88781A of Hewlett Packard . . . PROC:MTDHP - 1
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABIN - 1
Appendix (APP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APP - 1
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
AD 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
AD 6
Commissioning
System
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Illustrations
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
1.1.1
1.4.1
2.1.1
3.0.1
3.1.1
Fig. 3.1.2
Fig. 3.1.3
Fig. 3.1.4
Fig. 3.1.5
Fig. 3.1.6
Fig. 3.1.7
Fig. 3.2.1
Fig. 3.2.2
Fig. 3.2.3
Fig. 3.3.1
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.3.10
3.3.11
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
3.3.12
3.3.13
3.3.14
3.3.15
3.3.16
3.3.17
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Functional areas in a network node together with the subsystems . . IN - 1

Meaning of the test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 3
Installation Test Sequence of Register OFFLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TL - 1
Elements used in the procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCIN - 2
Rack: MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for CCG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 2
Rack: SN/MB/LTGM
Rack CE
Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)
(Plesiochronous mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 8
Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)
(Synchronous mode with 2,048 MHZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 9
Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)
(Plesiochronous mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 10
Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)
(Synchronous mode with 2,048 MHZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 11
Rack: MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for MB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 2
Rack: SN/MB/LTGM
Rack CE
Rack R:MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for SYP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 2
Rack R:CE (Fuse Assignment for SYP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 3
Rack R:SE (Fuse Assignment for SYP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 4
Position of the SYP in the EWSD system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 6
Location of the USER-PROM on module COM:SYPC . . . .PROC:SYP - 8
Location of the USER PROM on module PU:SYCR.. . . . . .PROC:SYP - 8
Overview of system panel connections in F:SYPC . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 9
Overview of system panel connections in F:SMSC(C) . . .PROC:SYP - 10
Front view of the system panel display SYPD . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 12
SYPD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 13
Options for the connection of the system
panel display SYPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 15
E&M signaling (4-wire transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 16
Loop signaling (2-wire transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 17
SYPD E&M grounding on T/RM:SYPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 18
SYPD E&M grounding on T/RM:SYCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 19
Block diagram of the SYPD and its interfaces . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 21
R/T and E+M interfaces in F:SMSC
for SYPD-0 - SYPD-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 22
AD 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Fig. 3.3.18 R/T and E+M interfaces in F:SYPC

for SYPD-0 - SYPD-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 23
Fig. 3.3.19 R/T and E+M interfaces in frame SYPC
for SYPD-5 - SYPD-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 24
Fig. 3.3.20 Methods of connecting alarm lines to the MDF. . . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 26
Fig. 3.3.21 Alarm inputs on the backplane connector of cable 223
(32 wires) from the MDF to the SYP (module RM:EA) . . . PROC:SYP - 27
Fig. 3.3.22 Alarm inputs on the backplane connector of module
T/RM:SYCR from the MDF to the SYP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 28
Fig. 3.3.23 Assignment of external alarms on the horizontal MDF . . . PROC:SYP - 28
Fig. 3.3.24 Assignment of external alarms on the vertical MDF . . . . . PROC:SYP - 29
Fig. 3.3.25 Connections on the jumper field for alarm output . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 31
Fig. 3.3.26 Connector pin assignment for alarm forwarding on module TXA:SYPC. . .
PROC:SYP - 32
Fig. 3.3.27 Connector pin assignment for alarm forwarding
on module T/RM:SYCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 33
Fig. 3.4.1 Rack R:CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 2
Fig. 3.4.2 SN Fuses / Frames and Modules in R:CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 3
Fig. 3.4.3 R:SN(B)/LTGG cable routing from above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 4
Fig. 3.4.4 R:SN(B)/LTGG cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 5
Fig. 3.4.5 R:SN(B)/LTGM cable routing from above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 6
Fig. 3.4.6 R:SN(B)/LTGM cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 7
Fig. 3.4.7 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 8
Fig. 3.4.8 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 9
Fig. 3.4.9 R:TSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from above. . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 10
Fig. 3.4.10 R:TSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 11
Fig. 3.4.11 R:TSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from above. . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 12
Fig. 3.4.12 R:TSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 13
Fig. 3.4.13 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from above . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 14
Fig. 3.4.14 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 15
Fig. 3.4.15 Frame SSG(B) for SN (126 LTG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 16
Fig. 3.4.16 Frame SSG(B) for SN (252 LTG..504 LTG) . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 16
Fig. 3.4.17 R:SSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from above. . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 17
Fig. 3.4.18 R:SSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 18
Fig. 3.4.19 R:SSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from above . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 19
Fig. 3.4.20 R:SSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from below. . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 20
Fig. 3.4.21 R:SN/MB/LTGM with F:SSG(B) cable routing from above . PROC:SN - 21
Fig. 3.4.22 R:SN/MB/LTGM with F:SSG(B) cable routing from below . PROC:SN - 22
Fig. 3.5.1
Rack R:SILTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 4
Fig. 3.5.2
Rack R:CCNP/SILTD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 5
Fig. 3.6.1 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:LTG - 2
Fig. 3.6.2 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:LTG - 3
Fig. 3.6.3 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:LTG - 4
Fig. 3.6.4 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC/CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:LTG - 5
Fig. 3.6.5 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:LTG - 6
AD 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 7

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 8
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG:OSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 9
Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG
(Cable routing from above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 10
3.6.10 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG
(Cable routing from below). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 11
3.6.11 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 12
3.6.12 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 13
3.6.13 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM
3.6.14 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM
3.6.15 Fuse Assignment for R:SN/MB/LTGM
3.6.16 Fuse Assignment for R:SN/MB/LTGM
3.7.1 Digital announcement system DAS 300 . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DAS300 - 1
3.7.2 Digital announcement system DAS 300 (rear view) . . PROC:DAS300 - 2
3.8.1 R:DSU, Configuration A-B-B-Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 2
3.8.2 Connection of DLU to two LTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 6
3.8.3 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 7
3.8.4 Connection path from DLU to LTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 8
3.8.5 Connection path from LTG to LTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 9
3.9.1 R:DSU, Configuration A-B-B-Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MODEM - 2
3.9.2 R:Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MODEM - 3
3.9.3 Frame F:Modem (GPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MODEM - 4
3.9.4 Frame F:Modem (NEUHAUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MODEM - 5
3.10.1 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-E). . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 2
3.10.2 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-D). . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 3
3.10.3 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-F) . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 4
3.10.4 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 400. . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 6
3.10.5 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 700. . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 7
3.10.6 Connection of DLUB to two LTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 9
3.10.7 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU (DIU120A) . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 10
3.10.8 Numbering method on F:LTGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 11
3.10.9 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU (DIU30D) . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 12
3.10.10 Connection path from DLUB to LTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 12
3.10.11 Connection path from LTG to LTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 13
3.11.1 TESMOD2E -Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 1
3.11.2 Memory organization for DLUC and TESMOD2E . PROC:TESMOD2E - 2
3.11.3 Input and display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 5
3.12.1 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUD - 2
3.12.2 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUD - 3
3.12.3 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUD - 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
AD 9
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
3.6.6
3.6.7
3.6.8
3.6.9
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
3.12.4 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 400 . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 6

3.12.5 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 700 . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 7
3.12.6 Connection of remote DLUD to two LTG . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 9
3.12.7 Wiring between DLUS and LTU (DIU120A) . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 10
3.12.8 Numbering method on F:LTGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 11
3.12.9 Wiring between DLUS and LTU (DIU30D) . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 12
3.12.10 Connection path from DLUD to LTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 12
3.12.11 Connection path from LTG to LTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 13
3.13.1 Overview: Hardware belonging to the CP-Complex . . . PROC:CP113D - 5
3.13.2 Overview of Interfaces B:CMY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 6
3.13.3 Module Connectors and numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 7
3.13.4 Coding switch on module MUH:1088 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 8
3.13.5 Rack R:CP113A - Variant A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 9
3.13.6 Rack R:CP113B - Variant A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 10
3.13.7 Rack R:DEVD - Variant A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 11
3.15.1 Overview: Hardware belonging to the CP-ComplexPROC:CP113C/CR - 5
3.15.2 Overview of Interfaces B:CMY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 6
3.15.3 Overview IOPs (DE5/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 7
3.15.4 Overview IOPs (DE5/4) Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 8
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
3.15.5
3.15.6
3.15.7
3.15.8
3.15.9
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
AD 10
Overview IOPs (DE5/4) Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 9

Cabling of the 230V inverter DCIRC . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 10
230V AC-Connectors on Inverter DCIRC . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 11
Fan Alarm Cabling in CP113C/CR . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 12
SCSI bus cabling for MDD, MOD and MTD
(CP113C/CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 13
3.15.10 SCSI bus cabling of 2 MTDs (CP113C/CR) . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 14
3.15.11 SCSI bus cabling with MDD and MOD
(CP113C/CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 15
3.15.12 F:DEVF front view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 16
3.15.13 F:DEV(F) rear view with cabling to:
MDD, MOD and MTD (CP113C/CR) . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 16
3.15.14 Overview of MP:CP113C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 18
3.15.15 Normal display of MP:CP113C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 18
3.15.16 Rack R:CP113C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 20
3.15.17 Rack R:CP113 CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 21
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Tables
Tab. 3.1.1
Tab. 3.1.2
Tab. 3.1.3
Tab. 3.1.4
Tab. 3.1.5
Tab. 3.1.6
Tab. 3.2.1
Tab. 3.2.2
Tab. 3.2.3
Tab. 3.2.4
Tab. 3.2.5
Tab. 3.2.6
Tab. 3.3.1
Tab. 3.3.2
Tab. 3.3.3
Tab. 3.5.1
Tab. 3.5.2
Tab. 3.5.3
Tab. 3.5.4
Tab. 3.5.5
Tab. 3.5.6
Tab. 3.5.7
Tab. 3.5.8
Tab. 3.5.9
Tab. 3.8.1
Tab. 3.8.2
Tab. 3.10.1
Tab. 3.10.2
Tab. 3.10.3
Tab. 3.11.1
Tab. 3.11.2
Tab. 3.11.3
Tab. 3.11.4
Tab. 3.11.5
Tab. 3.11.6
Tab. 3.11.7
Tab. 3.11.8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
CCG Racks and Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 5

Types of submodules and concerning reference
frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 5
Submodules and specification of CCGxxA . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 6
Necessary Submodules for CCGxxA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 6
Terminals for cross-joint cable 570-802/570-804. . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 7
Terminals for reference clock cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 7
Fuse Assignment R:MB/CCG Basic Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 3
Fuse Assignment R:MB/CCG Extension Rack . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 3
Fuse Assignment R:SN/MB/LTGM
Basic Rack / Extension Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 5
Fuse Assignment R:SN/MB/LTGM Extension Racks . . . . PROC:MBB - 5
Fuse Assignment R:CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 7
Capacity stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 7
Explanations on E&M and loop signaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 17
Mounting locations of SYPD connections on F:SYPC(A) .PROC:SYP - 34
Mounting locations of SYPD connections on F:SMSC(C) .PROC:SYP - 34
LEDs on M:PU:SIMP (M:PMU:SIMP) . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 1
LEDs on M:MH:SIMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 1
LEDs on M:SIPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 1
LEDs on M:PU:CPI (M:PMU:CPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 2
LEDs on M:SILTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 2
LEDs on M:SILTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 2
Fuse assignment R:CCNP/SILTD
(shielded or unshielded version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 3
Fuse assignment R:CCNP/SILTD
(partially shielded version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 3
Fuse assignment R:SILTD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 3
Equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 3
Mounting location list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 4
Assignment of primary fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 7
Assignment of secondary fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 8
Pin numbers for PCM30 connectors of DIU120A . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 10
Switch functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 3
Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 4
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 4
Switch functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 6
Test codes and test routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 7
Basic switch settings on control panel . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 10
Basic switch settings on the input and display
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 10
Mounting locations for module types
Q965, Q1101, Q838 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 10
AD 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Tab. 3.11.9 Mounting locations for module types

Q1103, Q1192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:TESMOD2E - 11
Tab. 3.11.10Mounting locations for module type Q1338 . . . . .PROC:TESMOD2E - 11
Tab. 3.11.11DCC ID-Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:TESMOD2E - 11
Tab. 3.11.12Flag-Bytes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:TESMOD2E - 12
Tab. 3.11.13Module ID-Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:TESMOD2E - 12
Tab. 3.12.1 Assignment of primary fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 7
Tab. 3.12.2 Assignment of secondary fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 8
Tab. 3.12.3 Pin numbers for PCM30 connectors of DIU120A . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 10
Tab. 3.13.1 Coding switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 8
Tab. 3.13.2 Fuse Assignment of R:CP113A (Variant A) . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 12
Tab. 3.13.3 Fuse Assignment of R:CP113B (Variant A) . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 12
Tab. 3.13.4 Fuse Assignment of R:DEVD (Variant A) . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 13
Tab. 3.13.5 Fuse Assignment to Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 13
Tab. 3.13.6 Overview: OEM-Devices / IOPs / frames . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 14
Tab. 3.13.7 Sequence for Switching on the Frames . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 14
Tab. 3.13.8 Displays after successful Hardware Startup . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 15
Tab. 3.15.1 Modules with front connector for MP:CP113C . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 17
Tab. 3.15.2 Key functions of MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 19
Tab. 3.15.3 Fuse Assignment R:CP113C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 22
Tab. 3.15.4 Fuse Assignment R:DEVB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 23
Tab. 3.15.5 Fuse Assignment to fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 23
Tab. 3.15.6 Fuse Assignment for R:CE (CP113 Compact Rural) PROC:CP113C/CR 23
Tab. 3.15.7 Memory organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 25
Tab. 3.15.8 Sequence for switching on the modules R:CP113C . PROC:CP113C/CR 25
Tab. 3.15.9 Sequence for switching on the modules R:CE . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 26
Tab. 3.15.10Displays after successful Hardware Startup . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 27
AD 12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
1 Introduction
1.1
Overview of functional areas and subsystems
Access
Switching
SN
DLU
LTG
LTG
Common channel signaling
CCNC
Coordination
SYP
CP
MB
CCG
Fig. 1.1.1 Functional areas in a network node together with the subsystems
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
IN 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
1.2
CE Declaration of Conformity
Attention !
The CE Declaration of Conformity for the product will be fulfilled if the construction and
cabling is undertaken in accordance with the manual and the documents listed therein,
e.g. mounting instructions, cable lists. Where necessary account should be taken of
project-specific documents.
Deviations from the specifications or unstipulated changes during construction, e.g. the
use of cable types with lower screening values can lead to violation of the CE requirements. In such cases the conformity declaration is invalidated and the responsibility
passes to those who have caused the deviations.
1.3
Required knowledge
No specialist knowledge is required to carry out installation testing of a system with faultfree hardware and software. The experience described below is generally sufficient.
Basic training on SSS-NE (EWSD)
Practical experience in the operation of SSS-NE (EWSD systems) and clearance of

simple faults
General knowledge of how to use D900/D1800 documents such as maintenance

manuals, command manual, hardware documents
Handling of fault reports:

Hardware fault reports
Software fault reports
Document error reports
1.4
Locating Modules and Test Points

The term "mounting unit" is abbreviated to MUT and "mounting location" to MOLOC.
The black fast-on connector point to the right of the wrapping field is marked "202, and
the one to the left of the wrapping field "205".
IN 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Meaning of the test points (SIVAPAC) e.g:

(Rear of module frame)
03
205
19
Mounting units
Row in module frame
Mounting location
Terminal (wire wrap pin)
Fig. 1.4.1 Meaning of the test points
In multiple statements the individual figures are separated by a slash
e.g.: 03/05 A 205 19.
1.5
Test Equipment
The test equipment required for fault clearance is specified in the descriptions of the individual systems. A comprehensive list of these devices can be found in the list of
universal measurement and test equipment.
1.6
List of Universal Measurement and Test Equipment

The details relate to devices which are necessary for the installation of an EWSD
system. Devices from other manufacturers can be used in place of those given here, as
long as their specifications are equivalent.
1.7
Digital multimeter, e.g. Siemens VMG-3
Continuity tester, e.g. Cirtest PS 12
Test headset 600/10000 ohms
System Voltages in the SSS-NE

All the system units in an EWSD exchange require a system voltage of -40V to -75V
(peak -80V).
This means that all units which are operated via voltage converter or inverters can work
with this system voltage. These units include:
CP, MB, CCG, SYP, SN, CSC, LTG, DLU
Exceptions: All load circuits which access the system voltage directly. Care must be
taken here to ensure that the system voltage tolerances prescribed by the manufacturers are observed.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
IN 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
e.g.: DAS = Digital announcement unit
1.8
Error Reports on the Installation Test Manual

Incorrect or unclear sections of the ITMN should be described in detail in a document
error report.
The error report must be sent to TAC or VI.
1.9
Dealing with Defective Modules

If a module should prove to be defective, it should have a form attached to it (e.g. hardware fault report as supplied by the relevant administration) containing the following
information:
1. Name and code number of the module or OEM device
2. Description of the fault
The module/OEM device should then be sent to the repair center in an EWSD module
box or OEM-device container together with the form.
If possible, magnetic tape devices should be repaired on site by trained technicians.
1.10
Procedure in the Event of Faults

If faults occur in on-line operation, the system messages should be interpreted by
means of the Maintenance Manual (MMN) and/or the Command Manual (CML).
Hardware faults should be localized and cleared in accordance with the instructions in
the Maintenance Manual.
1.11
Procedure in the Event of Serious Faults

Serious faults are those which are not dealt with in the MMN. They include:
short circuits, breaks in cables

short circuits, breaks in the backplane wiring (wire wrapping, cables, foreign material)
multiple faults
faults where the MMN instructions are insufficient
software errors (general programs, exchange-specific data memories)
If there is a malfunction in a unit, this should normally be reported first to the specialist
in the installation test team, and then to the higher-level Technical Assistance Center
(TAC).
IN 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
If the installation technician is not qualified to eliminate serious faults, a fault report must
be filled out, providing the following information in detail:
1.12
description of the test step attempted

description of the system response, if possible including the fault printouts
description of any system activities taking place at the same time, e.g. work done by
other testers during modifications to hardware or software, or activities on subscriber
stations, test desk
tracer logs (if applicable)
Checking the Scope of Delivery and the Installation Work

Compare the parts list in the contract with the delivery documents and the assembled
exchange, with reference to the exchange-related documentation.
Check the installation work

The following installation work must be carried out before testing:
The EWSD racks are assembled
The internal cabling of the system is completed
The system voltage of -48V/-60V is connected and constantly available (the
emergency power supply system is operational)
The EWSD racks are equipped with the current hardware/firmware (see AKUHW
lists)
Check the software

The following should be observed:
The system APS must be available and released by the department responsible
for system acceptance
System-specific exchange acceptance DATABASE on magnetic tape
Floppy disks containing the software required for PC installation (see MMN:PC
Register BASIS)
Project-specific user-EPROM or standard PROM for SYPC
Test diagnostic command file
Check the documentation

Check that the exchange-related documentation is complete. The following are the
most important documents:
DOL
SUP
SUL
LP
LL
EP
EL
AL
CLL
Document list
Survey plan
Survey list
- Equipment layout plan
- Layout list
- Equipment plan
- Equipment list
- Allocation list
- Cable laying list
A check should also be made, using superordinate documents, to ascertain that

documents which are not system-specific are complete and up-to-date.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
IN 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
This applies in particular to: Manuals
Check the equipment

The main points for a visual check in an EWSD exchange are:
Check that the racks are complete by comparing with the equipment lists
Check that the test and auxiliary equipment is complete and functions correctly
Check the input/output devices and the background memory
Check that the system tapes and data tapes are complete, and also the correction
tape if applicable
Visual check of the entire system

The cabling and positioning of the modules should be checked against the installation instructions for the individual system components.
Check that the modules are firmly in position.
1.13
Interpretation of Exchange Configuration Documents

For overview and interpretation of the exchange configuration documents see
OGL:ECD.
IN 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
2 Task List
2.1
Installation Test Sequence of Register OFFLINE

Content
Part in the ITMN-OFFLINE

Introduction
The INTRO section contains basic information
The CCG has a special position in the installation test sequence.

When it is tested, check wether the reference frequency(ies) is (are)
already switched on.
- Wiring of a CCGxxA module
- Plesiochronous mode/ synchronous mode
- Waiting times before testing
(The CCG should be switched on as early as possible so that the
quartz crystals can temperature-stabilize as soon as possible.
CCG
MBB
Installation test of MB(B)
SYP
Installation test of SYP and plug in the USER-PROM
Test of the SN
Malfunctions caused by cabling faults (cross joint cable), must be
located by means of diagnosis
SN
CCNC:CCS7
Installation test of CCNC
LTG
Installation test of LTG
DAS 300 TEST
DSU
MODEM
Installation test of DAS 300
DLUD
DLUB
Manual MMN:DSU/DLUB/DLUD, TAB, MOD
TESMOD2E
Maintenance of DSU/DLUB/DLUD
The section MOD is used to set switches of DSU/DLUB/DLUD
CP113C/CR
CP113D
Manual MMN:PC Register BASIS

Installation test of CP
The section MMN:PC Register BASIS is used for startup of the PC
Fig. 2.1.1 Installation Test Sequence of Register OFFLINE
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
TL 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
TL 2
Commissioning
System
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3 Procedures (PROCIN)
Notes on module replacement:
Precautionary measures for electrostatic-sensitive components

All modules are equipped with electrostatic-sensitive components (ESD symbol).
For this reason the precautionary measures for electrostatic-sensitive components
must be observed when extracting and inserting modules.
When replacing modules, the maintenance personnel must wear a conducting wriststrap to discharge static. Before modules, leads or components are touched, the
wrist-strap must be connected via a flexible lead to the ground potential of the rack.
It is important to note that the conducting parts of the banana plug must not be
touched while the lead is being plugged in (bridging of the leakage resistance).
Further information can be found in the brochure Safety Instructions for Personnel
and for Products as per EN 60950 (A30808-X3008-X280-*-7619).
Extracting and inserting modules

When replacing modules it is essential that the special tool provided (C39300-A195C70) should be used both for extracting and for inserting modules.
Faulty modules that have been removed must be marked as faulty, and they must be
handled just as carefully as new modules.
For transportation to a repair center the faulty modules must be marked and packed
in accordance with the precautionary requirements for electrostatic-sensitive
components.
Further information can again be found in the brochure Safety Instructions for
Personnel and for Products as per EN 60950 (A30808-X3008-X280-*-7619).
Replacement modules
The replacement module must be identical with the original module (same code
number both for HW/FW and for functional status). In exceptional cases the
Functional Level List can be used to determine whether the functional status of the
replacement module (as regards HW/FW) is compatible with that of the original
module.
If there are switches or other control elements on the module, they must be set as
they were on the extracted original module.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROCIN 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.0.1
Block number
Commentary
(in italics)
Commissioning
System
Explanations of the Procedure Elements
Branch symbol
12 Decision block
Must clearance of this fault be postponed (e.g. because no spare
modules available)?
Y h .....13
N h .....16
Branch dest.
(block number)
Commentary are always written in italics
MML command
input
13 Decision block
b CONF SN:SN=sn,OST=STB;
MML mask
(Courier
typeface)
ERROR MESSAGE DURING CONFIGURATION OF MCH-0-ltg MMN:MCH50-zzzz

To evaluate the system output, see
.....AL:SN
Continue according to the system reaction:
Multiple
branch
- EXECD..................................................................................................
- NOT EXECD..........................................................................................
- else.........................................................................................................
Yes/No
branch
i....PROC:SN001
h.......18
h.......19
Reference to
document with
additional
information
Block
Branch symbol
with reentry
Fig. 3.0.1 Elements used in the procedures
PROCIN 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.1
Off-line Installation of Common Clock Generator

CCG
3.1.1
Documents
The following documents are required as references
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Maintenance Manual MMN:CCG / MMN:CCG for CDE

AKUHW Lists
PROC:CCG 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.1.2
Commissioning
System
Rack MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for CCG)
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
Fuse panel
02
MOLOC A119 or A121 (CCG)
A
B
MUT01
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT02
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT03
12
MOLOC A119 or A121 (CCG)
A
B
MUT04
A
F:SYPC(A)
B
MUT05
SYPD (or empty)
MUT06
MUT07
A
B
A
B
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT08
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT09
CD
Fig. 3.1.1 Rack: MB/CCG

PROC:CCG 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.1.3
FU 01
FU
Rack SN/MB/LTGM
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
30
32
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
C
33 FU
31
F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)
MUT02
F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)
MUT03
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT04
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT05
F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)
MUT06
F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)
MUT07
D
C
FU
09
MOLOC A121 (CCG)
A
B
23
MOLOC A121 (CCG)
A
B
C
D
C
D
CD
Fig. 3.1.2 Rack: SN/MB/LTGM

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CCG 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.1.4
FU 01
FU
Rack CE
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
FU
Fuse panel / AD:RAL
04
MOLOC C153 (Supply for CCG-0)
MUT01
F:SMSC(C)-0
MUT02
F:SMSC(C)-1
MUT04
F:PIOP(A)
MUT03
D
25
MOLOC C153 (Supply for CCG-1)
C
D
C
D
Air circulator
C
MUT08
F:PBC(A)
MUT05
F:PBC(A)
MUT06
D
C
D
Air circulator
MUT09
F:PIOPA)
MUT07
F:DEV
MUT10
D
C
D
Air circulator
MUT11
Fig. 3.1.3 Rack CE

PROC:CCG 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.1.5
CCG Racks / Frames / Modules

The CCG consists of 4 modules which can be located in the following racks / frames:
Rack
R:MB/CCG
Frame
Module Frame
Code Number
F:MB/CCG(A)
S30804-B2567
F:MB/CCG(B)
S30804-B2641
R:SN/MB/LTGM
F:MB/CCG(B)
S30804-B2641
R:CE
F:SMSC(C)
S30804-B2693
Tab. 3.1.1 CCG Racks and Frames

The modules are:
M:CCGB
M:CCGD
M:CCGxxA
M:DCCCR
In accordance with the environmental requisites of the EXCH the CCG can be used in
the following operating modes:
plesiochronous mode
synchronous mode
The module M:CCGxxA has to be equipped with different submodules according to the
number of reference frequencies and the operating mode used.
The use of two submodules is standard. One CCGxxA module with two submodules can
process two reference frequencies.
3.1.5.1
Submodules for CCGxxA

The type of the submodules used is dependent upon the reference frequency
concerned:
type of
submodule
reference frequency
Type1 (D319)
2,048 MHZ / 300 KHZ
Type2 (D320)
5 MHZ / 10 MHZ
Type3 (D337)
1,544 MHZ / 300 KHZ
Tab. 3.1.2 Types of submodules and concerning reference

frequencies
The dummy xx in the term CCGxxA depends on the submodule used:
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CCG 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Submodule 0
Submodule 1
CCGxxA-
Type 1 (D319) Type 1 (D319)
CCG11A
Type 2 (D320) Type 2 (D320)
CCG22A
Type 3 (D337) Type 3 (D337)
CCG33A
Tab. 3.1.3 Submodules and specification of CCGxxA

Depending on the position of the EXCH in the network hierachy, different reference
frequencies have to be used. An overview is given in the following table:
Exch(s)
CCGxxA
Input module
Reference freq.
Master Exch(s)
CCGxxA
Type 1 (D319)
2.048 MHz
Type 2 (D320)
5 or 10 MHz
Type 3 (D337)
1,544 MHz
*)
Slave Exch(s) w. PCM30
CCG11A
Type 1 (D319)
2.048 MHz
Slave Exch(s) w. PCM24
CCG33A
Type 3 (D337)
1.544 MHz
Tab. 3.1.4 Necessary Submodules for CCGxxA

*)
In a synchronous digital network, master exchanges are those which receive their reference frequencies directly from a universal frequency standard UFS. UFS standards
generate reference frequencies of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 2.048 MHz and 1.544 MHz,
depending on the delivery. The use of a reference frequency of 2.048 MHz is standard.
The type of CCGxxA module, i.e. its equipping with submodules, depends on the reference frequency present in each case.
If there is not yet a master exchange with primary standard, or an all-embracing PCM
network, the CCG(A) must be operated plesiochronously (island exchange). The
CCG(A) then works with its own accuracy. Every CCGxxA module always generates a
frequency of 2.048 MHz, irrespective of which submodules are plugged in and whether
they are synchronized or not. In this way the CCG-0 can synchronize the CCG-1 if the
CCG10A or CCG11A module is plugged in the CCG-1.
If CCG22A or CCG33A are plugged in, both modules have to be installed plesiochronously.
PROC:CCG 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.1.6
3.1.6.1
Terminals for Cross-joint Cables and Reference Clock Cables

Terminals for Cross-joint Cable 570-802/570-804
Operating mode
F:MB/CCG(A)
F:MB/CCG(B)
F:SMSC(C)
CCG-0 CCG-1 CCG-0 CCG-1 CCG-0 CCG-1

Plesiochronous mode
with synchronization of
CCG1 by CCG0
(at least one CCG1xA
must be on CCG1)
B112
A112
B114
A114
D193
C193
Synchronous mode with

one reference frequency
A112
A112
A114
A114
C193
C193
Synchronous mode with 2

reference frequencies
A112
A112
A114
A114
C193
C193
Tab. 3.1.5 Terminals for cross-joint cable 570-802/570-804
3.1.6.2
Terminals for Reference Clock Cables

Operating mode
F:MB/CCG(A)
F:MB/CCG(B)
F:SMSC(C)
CCG-0 CCG-1 CCG-0 CCG-1 CCG-0 CCG-1

Plesiochronous mode
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
Synchronous mode with

one reference frequency
A109
-------
A111
-------
C187
-------
Synchronous mode with 2

reference frequencies
A109
B109
A111
B111
C187
D187
Tab. 3.1.6 Terminals for reference clock cables

*)No reference clock cables may be plugged in when plesiochronous mode is used,
even if they are listed in the cable laying list.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CCG 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.1.6.3
Commissioning
System
Standard Cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)

(Plesiochronous mode)
A111
Backpanel
CCG11A
A111
29
49
No cable plugged in!
D319
49
50
50
F E D C
A114
Submodule 0
CCG-0
B111
29
229
49
50
D319
249
250
F E D C
B114
2,048 MHz
46
47
48
Submodule 1
P0
43
44
Cross-joint-Cable 570-804
R2
R1
2,048 MHz
S3
S2
S1
A111
CCG11A
Backpanel
A111
29
49
D319
49
50
50
F E D C
A114
Submodule 0
2,048 MHz
CCG-1
B111
29
229
49
50
D319
249
250
F E D C
B114
46
47
48
43
44
Submodule 1
P0
R2
R1
2,048 MHz
S3
S2
S1
Fig. 3.1.4 Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)

PROC:CCG 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.1.6.4
Standard Cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)

(Synchronous mode with 2,048 MHZ)
A111
Backpanel
Ref 0
CCG11A
A111
2,048 MHZ
from DIU or PRC
symm.
29
49
9
10
D319
49
50
50
F E D C
A114
Submodule 0
CCG-0
B111
29
ref
229
49
50
D319
249
250
F E D C
B114
46
47
48
Submodule 1
P0
R2
R1
2,048 MHz
43
44
S3
S2
S1
A111
CCG11A
Backpanel
A111
29
ref
49
D319
49
50
50
F E D C
A114
Submodule 0
2,048 MHz
Ref 1
2,048 MHZ
from DIU or PRC
symm.
CCG-1
B111
29
9
10
229
49
50
D319
249
250
F E D C
Clock from:
MDF, with cable
Type 941/ 942
B114
or from
LTG, with cable
Type 923/ 924
48
46
47
43
44
Submodule 1
P0
R2
R1
2,048 MHz
S3
S2
S1
Fig. 3.1.5 Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CCG 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.1.6.5
Commissioning
System
Standard Cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)

C187
Backpanel
CCG11A
C187
29
49
D319
49
50
50
F E D C
C193
Submodule 0
CCG-0
D187
29
229
49
50
D319
249
250
F E D C
D193
2,048 MHz
46
47
48
Submodule 1
P0
R2
R1
2,048 MHz
43
44
S3
S2
S1
C187
CCG11A
Backpanel
C187
29
49
D319
49
50
50
F E D C
C193
Submodule 0
2,048 MHz
CCG-1
D187
29
229
49
50
D319
249
250
F E D C
D193
46
47
48
43
44
Submodule 1
P0
R2
R1
2,048 MHz
S3
S2
S1
Fig. 3.1.6 Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)

PROC:CCG 10
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.1.6.6
Standard Cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)

C187
Backpanel
Ref 0
CCG11A
C187
2,048 MHZ
from DIU or PRC
symm.
29
49
9
10
D319
49
50
50
F E D C
C193
Submodule 0
CCG-0
D187
29
ref
229
49
50
D319
249
250
F E D C
D193
46
47
48
Submodule 1
P0
R2
R1
2,048 MHz
43
44
S3
S2
S1
C187
CCG11A
Backpanel
C187
29
ref
49
D319
49
50
50
F E D C
C193
Submodule 0
2,048 MHz
Ref 1
2,048 MHZ
from DIU or PRC
symm.
CCG-1
D187
29
9
10
229
49
50
D319
249
250
F E D C
Clock from:
MDF, with cable
Type 941/ 942
D193
or from
LTG, with cable
Type 923/ 924
48
46
47
43
44
Submodule 1
P0
R2
R1
2,048 MHz
S3
S2
S1
Fig. 3.1.7 Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CCG 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Decision Block
When the basic test has been completed, changeover from plesiochronous to
synchronous mode can be made if the reference frequency(ies) is/are available.
h ... 2
h ... 26
Starting the basic test

Changeover from plesiochronous to synchronous mode
Check of System Voltage per Rack Row
Ensure that the main fuses are unscrewed before starting the check
Measure the system voltage for each rack row at the last frame
The operational voltage is dependent upon the charging status of the batteries:
Tolerance range: -60V (-54V .... -71V)
Tolerance range: -48V (-45.6V ... -57V)
Y h ... 4
N h ... 3
Is system voltage -60V (-48V) present?
Special Fault Clearance

Carry out special fault clearance
h ... 2
After finishing special fault clearance
Basic Test (Rack)

Check rack layout and issues against exchange specific document (AKUHW
lists), if not already done.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place.
Look at wrap fields to check that wrap pins and contacts are not bent or
touching and that there are no foreign bodies.
Preparation of Basic Test
......(see 3.1.6)
Pull reference clock and cross-joint cables
Information about Basic Test
The basic test must be carried out for CCG-0 and CCG-1 successively. CCGxxA
modules must be handled with great care as the quartz oscillators installed on
the modules are sensitive to shock and impact.
Checking the Required CCGxxA Modules

Check that the correct CCGxxA modules are inserted
Information about the required CCGxxA modules
PROC:CCG 12
......(see 3.1.5.1)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Checking Switch Settings and Solder Straps
Set only those switches described in the MMN. All other switches are set by the
manufacturer.
Set DIP-FIX switches according to the hardware currently present.
Check that all the solder straps and DIP-FIX switches of the CCGxxA and
CCGB described in the MMN are in the correct position for plesiochronous
mode.
...... TAB
MMN:CCG,
LED:CCG
Checking DCCs
Pull modules CCGB, CCGD and CCGxxA of the CCG-0 (CCG1), but leave in
position
Screw in the associated fuse:
Fuse assignment in R:MB/CCG

Fuse assignment in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Fuse assignment in R:CE
...... (see Fig. 3.1.1)

...... (see Fig. 3.1.2)
...... (see Fig. 3.1.3)
Switch on the associated DCC

Is the green LED of the DCC lit?
10
Y h ... 12
N h ... 10
Replacing Defective DCC

Switch off defective DCC
Unscrew corresponding fuse
Check that spare module is switched off
Replace defective DCC by spare module
Screw in corresponding fuse
Switch on DCC
11
Y h ... 12
N h ... 11

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 9
PROC:CCG 13
ITMN - OFFLINE
12
Commissioning
System
Checking CCG Modules

Switch off DCC
Insert all modules of the associated CCG
Switch on DCC
If LED goes dark again, there is presumably a short circuit in the CCG-modules.
h ... 18
h ... 13
If LED is lit
If LED is dark
13
Prepare Search for Module Suspected of Shorting

Switch of DCC
Pull all modules of the associated CCG
14
Search for Module Suspected of Shorting
Repeat the following steps until all modules of the CCG concerned have been
tested.
Switch off DCC of the CCG concerned (if not already done)
Insert first/ next module
Switch on DCC of the CCG concerned
The following system reactions are possible
Green LED on DCC is lit
Green LED on DCC is not lit
15
h ... 17
h ... 15
Replace Defective Module
Short circuit on the module last inserted

Switch off DCC of the CCG concerned
Replace defective module by spare module
Switch on DCC of the CCG concerned
16
Y h ... 17
N h ... 16

17
h ... 17
Decision Block
Have all modules already been tested?
PROC:CCG 14
Y h ... 18
N h ... 14
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
18
Checking LED AL
Is LED AL on module CCGxxA lit?
19
ITMN - OFFLINE
Y h ... 20
N h ... 19
Replacing Module CCGxxA

Switch off DCC
Replace module by spare module
After replacing the module
20
Decision Block
Have both CCGs already been tested?
21
h ... 12
Y h ... 21
N h ... 9
Plesiochronous Mode
CCG-0 and CCG-1 do not receive an external reference frequency. During

plesiochronous mode with synchronization of CCG1 by CCG0, only the crossjoint cable may be plugged in. Clock cables must not be plugged in, even if they
are listed in the cable laying list. Plesiochronous mode with synchronization of
CCG1 by CCG0 is possible only if there is at least one CCG11A plugged in the
CCG-1.
If CCG22A or CCG33A are plugged in, both CCGs have to be run plesiochronously.
Is there at least one CCG11A in the CCG1?
22
Y h ... 22
N h ... 24
Plesiochronous Mode with Synchronization of CCG1 by CCG0

Switch off converter DCCCR at both CCGs
Insert cross-joint cable type 570-802
...... (see Tab. 3.1.5)
Switch on converter DCCCR at both CCGs

LED AL lights approx. 30 minutes
Then In CCG-0 the LEDs P (plesiochronous) and F (free-running) light on the
faceplate of CCG11A-0. In CCG-1 the LEDs A (holdover state A) and REF0 light
on the faceplate of CCG11A-1.
Then the display on the CCG11A-1 changes to synchronous state 4 via holdover state B. After synchronization the LEDs F and P on module CCG11A-0
light up, as do LEDs REF0 and synchronous state 4 on module CCG11A-1.
When both CRA (control range) LEDs light, PLL regulation is working to its
limits. If LED AL also lights up, there is no longer any synchronization.
If both CRA LEDs are on
If LEDs are dark
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 23
h ... 25
PROC:CCG 15
ITMN - OFFLINE
23
Commissioning
System

h ... 22
24
Plesiochronous Mode without Synchronization of CCG1 by CCG0

LED AL lights approx.30 minutes
When the LED AL has gone dark, the LEDs P (plesiochronous) and F (freerunning) light up
25
Decision Block
End of basic test CCG

Should changeover from plesiochronous mode to synchronous mode be carried
out? (Reference frequency(ies) must be available)
26
Y h ... 26
N h ... END
Prerequisites
Subsequent external synchronization of the exchanges must be carried out in

sequence according to the network hierarchy. Changeover from plesiochronous
to synchronous mode is described below for the following basic configuration:
The CCGs are equipped with CCG11A modules
2.048 MHz frequencies of high accuracy must be available for synchronization

The reference frequencies are derived from a primary frequency standard or
from the DIU30D/DIU120D of a LTG. The connection with the reference
frequencies is established via symmetrical cables (120 Ohm)
references of a frequency standard are cabled to the MDF and from there
to the CCG with cable type 941/942
references of the LTG are cabled to the CCG with cable type 923/924
Reference cable and cross-joint cable must be available.

The cross joint cable 570 802 in CCG-0 is plugged into the following position:
B 112 for F:MB/CCG(A)
B 114 for F:MB/CCG(B)
D 193 for F:SMSC(C)
The cross joint cable 570 802 in CCG-1 is plugged into the following position:
A 112 for F:MB/CCG(A)
A 114 for F:MB/CCG(B)
C 193 for F:SMSC(C)
The CCGs are in operating state ACT/ STB

On CCG11A in CCG-0 the LEDs P and F are lit
On CCG11A in CCG-1 the LEDs Ref0 (green) and 4 are lit
PROC:CCG 16
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
27
Checking Cables
Are reference clock and cross-joint cables present?
28
ITMN - OFFLINE
Y h ... 29
N h ... 28
Ordering Cables
Order reference clock and cross-joint cables
29
Synchronization of the Plesiochronous CCG-0
For synchronization of the plesiochronous CCG-0 no switch settings on the

module CCG11A need to be changed because the switches are not located in
the signal line of the reference frequency. I.e. even in plesiochronous mode the
CCG detects the reference frequency and synchronizes to it.
Plug the first reference frequency into the following position of the CCG-0
A109 in F:MB/CCG(A)
A111 in F:MB/CCG(B)
C 187 in F:SMSC(C)
System reaction:
After 2-3 minutes in CCG-0 on module CCG11A the LED REF0 lights green
LED F is switched off
LED A is switched on
This means that the CCG-0 accepts the reference frequency because it is in
pull-in range
Within one hour the CCG-control runs through the following modes:
LED A lights (holdover state A)

LED B lights (holdover state B)
LED B lights (holdover state B) and LED 1 lights (synchronous state 1)
The display changes trough synchronous states 2 and 3 to synchronous
state 4
Simultaneously the CCG-1 is synchronized by CCG-0 because of the cross-joint

cable between CCG-0 and CCG-1.
If the reference frequency is disturbed during synchronization, the display does

not go beyond status A. In this case, synchronization must be carried out with a
reference frequency derived from a rubidium standard (e.g. FTU).
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CCG 17
ITMN - OFFLINE
30
Commissioning
System
Change Position of Cross-joint Cable

Unplug cross-joint cable 570 802 on CCG-0 from the following positions:
B 112 for F:MB/CCG(A)
B 114 for F:MB/CCG(B)
D 193 for F:SMSC(C)
Plug in cross-joint cable on CCG-0 at the following positions:
A112 for F:MB/CCG(A)
A114 for F:MB/CCG(B)
C 193 for F:SMSC(C)
Now the CCG-1 is not synchronized by the 2.048 MHZ of the CCG-0 anymore
but directly by the reference frequency.
The change of the plug positions has to be finished within a time interval of two
minutes. Otherwise the CCG-1 changes to holdover mode.
31
b
Switchover of CCG-0 to Synchronous Mode

CONF CCG:CCG=0,OST=MBL;
command repetition
EXECD
Switch off CCG-0 converter

Pull module CCG11A
......MMN:CCG,
TAB LED:CCG
Set switch settings / solder straps to synchronous mode

Plug in module CCG11A
Switch on CCG-0 converter
LED AL on the module faceplate of module CCG11A lights
After approx. 30 minutes the LED AL is switched off. The LEDs Ref0 (green),
Ref1 (red) and A light up. After another 120 minutes the CCG-0 has to be
configured to STB (If LED1 is lit).
CONF CCG:CCG=0,OST=STB;
command repetition
32
EXECD
Connecting the second Reference Frequency to CCG-1

Plug the second reference frequency into the following position on CCG-1:
B109 in F:MB/CCG(A)
B111 in F:MB/CCG(B)
D 187 for F:SMSC(C)
In CCG-0 the LED Ref 1 (red) is switched off. The green LED (Ref 0) indicates
that Ref 0 is synchronizing.
PROC:CCG 18
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
33
b
ITMN - OFFLINE
Switchover of CCG-1 to Synchronous Mode

CONF CCG:CCG=1,OST=MBL;
command repetition
EXECD
Switch off CCG-1 converter

Pull module CCG11A
...... TAB
MMN:CCG,
LED:CCG
Set switch settings / solder straps to synchronous mode

Plug in module CCG11A
Switch on CCG-1 converter
LED AL on the module faceplate of module CCG11A lights
After approx. 30 minutes the LED AL is switched off. The LEDs Ref0 (green),
Ref1 (red) and A light up. After another 120 minutes the CCG-1 has to be
configured to STB (If LED1 is lit).
CONF CCG:CCG=1,OST=STB;
command repetition
EXECD
END
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CCG 19
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
PROC:CCG 20
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.2
Off-line Installation of Message Buffer

MBB
3.2.1
Documents
The following documents are required as reference
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Maintenance Manual MMN:MB

AKUHW Lists
PROC:MBB 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.2.2
3.2.2.1
Commissioning
System
MB in Rack MB/CCG
Rack MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for MB)
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
MOLOC A001 (MB-0)
Fuse panel
A
B
11
MOLOC A001 (MB-1)
A
B
MUT01
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT02
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT03
MUT04
F:SYPC(A)
B
MUT05
SYPD (or empty)
MUT06
MUT07
04
MOLOC A001 (MB-0)
A
B
14
MOLOC A001 (MB-1)
A
B
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT08
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT09
CD
Fig. 3.2.1 Rack: MB/CCG

PROC:MBB 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.2.2.2
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fuse Assignment R:MB/CCG

Basic system configuration
extension frame for SN

(252 LTG)
FU
11
14
MUT
02
03
08
09
UNIT
MB-0:
MBUS0-0
MBUL0-0
MBUL0-1
MB-1:
MBUS1-0
MBUL1-0
MBUL1-1
MB-0:
MBUS0-1
MBUL0-2
MBUL0-3
MB1:
MBUS1-1
MBUL1-2
MBUL1-3
Tab. 3.2.1 Fuse Assignment R:MB/CCG Basic Rack
Extension rack for SN (504 LTG)

FU
11
14
MUT
02
03
08
09
UNIT
MB-0:
MBUS0-2
MBUL0-4
MBUL0-5
MB-1:
MBUS1-2
MBUL1-4
MBUL1-5
MB-0:
MBUS0-3
MBUL0-6
MBUL0-7
MB1:
MBUS1-3
MBUL1-6
MBUL1-7
Tab. 3.2.2 Fuse Assignment R:MB/CCG Extension Rack
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:MBB 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.2.3
MB in Rack SN/MB/LTGM
3.2.3.1
FU 01
FU
Rack SN/MB/LTGM
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
30
32
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
C
33 FU
31
F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)
MUT02
F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)
MUT03
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT04
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT05
F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)
MUT06
F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)
MUT07
D
C
FU
08
MOLOC A001 (MB-0)
A
B
22
MOLOC A001 (MB-1)
A
B
C
D
C
D
CD
Fig. 3.2.2 Rack: SN/MB/LTGM

PROC:MBB 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.2.3.2
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fuse Assignment R:SN/MB/LTGM

Basic Rack
Capacity stage until SN
(126LTG)
Basic Rack
Capacity stage until SN
(252LTG)
FU
22
FU
22
MUT
04
05
MUT
04
05
UNIT
MB-0:
MBUS0-0
MBUL0-0
MBUL0-1
MB-1:
MBUS1-0
MBUL1-0
MBUL1-1
EINH
MB-0:
MBUS0-1
MBUL0-2
MBUL0-3
MB1:
MBUS1-1
MBUL1-2
MBUL1-3
Tab. 3.2.3 Fuse Assignment R:SN/MB/LTGM

Basic Rack / Extension Rack
Capacity stage until SN (504LTG)

Extension Rack
Extension Rack
FU
22
FU
22
MUT
04
05
MUT
04
05
UNIT
MB-0:
MBUS0-2
MBUL0-4
MBUL0-5
MB-1:
MBUS1-2
MBUL1-4
MBUL1-5
EINH
MB-0:
MBUS0-3
MBUL0-6
MBUL0-7
MB1:
MBUS1-3
MBUL1-6
MBUL1-7
Tab. 3.2.4 Fuse Assignment R:SN/MB/LTGM Extension Racks
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:MBB 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.2.4
MB in Rack CE
3.2.4.1
FU 01
FU
Rack CE
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
FU
Fuse panel / AD:RAL
08
MOLOC C259 (Supply for MB-0)
MUT01
F:SMSC(C)-0
MUT02
F:SMSC(C)-1
MUT04
F:PIOP(A)
MUT03
D
27
MOLOC C259 (Supply for MB-1)
C
D
C
D
Air circulator
C
MUT08
F:PBC(A)
MUT05
F:PBC(A)
MUT06
D
C
D
Air circulator
MUT09
F:PIOPA)
MUT07
F:DEV
MUT10
D
C
D
Air circulator
MUT11
Fig. 3.2.3 Rack CE

PROC:MBB 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.2.4.2
Fuse Assignment MB(B) (R:CE)

Rack CE
Capacity stage until SN (31LTG)
FU
27
MUT
02
04
UNIT
MB-0
MB-1
FRAME
SMSC-0
SMSC-1
Tab. 3.2.5 Fuse Assignment R:CE
3.2.5
Capacity stages
Capacity stage of the SN
Capacity stage of the MB

(Number of frames)
Frame Type
SN 31 LTG (Rural Exchange)
2 (1 for MB-0 / 1 for MB-1)
F:SMSC(C)
SN 63 / 126 LTG
2 (1 for MB-0 / 1 for MB-1)
F:MB/CCG(B)
SN 252 LTG
4 (2 for MB-0 / 2 for MB-1)
F:MB/CCG(B)
SN 504 LTG
8 (4 for MB-0 / 4 for MB-1)
F:MB/CCG(B)
Tab. 3.2.6 Capacity stages
Basic Test (Rack)

Fuse Assignment MB(B)
The fuse assignment to the frames F:MB/CCG(B) / F:SMSC(C) is dependent on

the rack used:
Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:MB/CCG
Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:CE
Information Block
The MB can be delivered in different capacity stages (According to the capacity

stage of the SN):
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
...... (see 3.2.2.2)

...... (see 3.2.3.2)
...... (see 3.2.4.2)
...... (see Tab. 3.2.6)
PROC:MBB 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Preparation
Switch off all DCCs of MB(B)
Unscrew all MB fuses
Mounting locations of the corresponding DCCs in R:MB/CCG

Mounting locations of the corresponding DCCs in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Mounting locations of the corresponding DCCs in R:CE
......(see Fig. 3.2.1)

......(see Fig. 3.2.2)
......(see Fig. 3.2.3)
Off-line Installation of the first / next Frame for (MB-0)

Screw in fuse of the first / next frame for MB-0

......(see 3.2.2.2)
......(see 3.2.3.2)
......(see 3.2.4.2)
Check that all corresponding modules are plugged in

Switch on corresponding DCC for MB-0
Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:MB/CCG

Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:CE
......(see Fig. 3.2.1)

......(see Fig. 3.2.2)
......(see Fig. 3.2.3)
Y h ... 15
N h ... 6
Check DCC (MB-0)

Pull all related modules but leave in position
Y h ... 11
N h ... 7
Fault Clearance DCC / Fuse (MB-0)
Possible fault cause: DCC or main fuse defective

Switch off the DCC affected
Screw out corresponding fuse
If fuse is suspect to be faulty
If DCC is suspect to be faulty
PROC:MBB 8
h ... 8
h ... 9
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
Replace Fuse
Replace affected fuse with spare fuse
h ... 10
Replace DCC
Replace affected DCC with spare DCC
10
ITMN - OFFLINE
h ... 10
Check Spare DCC / Fuse

Screw in fuse again
Switch on corresponding DCC again
11
Y h ... 11
N h ... 14
Fault Clearance Modules (MB-0)

Insert first / next corresponding module
12
Decision: next Module (MB-0)

Have all corresponding modules already been tested?
13
Y h ... 12
N h ... 13
Y h ... 15
N h ... 11
Replace Module (MB-0)
The module last inserted is suspect to be faulty

Replace module with spare module
14
Y h ... 11
N h ... 14

Repeat installation test after successful fault clearance
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 5
PROC:MBB 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
15
Commissioning
System
Off-line Installation of the first / next Frame for (MB-1)

Screw in fuse of the first / next frame for MB-1

......(see 3.2.2.2)
......(see 3.2.3.2)
......(see 3.2.4.2)
Check that all corresponding modules are plugged in

Switch on corresponding DCC for MB-1
Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:MB/CCG

Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:CE
16
......(see Fig. 3.2.1)

......(see Fig. 3.2.2)
......(see Fig. 3.2.3)
Y h ... 25
N h ... 16
Check DCC (MB-1)

Pull all related modules but leave in position
17
Y h ... 21
N h ... 17
Fault Clearance DCC / Fuse (MB-1)
Possible fault cause: DCC or main fuse defective

Switch off the DCC affected
Screw out corresponding fuse
If fuse is suspect to be faulty
If DCC is suspect to be faulty
18
Replace Fuse
Replace affected fuse with spare fuse
19
h ... 18
h ... 19
h ... 20
Replace DCC
Replace affected DCC with spare DCC
PROC:MBB 10
h ... 20
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
20
ITMN - OFFLINE
Check Spare DCC / Fuse

Screw in fuse again
Switch on corresponding DCC again
21
Y h ... 21
N h ... 24
Fault Clearance Modules (MB-1)

Insert first / next corresponding module
22
Decision: next Module (MB-1)

Have all corresponding modules already been tested?
23
Y h ... 22
N h ... 23
Y h ... 25
N h ... 21
Replace Module (MB-1)
The module last inserted is suspect to be faulty

Replace module with spare module
24
Y h ... 21
N h ... 24

Repeat installation test after successful fault clearance
25
h ... 15
Decision: Next Frame

Have all frames of the MB already been put into service?
Y h ... END
N h ... 5
END
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:MBB 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
PROC:MBB 12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3
Off-line Installation Test of the System Panel

SYP
3.3.1
Documentation
The following documentation will be needed for reference:
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Maintenance Manual MMN:SYP / MMN:SYP for CDE

AKUHW lists
NIMN:SYP for the programming of the USER-PROM
PROC:SYP 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.2
Commissioning
System
Rack R:MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for SYP)
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
Fuse panel
A
B
FU
03
MOLOC A001 (DCCCR) (10A)

B
09
15
MUT01
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT02
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT03
MOLOC A043 (TXA:SYPC) (1A)

MOLOC A116 (DCCCL) (10A)
MUT04
A
F:SYPC(A)
B
05
06
07
08
(SYPD1) (1A)
MUT05
SYPD (or empty)
(SYPD2) (1A)
(SYPD3) (1A)
MUT06
MUT07
A
B
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT08
F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT09
(SYPD0) (1A)
A
B
CD
Fig. 3.3.1 Rack R:MB/CCG

PROC:SYP 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.3
FU 01
FU
Rack R:CE
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
FU
Fuse panel / AD:RAL
02
MOLOC C101 (DCCCR) (10A)
MUT01
F:SMSC(C)-0
MUT02
F:SMSC(C)-1
MUT04
F:PIOP(A)
MUT03
D
06
SYPD0 (10A)
C
D
11
M:T/RM:SYCR and alarm transfer (10A)

C
D
23
MOLOC C101 (DCCCR for CDEX) (10A)
Air circulator
C
MUT08
F:PBC(A)
MUT05
F:PBC(A)
MUT06
D
C
D
Air circulator
MUT09
F:PIOPA)
MUT07
F:DEV
MUT10
D
C
D
Air circulator
MUT11
Fig. 3.3.2 Rack R:CE (Fuse Assignment for SYP)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.3.4
Rack R:SE
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
Fuse panel
A
MUT01
any Equipment
MUT02
B
A
FU
any Equipment
MUT03
07
MOLOC A001 (DCCCR) (10 A)

A
10
MOLOC A043 (TXA:SYPC) (1 A)
MOLOC A116 (DCCCL) (10 A)
F:SYPC(A) or
any Equipment
MUT04
16
any Equipment
18
MUT05
(SYPD0) (1 A)
08
(SYPD1) (1 A)
09
(SYPD2) (1 A)
17
(SYPD3) (1 A)
any Equipment
MUTxx
B
A
B
F:SYPC(A) or
any Equipment
MUT17
CD
Fig. 3.3.3 Rack R:SE (Fuse Assignment for SYP)
PROC:SYP 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.5
Introduction
The system panel is supplied in a number of different variants, e.g.:
The SYP can be located in F:SYPC or in F:SMSC(C) (Rural Exchanges)

with one or two system panel displays
with or without module TXA:SYPC for the forwarding of alarms (in F:SYPC)
with CDEX modules built into the frame for the 2.048-MHz clock distribution incl. DC
converters
For the position of the SYP in the EWSD system, see Fig. 3.3.4.
In the installation test phase of an EWSD/MSC network node, the SYP must be
placed in service in a minimum configuration.
All other work, such as the connection of external alarms and additional SYPDs, should
be carried out after installation testing or when the node is in service.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.5.1
Commissioning
System
Position of the SYP in the EWSD System
SYPD
SYPD
Alternative
F:SMSC(C)-0 in R:CE
F:SYPC in R:MB/CCG:
F:SMSC(C)-1 in R:CE
CP/IOP
CP/IOP
MDF/DDF
MDF/DDF
E&M
transmission
E&M
transmission
SYPD
SYPD
OMC
AC/DC
OMC
AC/DC
Fig. 3.3.4 Position of the SYP in the EWSD system
PROC:SYP 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.6
Requirements for Installation Testing
The Maintenance Manual MMN:SYP (MMN:SYP for CDE) must be available
The cable laying list must be available
If the SYP is located in F:SYPC, the F:SYPC must be equipped with the following
modules at least:
DCCCR
COM:SYPC
IOC:SYPC
RM:EA
T/RM:EA
For mounting locations, see Fig. 3.3.7.
If the SYP is located in F:SMSC(C), the F:SMSC(C) must be equipped with the
following modules:
DCCCR
GCGR
PU:SYCR
T/RM:SYCR
For mounting locations, see Fig. 3.3.8.
One SYPD must be connected directly using cable type 225 (e.g. at SYP mounting
location B034 in F:SYPC / C 135 in F:SMSC(C))
The power supply is fed to the SYPD via the same cable.
Requirement: Fuse for -UE -48/60 V is inserted.
A programmed USER-PROM is mounted on module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR (standard PROM with the designation V30113-....) (see Fig. 3.3.5) / (see Fig. 3.3.6).
Note:
This USER-PROM is pre-programmed for one SYPD-0 and one SYPD-1.
If only one SYPD is installed, the double SYP indicator lights up when the SYP is
active and in service, and messages are output stating that the number of SYPDs
does not match the number of SYPDs programmed in the USER-PROM.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.3.6.1
ESD safety precautions must be observed, i.e. a grounding bracelet must be

worn, for instance.
Location of the USER-PROM
COM:SYPC
USER-PROM (V30113-J122-A1) EPROM 2732
Standard PROM or Exch. Spec. PROM
Fig. 3.3.5 Location of the USER-PROM on module COM:SYPC
PU:SYCR
USER-PROM (V30113-J122-A1) EPROM 2764

Standard PROM or Exch. Spec. PROM
Fig. 3.3.6 Location of the USER PROM on module PU:SYCR.
PROC:SYP 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.6.2
Overview of SYP Connections in F:SYPC

SYPD with internal 220 V AC
power supply
SYPD1
OMC
E&M
EWSD node
E&M
SYPD with -UE power supply
via SYP from the fuse panel
SYPD0
Backplane connector:
B2 034
T/R
SYPD1
SYPD2
SYPD3
A2 040
A2 034
B2 040
E1/M1
E2/M2
MDF
SYPD0-3
A2 028
E3/M3
T/R
SYPD4-7
B2 028
2DR
T/R
E1/M1 4DR
E1/M1
E2/M2 4DR
E2/M2
E3/M3 4DR
E3/M3
SYPD0 2-wire only
SYPD1-3 4-wire
DCCCR
A001
IOC:
SYPC
COM:
SYPC
A013
A019
RM:EA
A025
T/RM:
SYPC
0
A031
T/RM:
SYPC
1
TXA:
SYPC
Optional
Optional
A037
A043
SYPC(A)
S30804-B2573-
EDL1..EDL24
AL1..AL12
Backplane
connector:
A2 010
A2 016
B2 010
B2 016
External alarms
from the MDF
1-24
to/from CP
IOP-0
A2 022
A2 046
AL13..AL24
B2 046
to the MDF
Alarm forwarding to
other OMCs
IOP-1
Fig. 3.3.7 Overview of system panel connections in F:SYPC
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.3.6.3
Overview of SYP Connections in F:SMSC(C)

SYPD with internal 220 V AC
power supply
SYPD1
OMC
E&M
EWSD node
E&M
SYPD with -UE power supply
via SYP from the fuse panel
SYPD0
SYPD0-1
SYPD1
Backplane connector:
C 135
T/R
D141
MDF
D 141
E1/M1
T/R
2DR
E1/M1 4DR
SYPD0 2-wire only
SYPD1 4-wire
DCCCR
GCGR
PU:SYCR
T/RM:
SYCR
SMSC(C)-0
S30804-B2693-
C101
C119
C129
C141
EAI1..EAI8
Backplane
connector:
C 113
C 107
D 113
D 107
AL1..AL8
D 141
External alarms
from the MDF 1-8
to/from CP
IOP-0
D 141
to the MDF
Alarm forwarding to
other OMCs
IOP-1
Fig. 3.3.8 Overview of system panel connections in F:SMSC(C)
PROC:SYP 10
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.7
SYPD
Every EWSD exchange is equipped with at least one system panel display (SYPD),
which is able to display:
alarms and indications from specific units in the system

general system alarms
the current call-processing load on the processor
external alarms
Alarms and indications are indicated visually (LED indicators) and audibly (horn) on the
SYPD.
The indicators on the SYPD are arranged in three sections:
system unit alarms

general system alarms
external alarms
A front view of the SYPD is shown in Fig. 3.3.9
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.3.7.1
Front View of the SYPD
Day
Month
Line/trunk groups
LTG
Maint.
alarm
Service
alarm
Time
External alarms
Switching
network
Ext.
Equip.
Coordination processor
CP
Central unit
Message
buffer
Clock
Common
channel
signaling
ERL
Processor
load
System panel
SYP
Update
Test
Accept
TGRP alarm
Trunk group
blocked
External
DLU alarms
HW units MBL
Line lockout
Cat. 1
Admin.
alarm
Sig. links
blocked
Signaling
link
Cat. 2
Recovery
Alarm
suppression
Call
identification
System
operator
Time insecure
Labels for the external alarms must be affixed in accordance with the
customers requirements and the programming of the USER-PROM.
Fig. 3.3.9 Front view of the system panel display SYPD
PROC:SYP 12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.7.2
SYPD Modules
SYPD front view:
Loosen screws to open

the SYPD
Open SYPD:
(module DYM:SYPD swung to the side)
Loosen screws to access modules

EWA (DC/DC converter) and
T/RM:SYPD
Module DYM:SYPD
(swung to the side)
Shielding panel and support for
modules EWA:SYPD and
T/RM:SYPD (attached behind)
to internal horn
Open SYPD
Module DYM:SYPD and shielding panel
swung to the side
to external horn
Internal horn
EWA (DCDC
Plug position for

SYP/SYPD interface
T/RM:SYPD
1
1
Horn
volume
Ext. horn
1=off
2=ON
21
Transm. MB
1=open
2=grounded
2
2
Int. horn
1=off
2=ON
Plug position for

SYP/SYPD interface
+UE -UE
DC from:
ACC (220/110 V AC power supply)
or -48//-60 V DC power supply
Fig. 3.3.10 SYPD modules
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 13
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.8
3.3.8.1
Commissioning
System
Connection of SYPDs
General
The system panel displays (SYPD) are controlled by the system panel control (SYPC)
or the system panel control rural (SYCR).
In DE4 and DE5 switches, the system panel control is installed in module frame
SYPC(A) (B2573) and can be linked to a maximum of 8 SYPDs. This frame can also
accommodate up to 10 CDEX modules (Q900) for external synchronization.
In DE3 switches (rural exchanges), the smaller system panel control SYCR is used,
which can be linked to a maximum of 2 SYPDs. SYCR is installed in module frame
SMSC (B2693) together with the clock generator, message buffer and switching
network.
3.3.8.2
Options for the Connection of the System Panel Display SYPD

The SYPD can be installed locally or in a remote location, depending on the application.
The transmission medium and cabling required between a remote SYPD and the
SYPC/SYCR depends on the distance between them.
An overview of the different options is shown in Fig. 3.3.11.
Further information on the signaling methods and cabling are shown in Fig. 3.3.12 and
Fig. 3.3.13.
PROC:SYP 14
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Maintenance room
Exchange
Remote building
T/RM:SYPC
T/RM:SYCR
(4-wire transmission)
Range 2 * 200
= ca. 3km (1)
SYPD
with remote power feed
max. 200 m
MDF
Range 2 * 200
= ca. 3km (1)
DF
SYPD
< 3 km
MDF
DF
Loop signaling
Range 2 * 750
= ca. 11 km (1)
SYPD
< 11km
FDM/PCM
equipment
MDF
Line leading to carrier

equipment
E&M signaling
Range 2 * 200
= ca. 3 km (1)
FDM/PCM
link
< 3 km
Maintenance centre
FDM/PCM
equipment
DF
SYPD
Every SYPD must have its own power supply (-48/60 VDC or 110/220 VAC).
If a SYPD uses remote power feeding, the maximum range with standard cabling is 200m.
(1) applies to copper lines with a diameter of 0.6mm
Fig. 3.3.11 Options for the connection of the system

panel display SYPD
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 15
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
System panel control

SYPC / SYCR
FDM/PCM equipment
M/SAB
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
(MA)
RX
TX
(MB)
2
BR
FDM/PCM
GND
-UB
M
O
D
U
L
E
link
GND
E/SAN
(EA)
RX
TX
(EB)
GND
-UB
System panel display

SYPD
FDM/PCM equipment
E/SAN
(EA)
RX
TX
(EB)
GND
GND
-UB
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
M
O
D
U
L
E
E/SAN
(MA)
RX
TX
(MB)
2
BR
-UB
1
GND
For explanations see Tab. 3.3.1
Fig. 3.3.12 E&M signaling (4-wire transmission)
PROC:SYP 16
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Two-wire line
with loop signaling
System panel control

SYPC, SYCR
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
A (T)
(T) A
B (R)
(R) B
System panel display

SYPD
TX
TX
Display
module
M
O
D
U
L
E
RX
RX
-UB
GND
For explanations see Tab. 3.3.1

Fig. 3.3.13 Loop signaling (2-wire transmission)
Explanations:
-UB:
Exchange voltage -48/60 V
GND:
Ground
RX:
Receiver
BR:
Switch
1= FDM/PCM equipment has ground
2= FDM/PCM does not offer ground
TX:
Transmitter (fully electronic, transistors as switches)

It must be ensured that the voltages to be switched by the transmission
equipment lie in the range -48/-60V.
Tab. 3.3.1 Explanations on E&M and loop signaling
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 17
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Explanations:
Range when using E&M signaling (4-wire lines):
between SYPC/SYCR and FDM/PCM equipment: each 2*200 ohm (ca. 3 km *))
between the two FDM/PCM equipments: varies according to FDM/PCM system
between FDM/PCM equipment and SYPD: each 2*200 ohm (ca. 3 km *) )
*) applies to copper lines with a diameter of 0.6 mm
Range when using loop signaling (2-wire lines):
between SYPC/SYCR and SYPD: each 2*750 ohm (ca. 11 km)
(applies to copper lines with a diameter of 0.6 mm)
Tab. 3.3.1 Explanations on E&M and loop signaling
3.3.8.3
Location of BR switches on T/RM:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR

Switch BR:
This switch is used to connect the MB-line to ground in Position 2 for the SYPD which
runs via 4-wire method on the transmit side.
This is necessary, for example, if a connected carrier frequency device is not grounded.
T/RM:SYPC
E&M interface 2
E&M interface 3
3BR
1
E&M interface 1
1BR
2
2BR
1
MB transmission
1= open
2= grounded
Fig. 3.3.14 SYPD E&M grounding on T/RM:SYPC
PROC:SYP 18
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
T/RM:SYCR
E&M interface
BR
1
MB transmission
1= open
2= grounded
Fig. 3.3.15 SYPD E&M grounding on T/RM:SYCR
3.3.8.4
Installing A Second SYPD in the Same Building

A second SYPD can be connected directly to the SYP using standard EWS cable, but
the length of the cable must not exceed 200 meters.
In this case, the SYPD does not need any external power supply from a 220V power
pack or -48/-60V, because it is fed by the SYP. Check that the correct fuse is inserted
in the rack for this SYPD.
When using the standard USER-PROM, the SYPDs must be installed as SYPD 0
and SYPD 1.
If the MB wire on the transmission side of the 4-wire ports needs to be grounded, the
corresponding switch must be set to position 2 on module T/RM:SYPC (see Fig. 3.3.14)
(T/RM:SYCR in F:SMSC(C) (see Fig. 3.3.15)) and on module T/RM:SYPD
(see Fig. 3.3.10) .
3.3.8.5
Installing a Second SYPD in Another Building Without Transmission

Equipment
Range:
2-wire: 2*750 ohm ca. 11 km
4-wire: 2*200 ohm ca. 3km
The choice of 2-wire or 4-wire line to connect the remote SYPD depends on the distance
(see Fig. 3.3.11).
The interfaces of SYP and SYPD are illustrated in: Fig. 3.3.16 - Fig. 3.3.19
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 19
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
The 2-wire or 4-wire transmission lines originate at mounting location A 028 of the SYP
and run parallel to the SYP backplane mounting locations on the special MDF terminal
strip.
Caution: It must be ensured that each SYPD has its own transmission link.
When using 2-wire lines, wire R at the SYP is connected to wire R of the SYPD and wire
T of the SYP is connected to wire T of the SYPD.
When using 4-wire lines, wire MA at the SYP is connected to wire EA of the SYPD and
wire MB of the SYP is connected to wire EB of the SYPD. The connections in the other
direction are made on the same principle.
Power feeding of the SYPD is either from the -48/-60V exchange voltage or from an integral 110/220V power pack.
Attach labels to the SYPD as described in the procedure.
Check the horn setting.
3.3.8.6
Installing a Second SYPD in Another Building With Transmission

Equipment
E&M signaling is used on the link between SYP and SYPD. In other words, the transmitting SYP or SYPD sets the input voltage for transmission by means of an electronic
switch to approximately 0V or the original value (usually 48/60V).
On PCM links, these signals are carried in channel 16 and converted back into E&M
signals at the other end for transfer to the SYP/SYPD.
For this reason, signaling converters are needed in conjunction with PCM links.
In carrier systems, these signals are transmitted outside the voice band (out-band
signaling).
Range: unlimited
The interfaces of SYP and SYPD are shown in: Fig. 3.3.16, Fig. 3.3.18
Caution: It must be ensured that each SYPD is assigned its own transmission link.
The SYPD is fed either with the -48/-60V exchange voltage or from an integral 110/220V
power pack.
Attach labels to the SYPD as described in the procedure.
Check the horn setting.
If necessary, set the switches for grounding of signal MB in SYP and SYPD.
PROC:SYP 20
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.8.7
Block Diagram of the SYPD and its Interfaces
DYM:SYPD
Internal horn
External horn
Connector pin
number:
to/from SYP:
43
44
45
46
55
56
13
14
16
17
4-wire
2-wire
DC from
frame
MA
MB
EA
EB
R
T
- UE
3
4
5
6
15
16
53
54
56
T/RM:SYPD
57
B2
- UE
DC from OMC
DCC
A2
Standard
DC from transformer
and rectifier
110 / 220 V AC
ACC:SYPD
Option
Fig. 3.3.16 Block diagram of the SYPD and its interfaces
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 21
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.8.8
Commissioning
System
R/T and E+M Interfaces in F:SMSC for SYPD-0 - SYPD-1
to SYPD-0
C 135
Pin 56,57 -UE
Pin 53,54 GND
to SYPD
power supply
T
15
R
16
to MDF / DDF
(External SYPDs)
SYPD 0
SYPD 1
53
T
54
R
55
EA
56
EB
57 58
MA MB
Module T/RM:SYCR
CD 141
EA= Ear A
MA= Mouth A
Grounded if signal
ground is available. In
this case only the EA or
MA signals are
connected
Fig. 3.3.17 R/T and E+M interfaces in F:SMSC

for SYPD-0 - SYPD-1
PROC:SYP 22
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.3.8.9
ITMN - OFFLINE
R/T and E+M Interfaces in F:SYPC for SYPD-0 - SYPD-3
to SYPD-0
B2 034
Pin 55, 56 -UE
Pin 53, 54 +UE
to SYPD
power supply
to SYPD-1
A2 040
Pin 55, 56 -UE
Pin 53, 54 +UE
to SYPD
power supply
to SYPD-2
to SYPD-3
A2 034
B2 040
Pin 55, 56 -UE

Pin 53, 54 +UE
to SYPD
power supply
Pin 55, 56 -UE

Pin 53, 54 +UE
to SYPD
power supply
External
SYPDs to MDF
/ DDF
A2 028
T
15
R
16
EA EB
3
4
MA MB
5
6
EA EB
3
4
MA MB
5
6
EA EB
3
4
MA MB
5
6
SYP backplane
connector
15 T
16 R
SYPD 0
3 EA1
4 EB1
SYPD 1
5 MA1
6 MB1
7 EA2
8 EB2
SYPD 2
9 MA2
10 MB2
11 EA3
12 EB3
SYPD 3
13 MA3
14 MB3
EA= Ear A
MA= Mouth A
46
T
47
R
8
9
23 41
EA1 EB1 MA1 MB1
30 31 49 50
EA2 EB2 MA2 MB2
Module T/RM:SYPC
A2 031
3
6
45 42
EA3 EB3 MA3 MB3
Pin numbers correspond to numbering on

the module backplane!
Example: Backplane pin
3 is connector pin 43
Grounded if signal
MA signals are
connected
Fig. 3.3.18 R/T and E+M interfaces in F:SYPC

for SYPD-0 - SYPD-3
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 23
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.8.10
Commissioning
System
R/T and E+M Interfaces for SYPD-5 - SYPD-8

External
SYPDs to MDF
/ DDF
A2 028
SYP backplane
connector
15 T
16 R
SYPD 5
3 EA1
4 EB1
SYPD 6
5 MA1
6 MB1
7 EA2
8 EB2
SYPD 7
9 MA2
10 MB2
11 EA3
12 EB3
SYPD 8
13 MA3
14 MB3
EA= Ear A
MA= Mouth A
46
T
47
R
8
9
23 41
EA1 EB1 MA1 MB1
30 31 49 50
EA2 EB2 MA2 MB2
Module T/RM:SYPC
A2 037
3
6
45 42
EA3 EB3 MA3 MB3
Pin numbers correspond to numbering on

the module backplane!
Example: Backplane pin
3 is connector pin 43
Grounded if signal
MA signals are
connected.
Fig. 3.3.19 R/T and E+M interfaces in frame SYPC

for SYPD-5 - SYPD-8
PROC:SYP 24
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.8.11
Installation of More Than 4 SYPDs (only in F:SYPC)

Module T/RM:SYPC has interfaces to four SYPDs. Additional SYPDs (maximum 8) can
be connected if another T/RM:SYPC module is installed (see Fig. 3.3.7).
3.3.9
The User EPROM (USMOF)

External alarms can be displayed at the SYPD. The way in which external alarms are
displayed (alarm priority and lamp address) must be programmed in the user EPROM
(USMOF). In addition, it is possible to analyze the duration of alarms by means of timers
and raise their priority where appropriate.
To adapt alarm signaling (external alarm inputs) to specific customer requirements,
parameter sets are provided which are stored in the user EPROM. Parameters include
the assignment of alarm events to their display and priority in the external alarm section
(all other alarms are controlled by the coordination processor CP). It is also defined in
the user EPROM which SYPDs are connected, which one of them is operating as the
master panel, the horn time limit and the CP supervision time.
Programming of the USER-PROM is described in NIMN:SYP.
3.3.10
Connection of an External Horn

The same type of horn is used externally and internally (telephone transmitter amplifier).
For its connection, see Fig. 3.3.10
3.3.11
Connection of External Alarms to the SYPD

External alarm lines are connected to the MDF special terminal strip and jumpered to
the SYPs external alarm inputs at the MDF.
The unit issuing the alarm can send signals to the SYP as follows:
With normally open contact: The unit switches ground to the SYP with its contact
With normally closed contact: The unit interrupts ground to the SYP with its contact
Connection of alarm lines to the MDF
With one wire: The other side of the contact is connected to the common ground in
the unit issuing the alarm
With two wires: One wire is connected to the MDF. The other wire is connected to
the MDFs common ground.
The SYP ground is connected to the MDF over one wire of the alarm cable.
For a graphical representation of the various connection options see Fig. 3.3.20.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 25
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
External alarms, closed loop (cl)
External alarms, open loop (ol)
1-wire:
1-wire:
SYP
SYP
External
equipment
External
equipment
2-wire:
SYP
2-wire:
External
equipment
SYP
External
equipment
Fig. 3.3.20 Methods of connecting alarm lines to the MDF

The assignment of connector pins on cable 223 to the MDF is shown in Fig. 3.3.21,
Fig. 3.3.23, Fig. 3.3.24:
PROC:SYP 26
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
No. of the
external
alarm
Connector
pin no.
41
A 022
Connector
pin no.
No. of the
external
alarm
EAL 13
EAL 1
EAL 14
EAL 2
EAL 15
EAL 3
EAL 16
EAL 4
EAL 17
EAL 5
EAL 18
EAL 6
EAL 19
EAL 7
EAL 20
EAL 8
EAL 21
EAL 9
EAL 22
EAL 10
EAL 23
EAL 11
EAL 24
EAL 12
not
used
not
used
Ground
from SYP
60
20
Fig. 3.3.21 Alarm inputs on the backplane connector of cable 223

(32 wires) from the MDF to the SYP (module RM:EA)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 27
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
No. of the
external
alarm
Connector
pin no.
Connector
pin no.
D 141
01
41
EAJ 1
EAJ 2
EAJ 3
EAJ 4
EAJ 5
EAJ 6
EAJ 7
EAJ 8
60
20
Fig. 3.3.22 Alarm inputs on the backplane connector of module

T/RM:SYCR from the MDF to the SYP
EAL1
EAL9
EAL13
EAL12
EAL21
EAL24
not used
not used
EAL 8
EAL20
GND
Fig. 3.3.23 Assignment of external alarms on the horizontal MDF
PROC:SYP 28
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
EAL1
EAL 8
not used
EAL9
EAL12
EAL13
EAL20
not used
EAL21
EAL24
GND
Ground
from SYP
Fig. 3.3.24 Assignment of external alarms on the vertical MDF
3.3.11.1
Test of Alarms
Alarm as normally open contact:
Apply ground to the corresponding MDF input. The corresponding SYPD LED should
then light up.
Alarm as normally closed contact:
The SYPD LED is lit when the alarm is programmed as normally closed contact and the
alarm input is open. Applying ground switches off the alarm and the corresponding
SYPD LED goes off.
3.3.12
Forwarding of Alarms with Module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR

Module TXA:SYPC or T/RM:SYCR is used to forward alarms from the system panel
control. Up to 24 (max.8 in the case of T/RM:SYCR) different SYPD indications can be
forwarded to external fault signaling equipment via relays. It is defined in the user
EPROM which priorities of alarms (critical, major, minor) on which SYPD indicator are
output to one or more relays. The assignment of relays to alarm lines (AL) is fixed. The
relays have the same designation as the alarm lines and their contacts are marked al.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 29
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Electrically, there are four ways of forwarding alarms (see also Fig. 3.3.25):
a) contact switches ground on or off
b) contact switches -48V / -60V on or off
c) contact switches a passive loop on or off
d) contact switches an active loop carrying -48V / -60V on or off
Resistors or jumpers must be inserted for each relay or wire pair in the jumper field of
module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR, in accordance with the type of alarm forwarding used,
as shown in Fig. 3.3.25 (resistors are included with the rack delivery package).
The position of the jumper field on module TXA:SYPC is shown in: MMN:SYP-TAB .
The position of the jumper field on module T/RM:SYCR is shown in: MMN:SYP for CDE
-TAB.
PROC:SYP 30
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.12.1
Connections on the Jumper Field for Alarm Output (TXA:SYPC /

T/RM:SYCR)
a) Ground
b) Power
.2
.2
DB
.3
.5
c) Passive loop
d) Active loop
.2
.2
.3
.3
.3
.5
GND B
.5
R or DB
.5
.4
.4
.4
.4
.1
.1
.1
.1
-UB
.7
.7
DB
.8
0.1M
.7
.7
DB
.8
=
0.1M
470
B
2K
.8
.8
=
0.1M
470
DB
DB
0.1M
470
470
B
2K
A
RA
B
RB
Receiver
2K
RA+RB
2K
-UB
GND B
-UB
GND B
R
= 1000 ohm P Wid 51 V39200-Z4102-J or equivalent
DB
= Wire link
-UB
= Exchange voltage -48/-60 V
GND B = Ground B
The link between .7 and .8 must always be inserted. Certain input circuits of external alarm receivers
may require that it be open.
Fig. 3.3.25 Connections on the jumper field for alarm output
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 31
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.3.12.2
Connector Pin Assignment for Alarm Forwarding (Module

TXA:SYPC)
Alarm
number
Connecto
r pin no.
A 046
41
Connector
pin no.
Alarm
number
not
used
not
used
AL 1A
AL 1B
AL 2A
AL 2B
AL 3A
AL 3B
AL 4A
AL 4B
AL 5A
AL 5B
AL 6A
AL 6B
AL 7A
AL 7B
AL 8A
AL 8B
AL 9A
AL 9B
AL 10A
AL 10B
AL 11A
AL 11B
AL 12A
AL 12B
not
used
not
used
60
20
B 046
41
1
not
used
not
used
AL 13A
AL 13B
AL 14A
AL 14B
AL 15A
AL 15B
AL 16A
AL 16B
AL 17A
AL 17B
AL 18A
AL 18B
AL 19A
AL 19B
AL 20A
AL 20B
AL 21A
AL 21B
AL 22A
AL 22B
AL 23A
AL 23B
AL 24A
AL 24B
not
used
not
used
60
20
Fig. 3.3.26 Connector pin assignment for alarm forwarding on module TXA:SYPC
PROC:SYP 32
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.3.12.3
Connector Pin Assignment for Alarm Forwarding (Module

T/RM:SYCR)
Connector
pin no.
41
D 141
Connector
pin no.
Alarm
number
01
AL 1A
AL 1B
AL 2A
AL 2B
AL 3A
AL 3B
AL 4A
AL 4B
AL 5A
AL 5B
AL 6A
AL 6B
AL 7A
AL 7B
AL 8A
AL 8B
60
20
Fig. 3.3.27 Connector pin assignment for alarm forwarding

on module T/RM:SYCR
3.3.13
Notes on Installation Testing of the SYPD

To test the EWSD installation, the SYP equipment and SYPD (in the exchange) must
first be tested and placed in service. A remote SYPD cannot be included in the installation test until the customer has installed the required 2-wire or 4-wire transmission link
to the OMC (see also Fig. 3.3.11).
Module TXA:SYPC (S30810-Q759-..) (T/RM:SYCR in F:SMSC) is used for the
forwarding of alarms to the OMC or another location. The jumpers on this module are
soldered in when the customers requirements have been clarified. Alarms to be
forwarded that are not included in the standard USER-PROM must be programmed in
addition.
How external alarms are received (RM:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR) must also be clarified with
the customer. The external alarms must be programmed in the USER-PROM.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 33
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
If only one SYPD is deployed in the exchange, its cable connector is plugged into backplane mounting location B034 (C135 in F:SMSC(C)) as SYPD 0. If power is supplied via
the exchange voltage, it is fed to the SYPD via the corresponding SYPD fuse in the
SYPC If a second SYPD is installed in the OMC as a remote SYPD, then this SYPD
must have its own power pack, because remote feeding from the exchange is not
possible over a distance of more than 200m. If two SYPDs are installed, it must be
ensured that they are connected to different transmitters/receivers in the modules
T/RM:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR.
Cabling from the transmitter/receiver modules T/RM:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR to the MDF
runs via the backplane cable at mounting location A028 / D141.
Using a 2-wire line, a distance of up to 11 km can be bridged between SYPC and SYPD.
Over greater distances, a 4-wire E&M line must be used.
(see also Fig. 3.3.11)
System MOLOC on
panel backplane
of
F:SYPC(A)
Transmission
line
Comments
SYPD0
B034
2-wire
Remote SYPD or SYPD in the exchange
SYPD1
A040
4-wire
SYPD2
A034
4-wire
SYPD3
B040
4-wire
Tab. 3.3.2 Mounting locations of SYPD connections on F:SYPC(A)
System MOLOC on
panel backplane
of F:SMSC
Transmission
line
Comments
SYPD0
C 135
2-wire
SYPD1
D 141
4-wire
Tab. 3.3.3 Mounting locations of SYPD connections on F:SMSC(C)
Basic Test of Rack

Check the rack equipment and revision statuses (issues) against the exchange
configuration documents (AKUHW lists), if this has not already been done.
Perform a visual inspection of the wire-wrap fields for bent pins, short circuits,
contacts and foreign objects.
PROC:SYP 34
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Create Basic State
Note: The assignment of fuses and DCCs depends on the rack used :
If SYP is installed in R:MB/CCG
If SYP is installed in R:CE
If SYP is installed in R:SE
...... (see Fig. 3.3.1)

...... (see Fig. 3.3.2)
...... (see Fig. 3.3.3)
Make sure that all SYP fuses have been unscrewed

Make sure that all SYP DCCs are switched off
Connect the SYPD
In the installation test phase of an EWSD/MSC network node, the SYP must be
placed in service in a minimum configuration. In other words, the SYPD must be
installed in the exchange for the basic test as SYPD0 using cable type 225.
If SYP is installed in F:SYPC
If SYP is installed in F:SMSC
...... (see Fig. 3.3.7)

...... (see Fig. 3.3.8)
Power is supplied to the SYPD via the same cable as soon as the fuse for -UE 48/60 V is inserted.
Check Switch Settings

If SYP is installed in R:MB/CCG:
Check the position of the switches on module T/RM:SYPC
If SYP is installed in R:CE:
Check the position of the switches on module T/RM:SYCR
i ... MMN:SYP, TAB

i ... MMN:SYP for
CDE, TAB
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 35
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Insert USER-PROM
Caution: ESD safety precautions must be observed, i.e. a grounding bracelet

must be worn, for instance.
The USER-PROM supplied on module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR (standard
PROM with the designation V30113-....) is pre-programmed for one SYPD-0
and one SYPD-1.
If only one SYPD is installed, the double SYP indicator lights up when the SYP
is active and in service, and messages are output stating that the number of
SYPDs does not match the number of SYPDs programmed in the USERPROM.
Customer requirements that call for modifications in the USER-PROM should
not be programmed into the USER-PROM until after installation testing.
......NIMN:SYP
......(see Fig. 3.3.5)
......(see Fig. 3.3.6)
Programming of the USER-PROM is described in:

Position of the USER-PROM on module COM:SYPC:
Position of the USER-PROM on module PU:SYCR:
Insert the standard PROM or customized USER-PROM on module COM:SYPC
/ PU:SYCR.
Attach Labels on SYPD
......(see
Fig. 3.3.1
0)
Undo the four screws on the front of the SYPD.

After removing the front, unfasten the light-colored plastic panel behind the
transparent front face and remove it.
Attach the adhesive labels from the supplied label sheet in the marked areas, if
this has not been done already.
The labels for external alarms are not attached until the customized USERPROM has been produced according to the customer requirements.
......(see Fig. 3.3.9)
Insert Fuses
Insert the SYP fuses in the fuse panel:

PROC:SYP 36
......(see Fig. 3.3.1)

......(see Fig. 3.3.2)
......(see Fig. 3.3.3)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Switch on the DCC

Switch on the corresponding DCC

Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCC lit?
...... (see Fig. 3.3.1)

...... (see Fig. 3.3.2)
...... (see Fig. 3.3.3)
Y h ... 14
N h ... 9
LED not lit

Switch off the DC converter
Check the fuse and replace if necessary
Pull all corresponding modules
Switch the DC converter on again
Is the green LED lit?
10
Y h ... 11
N h ... 10
Fault Clearance
Possible causes of the fault:
DCC faulty
Break in the power supply between the fuse and the converter
Ground connection from frame/DCC to the + bus bar has a break in it
Short-circuit on the wire-wrap field
Clear the fault

If it is the DCC that is faulty:

Make sure that the spare DCC is switched off
Replace the faulty DCC with the spare module
After fault clearance, re-insert all modules
11
h ... 8
Identify Faulty Module
One or more modules faulty (repeat the following steps until all modules have
been tested)
Insert the first (next) module
Switch the DC converter on again
Is the green LED lit?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 13
N h ... 12
PROC:SYP 37
ITMN - OFFLINE
12
Commissioning
System
Replace Faulty Module
The last module inserted is suspect

Replace the faulty module with a spare module
When installing a spare COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR module, check the USERPROM or transfer the USER-PROM from the faulty module.
13
Decision: all Modules Tested

Have all modules now been tested?
14
Decision Block: LED HOLD

Is the HOLD LED on module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR still lit?
15
Y h ... 8
N h ... 11
Y h ... 15
N h ... 17
Reset Module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR

Press the RESET key
Is the HOLD LED on module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR still lit?
16
Y h ... 16
N h ... 17
Replace Module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR
Module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR is probably faulty

Switch off DC converter
Replace the faulty module with a spare module
When installing a spare COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR module, check the USERPROM or transfer the USER-PROM from the faulty module.
After replacing the module, continue
17
Basic Test (SYPD in the Exchange)

Check the switches on module T/RM:SYPD and, if installed, on module
ACC:SYPD
Plug in the connecting cable to the SYPC at the SYPD
PROC:SYP 38
h ... 8
......MMN:SYPTAB LED:SYP
......(see
Fig. 3.3.1
0)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
18
ITMN - OFFLINE
TEST key (SYPD in the Exchange)

Press the TEST key
Go to one of the following blocks in accordance with the system response
All LEDs lit, 7-segment displays lit, horn sounding
All LEDs lit, 7-segment displays lit, horn not sounding
Only the 7-segment displays are lit
No LEDs are lit, no 7-segment displays are lit and the horn is not sounding
19
h ... 22
h ... 19
h ... 20
h ... 21
Horn (SYPD in the Exchange)

Check the setting of switch HI on module T/RM:SYPD
Check that the connecting cable to the horn is plugged in correctly
Replace the horn if it is faulty
Repeat the test
20
h ... 18
Module DYM:SYP Faulty (SYPD in the Exchange)

Pull the connecting cable to the SYPC from the SYPD
Unplug the power cable, if there is one
Replace the faulty DYM:SYP module with a spare module
Insert the power cable, if there is one
Insert the connecting cable to the SYPC in the SYPD
Repeat the test
21
h ... 18
Check System Voltage (SYPD in the Exchange)
If system voltage is present, the SYP displays light up when the TEST key is
pressed. Any other response implies that a fuse or the EWA module is faulty.
Check the system voltage at pins +UE and -UE on module ACC:SYPD, if it is
installed
Check the fuse (FU) assigned to the SYPD in the fuse panel:

...... (see Fig. 3.3.1)

...... (see Fig. 3.3.2)
...... (see Fig. 3.3.3)
Check the system voltage in the connecting cable SYPD-SYPC at pins 13 and
14 (+UE), 16 and 17 (-UE)
If the system voltage up to the SYPD is OK: Replace module EWA in the SYPD
Repeat the test
22
h ... 18
UPDATE Key (SYPD in the Exchange)

Press the UPDATE key
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SYP 39
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
The following system responses are possible:
Data are transferred from the SYPC / SYCR to the SYPD. The transfer takes
about 1 minute. Displayed statuses are random.
The UPDATE indicator is lit during the data transfer.
The indicator does not light

Possible causes could be:
Fault in the transmission equipment
Wiring error: Transmitter and receiver transposed
Y h ... 24
N h ... 23
Did the indicator light up?
23
Nonstandard Maintenance
Perform nonstandard maintenance
24
h ... 18
Repeat the test after completing nonstandard maintenance
End of the Basic Test (SYPD in the Exchange)
End of the basic test for SYPD in the exchange
h ... 25
For the basic test of the remote SYPDs
25
Basic Test (Remote SYPD)
This test cannot be performed until the remote SYPD is connected over a 2-wire
or 4-wire transmission line (E&M) and the USER-PROM has been programmed
for two SYPDs.
If the remote SYPD is operated over a 2-wire line, the remote SYPD is SYPD0
and the SYPD in the exchange is SYPD1.
If the remote SYPD is operated over a 4-wire E&M line, the remote SYPD is
SYPD1 and the SYPD in the exchange is SYPD0.
If SYP is installed in F:SMSC(C)
......(see Tab. 3.3.2)

......(see Tab. 3.3.3)
Check the switches on module T/RM:SYPD and, if it is installed, on module

ACC:SYPD
......MMN:SYPTAB LED:SYP
If SYP is installed in F:SYPC
Plug in the power cable

Insert the connecting cable to the transmission equipment at the SYPD
PROC:SYP 40
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
26
ITMN - OFFLINE
TEST Key (Remote SYPD)

Press the TEST key
Go to one of the following blocks, depending on the system response
All LEDs lit, 7-segment displays lit, horn sounding
All LEDs lit, 7-segment displays lit, horn not sounding
Only the 7-segment displays are lit
No LEDs are lit, no 7-segment displays are lit and the horn is not sounding
27
h ... 30
h ... 27
h ... 28
h ... 29
Horn (Remote SYPD)

Check the setting of switch HI on module T/RM:SYPD
Check that the connecting cable to the horn is plugged in correctly
Replace the horn if it is faulty
Repeat the test
28
h ... 26
Module DYM:SYP Faulty (Remote SYPD)

Pull the connecting cable to the SYPC from the SYPD
Unplug the power cable, if there is one
Replace the faulty DYM:SYP module with a spare module
Insert the power cable, if there is one
Insert the connecting cable to the SYPC in the SYPD
Repeat the test
29
h ... 26
Check System Voltage (Remote SYPD)

Check the operating voltage of the SYPD
If the system voltage up to the SYPD is OK:
Replace module EWA in the SYPD
Repeat the test
30
h ... 26
UPDATE Key (UPDATE) (Remote SYPD)

Press the UPDATE key
The following system responses are possible:
Data are transferred from the SYPC to the SYPD. The transfer takes about 1
minute. Displayed statuses are random.
The UPDATE indicator is lit during the data transfer.
The indicator does not light

Possible causes could be:
Fault in the transmission equipment
Wiring error: Transmitter and receiver transposed
Did the indicator light up?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 32
N h ... 31
PROC:SYP 41
ITMN - OFFLINE
31
Commissioning
System
Nonstandard Maintenance
Perform nonstandard maintenance
h ... 26
Repeat the test after completing nonstandard maintenance
32
End of the Basic Test (Remote SYPD)
End of the basic test for remote SYPD
h ... 33
For the testing of external alarms
33
Programming the USER-PROM for External Alarms
Clarify with the customer which alarms signaled by external alarm units are to
be indicated with what priority at the SYPD.
Both the connection of the alarms to the SYP and the means of forwarding of
the alarms must be programmed into the USER-PROM.
If the STANDARD-USER-PROM for Deutsche Telekom AG is being used, it is
not necessary to program external alarms because Deutsche Telekom uses a
uniform signaling concept.
......NIMN:SYP
Program the connection and forwarding of external alarms into the USERPROM, if this has not already been done.
Label the corresponding SYPD indicators with the adhesive labels from the
supplied label sheet. Labels not included on the sheet must be ordered from the
responsible sales department.
34
Connection of External Alarms
......(see 3.3.11)
Connect the external alarm units to the MDF.

External alarms must be connected on the special terminal strip of the MDF and
jumpered to the external alarm inputs of the SYP on the MDF.
......(see 3.3.11)
For the assignment of connector pins to the MDF terminal points:
35
Enter Alarm Texts
External alarms are reported at the OMT-PC with the number of the external
alarm and its name.
The name of an alarm is entered at the OMT-PC when the alarm is created.
Enter the alarm name, e.g. FIRE ALARM, as text no. 1
b
b
Display existing alarm names with DISP ALTEXT.

Alarm names which are not needed must be canceled with CAN ALTEXT (but
only if they are no longer linked to external alarms).
PROC:SYP 42
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
36
b
ITMN - OFFLINE
Link Alarm Names to External Alarms

Link the alarm names to the external alarms with:
CR EAL:SITE=EXCH,EAL=...(1-24),TEXTNO=...(1 - x);
Further commands: DISP EAL and CAN EAL
37
Decision Block
Are alarms to be forwarded from the SYPD to another facility (e.g. OMC)?
38
Y h ... 38
N h ... END
Forwarding of External Alarms
Module TXA:SYPC must be installed for the forwarding of alarms (only in

F:SYPC).
Before inserting the jumpers on module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR, various points
must be clarified with the customer:
Are alarms/indications to be forwarded to the OMC or other facilities (e.g.

building security staff). If so, jumpers or resistors must be soldered onto
module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR (see MMN:SYP, TAB / MMN:SYP for CDE,
TAB).
How are the alarms to be forwarded?

Individually: One or more alarms/indications are assigned to a relay on
module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR and forwarded by this relay.
In groups: The alarms are grouped and forwarded.
Example:
All critical alarms indicated at the SYPD are assigned as a group to the 1st
relay and forwarded.
All major alarms are assigned to the 2nd relay and forwarded.
All indications are assigned to the 3rd relay and forwarded.
The alarms/indications are assigned to the relays in the USER-PROM.
Deactivate the SYP and switch off the DC converter

Pull module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR and solder in jumpers or resistors on the
module
...... (see 3.3.12)
Insert module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR

Check the corresponding fuse
Activate the SYP
Connect the customers alarm signaling equipment to the MDF
For alarm forwarding, the USER-PROM must be programmed as specified in:
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
...... NIMN, SYP
PROC:SYP 43
ITMN - OFFLINE
39
Commissioning
System
Enable Alarm Forwarding
The alarm forwarding function of module TXA:SYPC is only enabled if ALSTAT1

or ALSTAT2 is set.
Check the system settings in the database with command DISP ALMODE
System response:
STATUS
| HLIM
-----------------------------ALSTAT1
| YES
b
40
If any other status is set, change it with the following command:

ENTR ALMODE:STATUS=ALSTAT1,HLIM=YES;
Test Alarm Forwarding
In the installation test phase, system error messages must be compared with
the alarms signaled by the signaling facilities.
Trigger alarms to check the alarm forwarding function.
Note:
Alarm forwarding is dependent on the SYPD indication and the priority defined
for the alarm.
If a single lamp/LED on the SYPD only allows the indication of a major alarm, it
is not possible to forward a critical alarm.
An alarm is only forwarded as a critical alarm if its priority is defined as critical.
END
PROC:SYP 44
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.4
Off-line Installation of Switching Network

SN
3.4.1
Documents
The following documents are required as references:
3.4.2
Maintenance Manual MMN:SN(B)

AKUHW Lists
Fuse Assignments
There are different fuse assignments for the SN. These assignments depend on:
The rack used
R:SN(B)/LTGG
R:SN(B)/LTGM
R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM
R:CE (Rural Exchanges)
The cable routing for the SN:

Cable routing from above
Cable routing from below
The size of the SN
The frame to be switched on:

TSG-frame
SSG-frame
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SN 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.4.3
Fuse Assignment for SN (31LTG)

(Rural Exchanges)
3.4.3.1
FU 01
FU
Rack R:CE
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
FU
Fuse panel / AD:RAL
10
MOLOC C343 (Supply for SN-0)
MUT01
F:SMSC(C)-0
MUT02
F:SMSC(C)-1
MUT04
F:PIOP(A)
MUT03
D
29
C
D
C
D
Air circulator
C
MUT08
F:PBC(A)
MUT05
F:PBC(A)
MUT06
D
C
D
Air circulator
MUT09
F:PIOPA)
MUT07
F:DEV
MUT10
D
C
D
Air circulator
MUT11
Fig. 3.4.1 Rack R:CE
PROC:SN 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.4.3.2
FU 01
FU
SN Fuses / Frames and Modules in R:CE
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
FU
F:SMSC-0
10
TSMB 3
SGCB
DCCMC
SSM16B
TSMB 2
TSMB 0
TSMB 1
101 113 125 137 149 161 173 185 197 209 221 233 245 257 269 281 293 305 317 329 341
F:SMSC-1
29
TSMB 3
SGCB
DCCMC
SSM16B
TSMB 2
TSMB 0
TSMB 1
101 113 125 137 149 161 173 185 197 209 221 233 245 257 269 281 293 305 317 329 341
Fig. 3.4.2 SN Fuses / Frames and Modules in R:CE
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SN 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.4.4
3.4.4.1
Commissioning
System
Fuse Assignment for SN (63LTG)

Fuse Assignment for R:SN(B)/LTGG
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
Fuse panel
MUT01
F:TSG(B) (SN-0)
MUT02
F:TSG(B) (SN-1)
MUT03
F:LTG
MUT04
F:LTG
MUT05
F:LTG
MUT06
C
D
11
C
D
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
F:LTG
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.4.3 R:SN(B)/LTGG cable routing from above
PROC:SN 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
Fuse panel
MUT01
F:LTG
MUT02
F:LTG
MUT03
F:LTG
MUT04
F:LTG
MUT05
F:TSG(B) (SN-0)
MUT06
F:TSG(B) (SN-1)
MUT07
A
B
A
B
A
B
FU
01
C
D
11
C
D
CD
Fig. 3.4.4 R:SN(B)/LTGG cable routing from below
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SN 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.4.4.2
FU 01
FU
Fuse Assignment for R:SN(B)/LTGM
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
FU
01
MUT01
Fuse panel
C
F:TSG(B) (SN-0)
MUT02
32
F:TSG(B) (SN-1)
MUT03
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
LTG
LTG LTG LTG
F:LTGM(A)
MUT04
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT05
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT06
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.4.5 R:SN(B)/LTGM cable routing from above
PROC:SN 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
FU 01
FU
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
Fuse panel
FU
MUT01
LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG

MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG
MUT03
F:LTGM(A)
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
01
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT04
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT05
F:TSG(B) (SN-0)
MUT06
D
32
F:TSG(B) (SN-1)
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.4.6 R:SN(B)/LTGM cable routing from below
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SN 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.4.4.3
FU 01
FU
Fuse Assignment for R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
FU
01
30
32
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
33 FU
31
F:TSG(B)
MUT02
F:TSG(B)
MUT03
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT04
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT05
F:LTGM(A)
MUT06
F:LTGM(A)
MUT07
D
32
C
D
A
B
A
B
C
D
C
D
CD
Fig. 3.4.7 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from above
PROC:SN 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
FU 01
FU
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
C
F:LTGM(A)
MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
MUT03
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT04
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT05
F:TSG(B)
MUT06
F:TSG(B)
MUT07
D
C
D
A
B
A
B
FU
01
C
D
32
C
D
CD
Fig. 3.4.8 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from below
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SN 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.4.5
3.4.5.1
Commissioning
System
Fuse Assignment for SN (126 LTG - 504 LTG) TSG-frame

Fuse Assignment for R:TSG(B)/LTGG
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-0-tsg)
Fuse panel
MUT01
F:TSG(B) (TSG-0-tsg)
MUT02
MUT03
F:LTGG(A)
MUT04
F:LTGG(A)
MUT05
F:LTGG(A)
MUT06
F:LTGG(A)
MUT07
C
D
11
C
D
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
CD
Fig. 3.4.9 R:TSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from above
PROC:SN 10
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
A
F:LTGG(A)
MUT02
F:LTGG(A)
MUT03
F:LTGG(A)
MUT04
F:LTGG(A)
MUT05
B
A
B
A
B
FU
01
MUT06
MUT07
D
11
C
D
CD
Fig. 3.4.10 R:TSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from below
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SN 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.4.5.2
FU 01
FU
Fuse Assignment for R:TSG(B)/LTGM
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
FU
01
Fuse panel
MUT01
MUT02
C
D
32
MUT03
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
LTG
LTG LTG LTG
F:LTGM(A)
MUT04
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT05
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT06
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.4.11 R:TSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from above
PROC:SN 12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
FU 01
FU
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
Fuse panel
32
FU
MUT01
LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG

MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG
MUT03
F:LTGM(A)
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
01
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT04
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT05
MUT06
D
32
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.4.12 R:TSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from below
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SN 13
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.4.5.3
FU 01
FU
Fuse Assignment for R:TSG(B)/MB/LTGM
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
FU
01
30
32
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
33 FU
31
F:TSG(B)
MUT02
F:TSG(B)
MUT03
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT04
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT05
F:LTGM(A)
MUT06
F:LTGM(A)
MUT07
D
32
C
D
A
B
A
B
C
D
C
D
CD
Fig. 3.4.13 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from above
PROC:SN 14
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
FU 01
FU
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
C
F:LTGM(A)
MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
MUT03
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT04
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT05
F:TSG(B)
MUT06
F:TSG(B)
MUT07
D
C
D
A
B
A
B
FU
01
C
D
32
C
D
CD
Fig. 3.4.14 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from below
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SN 15
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.4.6
Commissioning
System
Fuse Assignment for SN (126 LTG - 504 LTG) SSG-frame

In SN (126LTG) switching networks only the left half of the SSG module frame is
equipped. This is fed by only one DCC.
D
C
C
M
S
SSG
EMPTY
E
M
P
T
Y
Fig. 3.4.15 Frame SSG(B) for SN (126 LTG)

In SN (252 LTG..504 LTG) switching networks both halves of the SSG module frame are
equipped and each one is fed by a separate DCC.
D
C
C
M
S
SSG
SSG
D
C
C
M
S
Fig. 3.4.16 Frame SSG(B) for SN (252 LTG..504 LTG)
PROC:SN 16
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.4.6.1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fuse Assignment for R:SSG(B)/LTGG

FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-0-0

or SSG-0-2)
02

or SSG-0-3)
11

or SSG-1-2)
12

or SSG-1-3)
Fuse panel
F:SSG(B)
C
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
or
SSG-0-2
or
SSG-0-3
D
F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
or SSG-1-3
D or SSG-1-2
MUT01
MUT02
MUT03
F:LTGG(A)
MUT04
F:LTGG(A)
MUT05
F:LTGG(A)
MUT06
F:LTGG(A)
MUT07
A
B
A
B
A
B
CD
Fig. 3.4.17 R:SSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from above
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SN 17
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
Fuse panel
MUT01
F:LTGG(A)
MUT02
F:LTGG(A)
MUT03
F:LTGG(A)
MUT04
F:LTGG(A)
MUT05
B
A
B
A
B
FU
01

or SSG-0-2)
02

or SSG-0-3)
11

or SSG-1-2)
12

or SSG-1-3)
F:SSG(B)
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
or SSG-0-3
D or SSG-0-2
MUT06
F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
or SSG-1-3
D or SSG-1-2
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.4.18 R:SSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from below
PROC:SN 18
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.4.6.2
FU 01
FU
FU
01
02
32
33
Fuse Assignment for R:SSG(B)/LTGM
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14

or SSG-0-2)
or SSG-0-3)
or SSG-1-2)
or SSG-1-3)
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
Fuse panel
32
FU
MUT01
F:SSG(B)
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
or SSG-0-3
D or SSG-0-2
MUT02
F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
or SSG-1-3
D or SSG-1-2
MUT03
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT04
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT05
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT06
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.4.19 R:SSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from above
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SN 19
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
FU 01
FU
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
Fuse panel
32
FU
MUT01
LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG

MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG
F:LTGM(A)
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
FU
01
02

or SSG-0-2)
or SSG-0-3)
32

or SSG-1-2)
33

or SSG-1-3)
MUT03
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT04
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
F:SSG(B)
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
or SSG-0-3
D or SSG-0-2
MUT05
MUT06
F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
or SSG-1-3
D or SSG-1-2
C
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.4.20 R:SSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from below
PROC:SN 20
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.4.6.3
FU 01
FU
FU
01
02
32
33
Fuse Assignment for R:SSG(B)/MB/LTGM
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14

/ SSG-0-2)
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel

/ SSG-0-3)
F:SSG(B)
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
D / SSG-0-2
/ SSG-0-3
MUT02

/ SSG-1-2)
F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
D / SSG-1-2
/ SSG-1-3
MUT03

/ SSG-1-3)
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT04
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT05
F:LTGM(A)
MUT06
F:LTGM(A)
MUT07
B
A
B
C
D
C
D
CD
Fig. 3.4.21 R:SN/MB/LTGM with F:SSG(B) cable routing from above
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:SN 21
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
FU 01
FU
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
30
32
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
C
33 FU
31
F:LTGM(A)
MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
MUT03
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT04
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT05
D
C
D
A
B
A
B
FU
01
02
32
33

/ SSG-0-2)
/ SSG-0-3)
/ SSG-1-2)
/ SSG-1-3)
F:SSG(B)
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
D / SSG-0-2
/ SSG-0-3
MUT06
F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
D / SSG-1-2
/ SSG-1-3
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.4.22 R:SN/MB/LTGM with F:SSG(B) cable routing from below
PROC:SN 22
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Basic Test (Rack)

Check Ground Connections

Check whether the ground connections between adjacent racks are correctly
plugged in
Decision Block: Capacity stage of the SN

Branch to one of the following blocks according to the capacity stage of the SN
It is an SN (31 LTG) switching network
It is an SN (63 LTG) switching network
It is an SN (126 LTG.. 504 LTG) switching network
h ... 4
h ... 12
h ... 20
Create Basic State (SN (31 LTG))
The location of the SN modules in the SMSC(C) frames and the corresponding
fuses are shown in:
...... (see Fig. 3.4.2)
Switch off SN DCCs in the SMSC(C) frames

Screw out all SN main fuses
Power Supply Check (SN (31 LTG))

Screw in the first/next SN-fuse
Switch on the corresponding DCC in the SN module frame to check the fuse
assignment to the MUT
Is the LED of the DCC lit?
Decision Block
Have all SN-fuses already been screwed in?
Y h ... 6
N h ... 7
Y h ... END
N h ... 5
Identify Faulty Modules

Unplug all related modules individually under power (except DCC), but leave
them in position.
After each module is unplugged the voltage should be checked again. (The
green LED of the DCC is lit)
Could the fault be cleared by removing a certain module?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 8
N h ... 9
PROC:SN 23
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System

Replace faulty module, plug in all modules
Repeat testing after replacing faulty module
h ... 5
Faulty DCC
Switch off the DCC of the faulty module frame
Screw out the fuse which is allocated to this DCC
Replace DCC by spare module, screw in fuse, switch on DCC
10
Y h ... 11
N h ... 10

Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance
11
h ... 5
Plug in Modules
Plug in all modules
Repeat testing after replacing the DCC
12
h ... 5
Create Basic State (SN (63 LTG))

Switch off DCCs in the SN module frames
Screw out all SN main fuses
PROC:SN 24
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
13
ITMN - OFFLINE
Power Supply Check (SN (63 LTG))
Caution: The assignment of the fuses to the relevant module frame is implemented for two different cable routings and for two different racks:
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGG for cable routing from above
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGG for cable routing from below
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGM for cable routing from above
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGM for cable routing from below
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM for cable routing from above
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM for cable routing from below
...... (see Fig. 3.4.3)

...... (see Fig. 3.4.4)
...... (see Fig. 3.4.5)
...... (see Fig. 3.4.6)
...... (see Fig. 3.4.7)
...... (see Fig. 3.4.8)
Screw in the first/next SN-fuse

Switch on the corresponding DCC in the SN module frame to check the fuse
14
Decision Block
Have all SN-fuses already been screwed in?
15
Y h ... 14
N h ... 15
Y h ... END
N h ... 15
Identify Faulty Modules

Unplug all modules individually under power (except DCCMS), but leave them in
position.
16
Y h ... 16
N h ... 17

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 13
PROC:SN 25
ITMN - OFFLINE
17
Commissioning
System
Faulty DCC
18
Y h ... 19
N h ... 18

19
h ... 13
Plug in Modules
Plug in all modules
20
h ... 13
Create Basic State (TSG frames)

Switch off DCCs in the TSG module frames
Screw out all TSG main fuses
PROC:SN 26
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
21
ITMN - OFFLINE
Power Supply Check (TSG-Frames for SN(126..504LTG))
...... (see Fig. 3.4.9)

...... 0)(see Fig. 3.4.1
...... 1)(see Fig. 3.4.1
...... 2)(see Fig. 3.4.1
...... 3)(see Fig. 3.4.1
...... 4)(see Fig. 3.4.1
Screw in the first/next TSG-fuse

Switch on the corresponding DCC in the TSG module frame to check the fuse
22
Decision Block
Have all TSG-fuses already been screwed in?
23
Y h ... 22
N h ... 23
Y h ... 29
N h ... 21
Identify Faulty Modules (TSG-Frames)

position.
24
Y h ... 24
N h ... 25
Replace Faulty Module (TSG-Frames)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 21
PROC:SN 27
ITMN - OFFLINE
25
Commissioning
System
Faulty DCC (TSG-Frames)

26
Y h ... 27
N h ... 26

27
h ... 21
Plug in Modules (TSG-Frames)

Plug in all modules
28
h ... 21
Create Basic State (SSG-Frames)

Switch off DCCs in the SSG module frames
Screw out all SSG main fuses
PROC:SN 28
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
29
ITMN - OFFLINE
Power Supply Check (SSG-Frames)
In SN (126LTG) switching networks only the left half of the SSG module
frame is equipped. This is fed by only one DCC
In SN (252 LTG..504 LTG) switching networks both halves of the SSG module
frame are equipped and each one is fed by a separate DCC
...... 7)(see Fig. 3.4.1
...... 8)(see Fig. 3.4.1
...... 9)(see Fig. 3.4.1
...... 0)(see Fig. 3.4.2
...... 1)(see Fig. 3.4.2
...... 2)(see Fig. 3.4.2
Screw in the first/next SSG-fuse

Switch on the corresponding DCC in the SSG module frame to check the fuse
30
Decision Block
Have all SSG-fuses already been screwed in?
31
Y h ... 30
N h ... 31
Y h ... END
N h ... 29
Identify Faulty Modules (SSG-Frames)

position.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 32
N h ... 33
PROC:SN 29
ITMN - OFFLINE
32
Commissioning
System
Replace Faulty Module (SSG-Frames)

33
h ... 29
Faulty DCC (SSG-Frames)

Screw out the fuse which is assigned to this DCC
34
Y h ... 35
N h ... 34

35
h ... 29
Plug in Modules (SSG-Frames)

Plug in all modules
h ... 29
END
PROC:SN 30
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.5
Off-line Installation of Common Channel Signaling

Network Control
CCNC:CCS7
3.5.1
Documents
The following documents are required as references
3.5.2
Maintenance Manual MMN:CCS7

AKUHW Lists
LED Displays (Processor Modules)

To show the operating state and the statuses in the start-up procedure, the LEDs in the
faceplate of the processor modules are activated as follows:
Status in the start-up procedure
LEDs
H1
H2
H3
H4
Start-up/M:P(M)U:SIMP test
End of start-up
Test mode / Watchdog inactive
Tab. 3.5.1 LEDs on M:PU:SIMP (M:PMU:SIMP)
LED
H1
Start-up/M:MH:SIMP test
End of start-up
Tab. 3.5.2 LEDs on M:MH:SIMP
LEDs
H1
H2
H3
Start-up/M:SIPA test
End of start-up
Tab. 3.5.3 LEDs on M:SIPA
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CCNC_CCS7 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
LEDs
H1
H2
H3
H4
Start-up/M:P(M)U:CPI test
End of start-up
Tab. 3.5.4 LEDs on M:PU:CPI (M:PMU:CPI)
3.5.3
LED Displays (SILT Modules)
LEDs
H1
H2
H3
H4
Start-up and MU test
Test of peripheral units
Initialization of HW/RL
End of start-up
Tab. 3.5.5 LEDs on M:SILTC
LEDs
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
Start-up and RAM test
Stack, watchdog test
EPROM test
Notebook, RAM test
TIMER, DMA test
PORT HDLC
End of start-up
Tab. 3.5.6 LEDs on M:SILTD
3.5.4
Fuse Assignment
The fuse assignment for F:SILTD(A) dependents on the rack where the frame is built in
PROC:CCNC_CCS7 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.5.4.1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fuse Assignment in R:CCNP/SILTD

The fuse assignment in R:CCNP/SILTD is realized for 2 different versions of the rack:
shielded or unshielded version

partially shielded version
MUT
SILT Group
left
SILT Group
right
02
FU 1
FU 11
04
FU 3
FU 13
06
FU 7
FU 17
Tab. 3.5.7 Fuse assignment R:CCNP/SILTD

(shielded or unshielded version)
MUT
SILT Group
left
SILT Group
right
02
FU 1
FU 11
04
FU 2
FU 12
06
FU 3
FU 13
Tab. 3.5.8 Fuse assignment R:CCNP/SILTD

(partially shielded version)
3.5.4.2
Fuse Assignment in R:SILTD

MUT
SILT Group
left
SILT Group
right
02
FU 1
FU 11
03
FU 3
FU 13
04
FU 5
FU 15
05
FU 7
FU 17
06
FU 9
FU 19
07
FU 10
FU 20
Tab. 3.5.9 Fuse assignment R:SILTD
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CCNC_CCS7 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.5.5
Commissioning
System
Rack SILTD
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
MOLOC A001
Fuse panel
11
MOLOC A120
03
MUT01
F:SILTD
MUT02
MOLOC A001
A
13
MOLOC A120
F:SILTD
MUT03
B
05
MOLOC A001
MOLOC A120
F:SILTD
15
MUT04
07
MOLOC A001
17
MOLOC A120
F:SILTD
09
MOLOC A001
MOLOC A120
MUT05
19
10
F:SILTD
MUT06
MOLOC A001
A
20
F:SILTD
MOLOC A120
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.5.1 Rack R:SILTD
PROC:CCNC_CCS7 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.5.6
Rack CCNP/SILTD
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
MOLOC A001
Fuse panel
11
MOLOC A120
03
MUT01
F:SILTD
MUT02
MOLOC A001
13
MOLOC A120
F:SILTD
MUT04
07
MOLOC A001
F:SILTD
MUT06
17
MOLOC A120
05
MOLOC A001
MOLOC A120
F:CCNP(B)
06
MUT08
15
MOLOC A001
A
16
F:CCNP(B)
MOLOC A120
MUT10
CD
Fig. 3.5.2 Rack R:CCNP/SILTD
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CCNC_CCS7 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Basic Test (Rack)

Information Block
All work should be performed for the two CCNPs in MUT 08 and 10 in parallel
Create Basic State

Switch off all CCNC-DCCs
Screw out all CCNC-fuses
Screw in Fuses (CCNP)

Screw in the following fuses:
FU 6 for CCNP0 MUT 08
FU16 for CCNP1 MUT 10
Switch on DCCs (CCNP)
......(see Fig. 3.5.2)
Switch on the corresponding DCCs
Y h ... 7
N h ... 6
Is the green LED in the module faceplate on?
LED off (CCNP)
DCC or modules suspect
If DCC is defective, carry out fault clearance according to
i....MMN:CCS7,
If a module is defective, carry out fault clearance according to
PROC,
REP:DCC
i....MMN:CCS7,
PROC,
REP:MOD
Check Basic Setting (CCNP)
When the DCCs have been switched on, the CCNP automatically performs selftests for a few seconds. Modules given in parenthesis refer to a CCNP with a 4
MB memory
PROC:CCNC_CCS7 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Basic setting for the LED displays on the faceplates of the processor modules is,
that only the following LEDs are lit:
PU:SIMP (PMU:SIMP) : H2
SIPA
PU:CPI
: H2
(PMU:CPI)
: H2
Are the LED displays in the basic setting?
Y h ... 16
N h ... 8
Fault Analysis
To show the operating state and the statuses in the start-up procedure, the
LEDs in the faceplates of the processor modules are activated as shown in:
...... (see 3.5.2)
Carry out fault analysis according to the tables mentioned above

Is LED H1 on one or more of the modules: M:P(M)U:SIMP / M:SIPA /
M:P(M)U:CPI lit?
Y h ... 9
N h ... 10
Slide Switches (CCNP)

Move slide switch S2, which is reached through faceplate opening 400 (except
for M:SIPA, where S2 is marked on the faceplate), until LED H1 goes out.
10
Troubleshooting for CCNP Modules

Switch off all DCCs
Replace module identified by means of fault analysis
Switch on all DCCs again
Is the LED display in basic setting when self-test is completed?
11
Decision Block: Same Fault Pattern

Same fault pattern as before module replacement?
12
Y h ... 16
N h ... 11
Y h ... 12
N h ... 13
Reinsert Original Module

Switch off all DCCs and reinsert original module
After reinserting original module
13
h ... 14
Possible Faults
Spare module could be defective or there is another fault in the CCNP

Switch off all DCCs
After switching off all DCCs
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 14
PROC:CCNC_CCS7 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
14
Commissioning
System
Decision Block: Other Modules Suspect
Y h ... 10
N h ... 15
Are any other modules suspect?
15

h ... 5
16
Switch on DCCs (SILTD(A))
......(see 3.5.4)
Screw fuses for F:SILTD(A) (in R:CCNP/SILTD or in R:SILTD depending on

configuration) into fuse panel.
Switch on DCCs
Y h ... 18
N h ... 17
Is green LED on DCC faceplate lit?
17
LED off
18
i....MMN:CCS7,
PROC,
REP:DCC
i....MMN:CCS7,
PROC,
REP:MOD
Check Basic Setting (SILTC)
When DCCs have been switched on, SILTC and SILTD automatically perform
self-tests for a few seconds.
Y h ... 19
N h ... 20
Is only LED H2 lit on all M:SILTC?
19
Check Basic Setting (SILTD)
Y h ... 35
N h ... 28
Is only LED H2 lit on all M:SILTD?
20
Interpretation of LED Combinations (SILTC)
......(see Tab. 3.5.5)
For Interpretation of the LED combinations
Y h ... 21
N h ... 22
Is LED H1 lit?
21
Slide Switches (SILTC)

Move slide switch S2 (can be reached through faceplate opening 400) until LED
H1 goes out.
PROC:CCNC_CCS7 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
22
Check LED H3
Is LED H3 lit?
23
ITMN - OFFLINE
Y h ... 23
N h ... 18
Replace Defective Module (SILTC)

Switch off DCC for suspect M:SILTC by way of toggle switch on DCC module
faceplate
Replace suspect M:SILTC
24
RESET (SILTC)
Switch on DCC and press RESET
Has a new EPROM been installed, and still LED H3 alone is lit on M:SILTC after
self-test?
25
Y h ... 25
N h ... 26

26
Check LED H2
Is only LED H2 lit on M:SILTC after self test?
27
h ... 16
Y h ... 18
N h ... 27
Test EPROM
Test EPROM for faults or install new EPROM
Repeat testing
28
Interpretation of LED Combinations (SILTD)
For Interpretation of the LED combinations
29
h ... 24
...... (see Tab. 3.5.6)
Replace Defective Module (SILTD)

Switch off DCC for suspect M:SILTD by way of toggle switch on DCC module
faceplate
Replace suspect M:SILTD
30
RESET (SILTD)
Switch on DCC and press RESET
31
Check LED H2 (SILTD)

Is only LED H2 lit on M:SILTD after self test?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 19
N h ... 32
PROC:CCNC_CCS7 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
32
Decision Block: Components Changed

Have components from the defective M:SILTD been installed on the replacement module (e.g. EPROM)?
33
Commissioning
System
Y h ... 34
N h ... 33

34
h ... 16
Test EPROM (SILTD)

Switch off DCC by way of toggle switch on DCC module faceplate
Test EPROM for faults or install new EPROM
Repeat testing
35
h ... 30
Screw in Fuses (MUXM)

Screw in the following fuses:
36
FU 5 for MUXM-0
FU15 for MUXM-1
Switch on DCCs (MUXM)

Switch on DCCs for MUXM
Is green LED in the module faceplates lit?
37
Y h ... 38
N h ... 37
LED off (MUXM)
38
i....MMN:CCS7,
PROC,
REP:DCC
i....MMN:CCS7,
PROC,
REP:MOD
RESET (MUXM)
Press reset switch S1 and start self test
Does LED2 flash when test is finished?
39
Y h ... END
N h ... 39
Replace MUXM
Switch off relevant DCC and replace MUXM
Repeat testing after replacing MUXM
h ... 36
END
PROC:CCNC_CCS7 10
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.6
Off-line Installation of Line Trunk Groups

LTG
3.6.1
Documents
The following documents are required as references:
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Maintenance Manual MMN:LTGx

AKUHW Lists
PROC:LTG 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.6.2
3.6.2.1
Commissioning
System
Fuse Assignments of the different Types of LTG

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGA
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
A
MUT02
B
F:LTGA(A) 0
C
FU
01
MOLOC C091
MUT03
B
02
F:LTGA(B) 0
MOLOC C001, C013, C025,C 037

C
03
MOLOC C079, C085, C103, C115
MUT04
F:LTGA(A) 1
C
D
11
MOLOC C091
MUT05
12
F:LTGA(B) 1
MOLOC C001, C013, C025,C 037

C
13
MOLOC C079, C085, C103, C115
CD
Fig. 3.6.1 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGA
PROC:LTG 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.6.2.2
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGB/LTGB:OSS
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
Power supply for all LTU
MUT02
01
MOLOC C001, C013
F:LTGB(A)
C
02
MOLOC C103, C115

13
D
A
MUT03
B
11
MOLOC C001, C013

12
MOLOC C103, C115

06
MUT01
Fuse panel
03
04
MOLOC C001, C013
F:LTGB(A)
C
D
MUT04
F:LTGB(A)
C
05
MOLOC C103, C115
16

14
MUT05
B
MOLOC C001, C013
F:LTGB(A)
C
15
MOLOC C103, C115
CD
Fig. 3.6.2 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGB
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:LTG 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.6.2.3
Commissioning
System
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
MOLOC A001, A015
Fuse panel
MUT01
F:LTGC(A)
MUT02
02
MOLOC A001, A015
F:LTGC(A)
MUT03
03
MOLOC A001, A015
F:LTGC(A)
MUT04
11
MOLOC A001, A015
F:LTGC(A)
MUT05
12
MOLOC A001, A015
F:LTGC(A)
MUT06
13
MOLOC A001, A015
F:LTGC(A)
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.6.3 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC
PROC:LTG 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.6.2.4
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC/CR
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
MUT01
Fuse panel
MOLOC A001, A115
F:LTGC(A)
MOLOC A001
MUT02
B
A
F:CR(A)
03
MOLOC A115
MOLOC A001, A115
F:CR(A)
MUT03
*
F:LTGC(A)
MUT04
11
MOLOC A001, A115
F:LTGC(A)
MOLOC A001
MUT05
B
A
F:CR(A)
13
MOLOC A115
MOLOC A001, A115
F:CR(A)
MUT06
*
F:LTGC(A)
MUT07
CD
*):Each half-frame F:CR(A) is assigned to the LTGC above / below and electrically connected with it
Fig. 3.6.4 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC/CR
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:LTG 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.6.2.5
Commissioning
System
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGD
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
MOLOC A001
Fuse panel
MUT01
F:CRES(A) 0
02
MOLOC A115
MOLOC A001, A115
MUT02
03
05
F:LTGD(A) 0
MUT03
MOLOC A001
A
06
MOLOC A115
F:CRES(A) 1
MUT04
11
MOLOC A001
A
12
F:CRES(A) 2
MOLOC A115
MUT05
13
MOLOC A001, A115
F:LTGD(A) 1
15
MOLOC A001
MOLOC A115
MUT06
16
F:CRES(A) 3
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.6.5 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGD
PROC:LTG 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.6.2.6
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGF

FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
MOLOC A117
Fuse panel
MUT01
F:LTGF(A)
MUT02
02
MOLOC A117
F:LTGF(A)
MUT03
03
MOLOC A117
F:LTGF(A)
MUT04
04
MOLOC A117
F:LTGF(A)
MUT05
05
MOLOC A117
F:LTGF(A)
MUT06
06
MOLOC A117
F:LTGF(A)
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.6.6 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGF
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:LTG 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.6.2.7
Commissioning
System
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG

FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
MOLOC A001 (left LTG)

Fuse panel
02
MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

11
MUT01
F:LTGG(A)
MUT02

A
12
F:LTGG(A)
MUT03
B
03
F:LTGG(A)
04
MUT04
13

14
F:LTGG(A)
05
MUT05
06
15
F:LTGG(A)
MUT06

A
16
F:LTGG(A)
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.6.7 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG
PROC:LTG 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.6.2.8
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG:OSS

FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
FU
MOLOC
01
MUT01
Fuse panel
A001
03
MUT02
MOLOC
02
A123
F:LTGG(A)
A008, A013, A018, A023, A028
A066, A071, A076, A081, A086
05
06
A001
07
MUT03
A123
F:LTGG(A)
A008, A013, A018, A023, A028
A066, A071, A076, A081, A086
09
MUT04
A123
F:LTGG(A)
A008, A013, A018, A023, A028
A066, A071, A076, A081, A086
13
MUT05
A123
F:LTGG(A)
A008, A013, A018, A023, A028
A066, A071, A076, A081, A086
17
16
18
A001
19
12
14
A001
15
08
10
A001
11
04
MUT06
A123
F:LTGG(A)
A008, A013, A018, A023, A028
A066, A071, A076, A081, A086
20
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.6.8 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG:OSS
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:LTG 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.6.2.9
Commissioning
System
Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG (Cable routing from above)

FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
Fuse panel
02
MUT01
F:SSG(B) or F:TSG(B)
11
12
MUT02
MUT03
B
03
F:LTGG(A)
04
MUT04
13

14
F:LTGG(A)
05
MUT05
06
15
F:LTGG(A)
MUT06

A
16
F:LTGG(A)
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.6.9 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG

(Cable routing from above)
PROC:LTG 10
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.6.2.10
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG (Cable routing from below)

FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
05

Fuse panel
06

15
MUT01
F:LTGG(A)
MUT02

A
16
F:LTGG(A)
MUT03
B
03
F:LTGG(A)
04
MUT04
13

14
F:LTGG(A)
01
MUT05
B
02
A
11
12
MUT06
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.6.10 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG

(Cable routing from below)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:LTG 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.6.2.11
Commissioning
System
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGH

FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01

Fuse panel
02

11
MUT01
F:LTGG(A) 0
MUT02

A
12
F:LTGG(A) 1
MUT03
B
03
F:LTGG(A) 2
04
MUT04
13

14
F:LTGG(A) 3
MUT05
B
A
15
MUT06

A
16
F:LTGH(A) 4
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.6.11 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGH
PROC:LTG 12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.6.2.12
FU 01
FU
FU
01
02
03
04
05
19
20
21
22
23
06
07
08
09
10
24
25
26
27
28
11
12
13
14
15
29
30
31
32
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGM
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1
MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
C LTG LTG
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
Fuse panel
MUT01
LTG LTG LTG

MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1

MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
C LTG
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1
C LTG
MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2

MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT03
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT04
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1

MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
C LTG
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1
C LTG
MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2

MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1

MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
C LTG
D
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT05
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT06
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT07
CD
33
Fig. 3.6.12 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGM
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:LTG 13
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.6.2.13
FU 01
FU
Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
30
Fuse panel
FU
A
01
32
FU
MUT01
MUT02
02
33 FU
31
32
33
08
09
10
11
12
22
23
24
25
26
03
04
05
06
07
27
28
29
30
31
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
MUT03
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1

MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
C LTG
D
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT04
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1

MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
C LTG
D
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT05
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1

MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1
MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
C LTG
D
C LTG
D
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT06
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.6.13 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM

PROC:LTG 14
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
FU 01
FU
FU
03
04
05
06
07
27
28
29
30
31
08
09
10
11
12
22
23
24
25
26
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1
MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
C LTG LTG
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
Fuse panel
MUT01
LTG LTG LTG

MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1

MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
C LTG
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1
C LTG
MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2

MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT03
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT04
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1

MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
C LTG
D
C
01
LTG LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)
MUT05
MUT06
02
32
33
MUT07
CD
Fig. 3.6.14 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:LTG 15
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.6.2.14
FU 01
FU
Fuse Assignment for R:SNB/MB/LTGM
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
C
F:TSG(B) or F:SSG(B)
MUT02
MUT03
D
C
D
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT04
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT05
B
A
B
FU
03
04
05
06
07
27
28
29
30
31
MOLOC C101/LTGM 0
MOLOC C151/LTGM 1
MOLOC C203/LTGM 2
MOLOC C255/LTGM 3
4
MUT06
F:LTGM(A)
MOLOC C305/LTGM 4
MOLOC C101/LTGM 0
MOLOC C151/LTGM 1
2
F:LTGM(A)
4
MUT07
MOLOC C203/LTGM 2
MOLOC C255/LTGM 3
CD
MOLOC C305/LTGM 4
Fig. 3.6.15 Fuse Assignment for R:SN/MB/LTGM

PROC:LTG 16
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
FU 01
FU
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
FU
03
04
05
06
07
MOLOC C101/LTGM 0
MOLOC C151/LTGM 1
MOLOC C203/LTGM 2
MOLOC C255/LTGM 3
Fuse panel
0
1
2
MUT01
3
4
MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
MOLOC C305/LTGM 4
27
MOLOC C101/LTGM 0
28
MOLOC C151/LTGM 1
29
MOLOC C203/LTGM 2
30
MOLOC C255/LTGM 3
31
MOLOC C305/LTGM 4
C
D
MUT03
F:LTGM(A)
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT04
F:MB/CCG(B)
MUT05
B
A
B
MUT06
MUT07
D
C
D
CD
Fig. 3.6.16 Fuse Assignment for R:SN/MB/LTGM

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:LTG 17
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Check of System Voltage per Rack Row
Ensure that the main fuses are unscrewed before starting the check.
Measure system voltage for each rack row at the last frame
Note: the operational voltage is dependent upon the charging status of the
batteries.
Tolerance range: -60 V (-54 V...-71 V)
Tolerance range: -48 V (-45.6 V...-57 V)
Y h ... 3
N h ... 2

h ... 1
Basic Test (Rack)

Check rack layout and issues against exchange-specific document (AKUHW
Visual Check
Check of all cable ends at the distributing frame
Are the cables already on-hook at the distributing frame and/or the ports?
Y h ... 6
N h ... 5
Visual Check
Make sure that there are no short circuits between the single conductors.
If this is not possible (e.g. lack of materials) or when in doubt, disconnect the
cables which lead to the central/main distribution frame at the wire-wrapping
field of the F:LTG
Set DIPFIX Switch
For setting the DIPFIX switch and solder strap
......MMN:LTGx
TAB
Set the DIPFIX switch and the solder strap for all M:DIUs and M:RGEs.
Comply with country-specific settings.
PROC:LTG 18
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Preparation
Put the switches on all LTG-current converters down
Information about Fuse Assignments
For screwing in fuses and switching on the relevant DCCs refer to the fuse
assignments shown in the following figures:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGA:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGB/LTGB:OSS:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC/CR:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGD:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGF:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG/OSS:
Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG (cable routing from above):
Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG (cable routing from below):
...... (see Fig. 3.6.1)

...... (see Fig. 3.6.2)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.3)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.4)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.5)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.6)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.7)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.8)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.9)
...... 0)(see Fig. 3.6.1
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGH:
...... 1)(see Fig. 3.6.1
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGM:
...... 2)(see Fig. 3.6.1
Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM (cable routing from above):
...... 3)(see Fig. 3.6.1
Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM (cable routing from below):
...... 4)(see Fig. 3.6.1
Fuse Assignment of R:SN/MB/LTGM (cable routing from above):
...... 5)(see Fig. 3.6.1
Fuse Assignment of R:SN/MB/LTGM (cable routing from below):
...... 6)(see Fig. 3.6.1
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:LTG 19
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Switch on Power Supply
Screw in only one fuse at a time and switch on the relevant current converter
(In LTGM the module in the corresponding MOLOC).
Screw in the first/next fuse for the LTG which is to be switched on.
Caution: use only 10 A fuses

Switch on the according current converter(s)
(In LTGM the module in the corresponding MOLOC:
M:DIU120A or M:DIU:LDIM)
System reaction: green LED of current converter(s) lights up
10
Check LED
Is the green LED of the current converter(s) lit?
(In LTGM the green LED of the corresponding module: M:DIU120A or
M:DIU:LDIM)
11
Y h ... 14
N h ... 11
Find Faulty Module
Possible causes of fault: Module short circuit, faulty current converter or main
fuse
Pull all corresponding modules individually under power (except DCC or
M:DIU120A/M:DIU:LDIM), but leave them in position.
After each module is pulled the voltage should be checked again.
12
Y h ... 13
N h ... 12

13
h ... 9

replace faulty module
plug in all modules
14
h ... 10
Decision: Next Current Converter

are all current converters (or M:DIU120A/M:DIU:LDIM) for this LTG already
switched on?
PROC:LTG 20
Y h ... 15
N h ... 9
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
15
ITMN - OFFLINE
Decision: Next LTG

Are all LTGs already switched on?
Y h ... END
N h ... 8
END
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:LTG 21
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
PROC:LTG 22
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.7
Test Procedure for DAS 300

DAS 300 TEST
The DAS 300 is an OEM device which is not tested by Siemens. To make claims on the
vendors warranty, if necessary, the device must be checked with the integrated test
functions during installation testing.
Operation of the DAS 300:
3.7.1
The menu options referred to in the procedure appear in the LCD display above the
function keys F1 to F4.
Menu options are selected by pressing the relevant function key.
Digital Announcement System DAS 300
Key switch
LCD display, 2 lines of 40 characters
Function keys
Microphone
jack
F1
F2
F3
F4
Headphone
jack
Tape recorder
input
Loudspeaker
Numerical keypad
DAS 300
Cursor keys
Fig. 3.7.1 Digital announcement system DAS 300
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DAS300 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.7.2
Digital Announcement System DAS 300 (Rear View)
120 PCM connections
Power
V1
V2
ABT
LD1
RST
ERR
RST
LD2
+
-
Power supply
SVA
STV 48DC
+5/+12/-12
CPU PCM
CPU module
PCM module
Fig. 3.7.2 Digital announcement system DAS 300 (rear view)
PROC:DAS300 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Decision Block
Y h ... 2
N h ... 7
Is the DAS 300 already in service?
Identify the DIU Number

Refer to the exchange configuration documents to obtain the numbers of the
LTG and DIU to which the DAS is connected.
3
b
Interrogate State of DIU

STAT DIU:LTG=tsg-ltg,DIU=diu;
The command is repeated with the addition:
EXEC'D
A list of the operating states of the interrogated units is output.
Decision Block
What is the operating state of the DIU?
ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
other. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
b
h ... 5
h ... 7
h ... 6
Configure the DIU to CBL

CONF DIU :LTG=tsg-ltg,DIU=diu,OST=CBL;
EXEC'D
Continue with the next block after 5 minutes at most. But if the CBL acknowledgement arrives within the 5 minutes, continue with the next block immediately.
6
b
Configure the DIU to MBL

CONF DIU :LTG=tsg-ltg,DIU=diu,OST=MBL;
EXEC'D
h ... 8
Switch on the DAS
When it is switched on, the DAS 300 should first go to the start menu. This can
be recognized by the texts OPT, MON and STA above the function keys.
Switch on the DAS 300 using the key switch on the front.
Wait for the start menu to appear (OPT above F1, MON above F2 and STA
above F3 in the LCD).
Select the Test Menu

Press the key below menu option STA to select the status interrogation
menu.
Press the key below menu option TEST to select the test menu.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DAS300 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
10
Commissioning
System
Enter Password
Enter the test password (default ex-factory code 1357902468).
Confirm with the # key.
Select System Test
Press the key below menu option SYS to select the system test menu.
11
Evaluation of Test Results
If the test was completed without error, the tested unit appears in the display
with the addition O.K..
12
Perform CPU Test

Press the key below menu option CPU to start the CPU test.
Y h ... 13
N h ... 26
Is the tested unit OK?
13
Perform CRC Test

Press the key below menu option CRC to check the fixed texts.
Y h ... 14
N h ... 26
14
Perform RAM Test

Press the key below menu option RAM to start the RAM test.
Y h ... 15
N h ... 26
15
16
Select PCM Test

Press the * key to return to the test start menu.
Press the key below menu option PCM to select the PCM test menu.
Perform SYN Test
Press the key below menu option SYN to test the synchronization of the PCM
interface.
17
Y h ... 17
N h ... 26
Perform TSx Test

Press the key below menu option TSx to test PCM time slots.
PROC:DAS300 4
Y h ... 18
N h ... 26
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
18
ITMN - OFFLINE
Perform SIG Test

Press the key below menu option SIG to test the signaling in PCM time slot 16.
Y h ... 19
N h ... 26
19
20
Select Interface Test

Press the * key to return to the test start menu.
Press the key below menu option IF to select the interface test menu.
Perform RS1 Test
Press the key below menu option RS1 to test processor interface 1.
21
Decision Block
The processor interfaces can only be tested in the DAS 300 FLASH version.
If the unit under test is a DAS 300 with EPROM, it does not have any processor
interfaces. The displayed result states that the interface test is not available.
Is the unit under test a DAS 300 with EPROM? (test not possible?)
22
Decision Block
Y h ... 23
N h ... 26
23
Y h ... 25
N h ... 22
Perform RS2 Test

Press the key below menu option RS2 to test processor interface 2.
Y h ... 24
N h ... 26
24
Identify DIU Number

Refer to the exchange configuration documents to obtain the numbers of the
LTG and DIU to which the DAS is connected.
25
b
Configure DIU to ACT

CONF DIU :LTG=tsg-ltg,DIU=diu,OST=ACT;
The command is repeated with the addition
EXEC'D
End of DAS 300 test
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DAS300 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
26
Commissioning
System
Replace DAS 300

The DAS 300 is faulty. Replace the DAS 300 and send back the faulty device in
its original packing materials.
End of DAS 300 test
END
PROC:DAS300 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.8
Off-line Installation of Data Service Unit

DSU
3.8.1
Documents
The following Documents are required as references
3.8.2
Maintenance Manual MMN:DSU

AKUHW Lists
General
The DSU is based on the concept of the DLU. It provides interworking functions (IWF)
for data exchange with different external telecommunication networks.
The IWF is implemented in the interworking equipment (IWE). The IWE consists of one
IWE module and one IWES module which replace two SLM modules of the DLU.
The DSU is called DLU in the following procedure because the term DLU continues to
be used in fault reports and diagnostic results.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DSU 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.8.3
3.8.3.1
Commissioning
System
Rack Layout
Rack Layout R:DSU (A-B-B-Modem) / (Fuse Assignment R:DSU)
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
01
MOLOC A001, A058, A119
05
MOLOC A010-052, A089-113
11
MOLOC C001, C058,C119
15
MOLOC C010-052, C089-113
02
MOLOC A00, A119
06
MOLOC A010-052, A071-113
12
MOLOC C001, C119
16
MOLOC C010-052, C071-113
03
MOLOC A001, A119
07
MOLOC A010-052, A071-113
13
MOLOC C001, C119
17
MOLOC C010-052, C071-113
04
to PSU
14
to PSU
MUT01
Fuse panel
Shelf 0
MUT02
F:DLU(A)
Shelf 1
Shelf 2
MUT03
F:DLU(B)
Shelf 3
Shelf 4
MUT05
F:DLU(B)
Shelf 5
Modem
MUT06
Modem
CD
Fig. 3.8.1 R:DSU, Configuration A-B-B-Modem
PROC:DSU 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.8.4
Equipment List
F:DLU(A), F:DLU(B) and F:DLU(C)
Basic frame F:DLU(A) Shelf 0, 1
Mounting
location
Ext. frame F:DLU(B) Shelf 2...7
Module type
Standard
A001
M:DCCx
A010
M:IWEx
A016
M:IWESx
A022
M:IWEx
A028
M:IWESx
A034
M:IWEx
A040
M:IWESx
A046
M:IWEx
Mounting
location
Variant
1)
1)
1)
1)
Module type
Standard
A001
M:DCCx
A010
M:IWEx
A016
M:IWESx 1)
A022
M:IWEx
A028
M:IWESx 1)
A034
M:IWEx
A040
M:IWESx 1)
A046
M:IWEx
A052
M:IWESx 1)
A052
M:IWESx
A058
empty
A058
M:BDE
A065
M:BDB
A065
M:BDE
A071
M:BDCG
A071
M:IWEx
A077
M:DLUC
A077
M:IWESx 1)
A083
M:DIUD
A083
M:IWEx
A089
empty
A089
M:IWESx 1)
A095
M:IWEx
A095
M:IWEx
A101
M:IWESx 1)
A107
M:IWEx
A113
M:IWESx 1)
A101
M:IWESx
A107
M:IWEx
M:LDID
1)
1)
A113
M:IWESx
A119
M:DCCx
A119
M:DCCx
C001
M:DCCx
C001
M:DCCx
C010
M:IWEx
C010
M:IWEx
C016
M:IWESx 1)
C022
M:IWEx
C028
M:IWESx 1)
C034
M:IWEx
C040
M:IWESx 1)
C046
M:IWEx
C052
M:IWESx 1)
C016
M:IWESx
C022
M:IWEx
C028
M:IWESx
C034
M:IWEx
C040
M:IWESx
C046
M:IWEx
1)
1)
1)
1)
M:ALEX
2)
C052
M:IWESx
C058
empty
C058
M:BDE
C065
M:BDB
C065
M:BDE
C071
M:BDCG
C071
M:IWEx
Variant
Tab. 3.8.1 Equipment list
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DSU 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Basic frame F:DLU(A) Shelf 0, 1

Mounting
location
Ext. frame F:DLU(B) Shelf 2...7
Module type
Standard
C077
M:DLUC
C083
M:DIUD
C089
empty
C095
M:IWEx
Mounting
location
Variant
Module type
Standard
M:LDID
1)
C077
M:IWESx 1)
C083
M:IWEx
C089
M:IWESx 1)
C095
M:IWEx
C101
M:IWESx 1)
C101
M:IWESx
C107
empty
C107
M:IWEx
C113
empty
C113
M:IWESx 1)
C119
M:DCCx
C119
M:DCCx
Variant
Tab. 3.8.1 Equipment list

The equipment complement of F:DLU(C) is the same as for F:DLU(B), but it only
occupies mounting location row A.
3.8.5
Mounting Location List

F:DLU(A), F:DLU(B) and F:DLU(C)
Module
type
Address
Basic frame
Shelf 0, 1
Ext. frame 0
Shelf 2, 3
Ext. frame 1
Shelf 4, 5
Mounting
location
Ext. frame 2
Shelf 6, 7
M:ALEX
0 - 15
A113
M:BDB
0-
A065
1-
C065
0-8
A071
1-8
C071
M:BDCG
M:BDE
M:DCCx
M:DIUD
M:LDID
2-
4-
6-
A058
2-
4-
6-
A065
3-
5-
7-
C058
3-
5-
7-
C065
0-0
2-0
4-0
6-0
A001
0-1
2-1
4-1
6-1
A119
1-0
3-0
5-0
7-0
C001
1-1
3-1
5-1
7-1
C119
0 - 10
A083
1 - 10
C083
0 - 10
A083
1 - 10
C083
Tab. 3.8.2 Mounting location list
PROC:DSU 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Module
type
Address
Basic frame
Shelf 0, 1
M:DLUC
Ext. frame 0
Shelf 2, 3
Ext. frame 1
Shelf 4, 5
Mounting
location
Ext. frame 2
Shelf 6, 7
0-9
A077
1-9
C077
M:IWEx
0-0
2-0
4-0
6-0
A010
M:IWEx
1-0
3-0
5-0
7-0
C010
M:IWESx
0-1
2-1
4-1
6-1
A016
M:IWESx
1-1
3-1
5-1
7-1
C016
M:IWEx
0-2
2-2
4-2
6-2
A022
M:IWEx
1-2
3-2
5-2
7-2
C022
M:IWESx
0-3
2-3
4-3
6-3
A028
M:IWESx
1-3
3-3
5-3
7-3
C028
M:IWEx
0-4
2-4
4-4
6-4
A034
M:IWEx
1-4
3-4
5-4
7-4
C034
M:IWESx
0-5
2-5
4-5
6-5
A040
M:IWESx
1-5
3-5
5-5
7-5
C040
M:IWEx
0-6
2-6
4-6
6-6
A046
M:IWEx
1-6
3-6
5-6
7-6
C046
M:IWESx
0-7
2-7
4-7
6-7
A052
M:IWESx
1-7
3-7
5-7
7-7
C052
M:IWEx
2-8
4-8
6-8
A071
M:IWEx
3-8
5-8
7-8
C071
M:IWESx
2-9
4-9
6-9
A077
M:IWESx
3-9
5-9
7-9
C077
M:IWEx
2 - 10
4 - 10
6 - 10
A083
M:IWEx
3 - 10
5 - 10
7 - 10
C083
M:IWESx
2 - 11
4 - 11
6 - 11
A089
M:IWESx
3 - 11
5 - 11
7 - 11
C089
M:IWEx
0 - 12
2 - 12
4 - 12
6 - 12
A095
M:IWEx
1 - 12
3 - 12
5 - 12
7 - 12
C095
M:IWESx
0 - 13
2 - 13
4 - 13
6 - 13
A101
M:IWESx
1 - 13
3 - 13
5 - 13
7 - 13
C101
M:IWEx
0 - 14
2 - 14
4 - 14
6 - 14
A107
3 - 14
5 - 14
7 - 14
C107
2 - 15
4 - 15
6 - 15
A113
3 - 15
5 - 15
7 - 15
C113
M:IWEx
M:IWESx
M:IWESx
0 - 15
Tab. 3.8.2 Mounting location list

The mounting location list for the expansion frame F:DLU(C) is the same as for
F:DLU(B), but only mounting location row A.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DSU 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.8.6
Commissioning
System
Connection of DLU to two LTG
DLU
LTGx
D
I
U
D
L
U
0
D
I
U
D
L
U
1
PDC0
LTU
U21
PDC1
LTU
U21
PDC0
LTU
U20
PDC1
LTU
U20
S
I
L
C
DLU
LTGy
D
I
U
D
L
U
0
D
I
U
D
L
U
1
PDC0
LTU
U21
PDC1
LTU
U21
PDC0
LTU
U20
PDC1
LTU
U20
S
I
L
C
Fig. 3.8.2 Connection of DLU to two LTG
PROC:DSU 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
The diagram above shows the connection of the DLU to two LTGs. One DLU system is
connected to the LTGx and the other to the LTGy. The dotted lines represent the links
without CCS.
3.8.7
Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU
DIU:DLU
Pin No.
LE
LE
PDC0
DIU30A
LTU/U21
49
F2ou
F2in.....F1ou
F1in.....F2ou
Pin No.
49
F2in
50
50
51
51
F2in
F2ou.....F1in
F1ou.....F2in
F2ou
52
Pin No.
52
PDC1
LTU/U20
49
F2ou
F2in.....F1ou
F1in.....F2ou
Pin No.
49
F2in
50
50
51
51
F2in
F2ou.....F1in
52
F1ou.....F2in
F2ou
52
Fig. 3.8.3 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DSU 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.8.8
Connection path from DLU to LTE
DLU
To/from LTGx
D
I
U
D
L
U
0
PDC0
D
I
U
D
L
U
1
PDC0
PCM 30 with CCS
F1ou
F2in
LTE
F2ou
F1in
PCM 30 without CCS
F1ou
F2in
LTE
F2ou
F1in
To/from LTGx
PDC1
To/from LTGy
PCM 30 with CCS
F1ou
F2in
LTE
F2ou
F1in
PCM 30 without CCS
F1ou
F2in
LTE
F2ou
F1in
To/from LTGy
PDC1
Fig. 3.8.4 Connection path from DLU to LTE
PROC:DSU 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.8.9
Connection path from LTG to LTE
LTGx
To/from DLU
F1in
F2ou
LTE
F1ou
F2in
PCM 30 with CCS
LTU
U21
F1in
F2ou
LTE
F1ou
F2in
PCM 30 without CCS
LTU
U20
S
I
L
C
To/from DLU
LTGy
To/from DLU
F1in
F2ou
LTE
F2in
F1ou
PCM 30 with CCS
LTU
U21
F1in
F2ou
LTE
F2in
F1ou
PCM 30 without CCS
LTU
U20
S
I
L
C
To/from DLU
Fig. 3.8.5 Connection path from LTG to LTE
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DSU 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Check of system voltage per rack row
Y h ... 3
N h ... 2
Special fault clearance

h ... 1
Basic test (rack)

Check switch settings

Check modules for correct positioning of straps and switch settings
Information block
......MMN:DSU,
TAB, MOD
CAUTION:
Areas on the wrap fields with pins for ringing or system voltage (e.g. SLM modules or DCCs) may be
equipped with protection caps. The protection caps protect the operating personnel from touching the pins
with ringing or system voltage and must not be removed.
Switch on exchange voltage (R:DSU)
The assignment of fuses to the individual modules is given in
......(see 3.8.3)
Switch off all DCCxx and RGMG of the first/ next R:DSU
Unscrew all fuses in this R:DSU
PROC:DSU 10
h ... 7
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Information about DCCxx
If a DCCDB (A001, A119) is installed instead of the DCCCR, there is no need

for the DCCCV or DCCDD (A010). The DCCDB provides all the voltages that
were otherwise provided by the DCCCR and DCCCV/DCCDD. If a DCCDC
(A001) is used, there is also no need for the voltage of 93 V.
Screw in fuses
...... (see 3.8.3)
Screw in the fuse assigned to the DCCs in the first / next shelf
Switch on left-hand DCCxx

Switch on the left-hand DCCxx (MOLOC A001/C001)
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCxx lit?
10
Y h ... 12
N h ... 10
Replace defective DCCxx

Switch off defective DCCxx
Unscrew relevant fuse
Switch off spare module
Replace defective DCCxx by spare module
Screw in relevant fuse
Switch on DCCxx
11
Y h ... 12
N h ... 11
Note:
If the green LEDs in all DCCs do not light when the DCCs have been switched
on, the thermal contact is probably defective
Repeat testing after successful fault clearance
12
h ... 9
Switch on right-hand DCCxx

Switch on the right-hand DCCxx (MOLOC A119/C119)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 15
N h ... 13
PROC:DSU 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
13
Commissioning
System
Replace defective DCCxx

Switch off defective DCCxx
Replace defective DCCxx by spare module
Switch on DCCxx
Y h ... 15
N h ... 14
14
Note:
15
Decision: DCCDV/DCCDD
Is there a DCCDV or DCCDD in the shelf?
16
h ... 12
Y h ... 16
N h ... 19
Switch on DCCDV/DCCDD
Switch on DCCDV/DCCDD (MOLOC A010/ C010)
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCDV/DCCDD lit?
17
Y h ... 19
N h ... 17
Replace defective DCCDV/DCCDD

Switch off defective DCCDV/DCCDD
Replace defective DCCDV/DCCDD by spare module
Switch on DCCDV/DCCDD
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCDV/DCCDD lit?
PROC:DSU 12
Y h ... 19
N h ... 18
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
18
ITMN - OFFLINE
Note:
19
Next shelf?
Are all DCCs in all shelves switched on?
20
21
h ... 16
Y h ... 20
N h ... 8
Information about connection path test
The connection of the DLU to LTG is shown in:

(LTGs used are LTGB, LTGG, LTGM)
...... (see Fig. 3.8.2)
When the DLU and LTG are connected, care must be taken to ensure 1:1
wiring. This means that F2out of DIU:DLU0 goes via pins 49 and 50, just as F2in
of LTU:U21.
...... (see Fig. 3.8.3)
Information about connection path from DLU to LTE
Because the DLU and the start of the PCM link may be located apart, special
precautions must be taken to ensure that the cabling between DIU:DLU and
LTE (line terminating equipment / loading equipment) is correct. If it is, the corresponding PCM link simply needs to be connected to the LTE. If then no connection can be established between DLU and LTG, the PCM link is interrupted.
The connection of DLU to LTE is shown in
22
...... (see Fig. 3.8.4)
Establish connection DIU:DLU to LTE
The connection first has to be established for DIU:DLU0 and than for DIU:DLU1
23
Establish test loop for PDC0

Link up the outgoing cable with CCS (PDC0) from the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) to
the LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
Red LED F2 on LTE goes out
Link F1out to F1in at the output of the LTE
Did the red LEDs MA0 and SA0 on the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) go out?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 25
N h ... 24
PROC:DSU 13
ITMN - OFFLINE
24
Commissioning
System
Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1)module.
25
Connect PDC0 to the link

Open the loop and connect the PDC0 to the link
26
Establish test loop for PDC1

Link up the outgoing cable without CCS (PDC1) from the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1)
to the LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
Red LED F2 on the LTE goes out
Y h ... 29
N h ... 27
27
Fault clearance
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) module.
28

29
Decision: next DLU system
......(see Fig. 3.8.2)
Note that DLU system 1 is connected to another LTG as shown in
Y h ... 30
N h ... 23
Has DLU system 1 already been checked?
30
Information about connection LTG to LTE
The connection first has to be established for LTGx (to DLU system 0) and than
for LTGy (to DLU system 1).
The connection of LTG to LTE is shown in
PROC:DSU 14
......(see Fig. 3.8.5)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
31
ITMN - OFFLINE
Establish test loop for cable with CCS

Link the outgoing cable with CCS from the LTU:U21 of LTGx (LTGy) to the LTE
which is to be connected to the LTE of DLU system 0 (DLU system 1), if not
already done.
Link F1out at the output of the LTE to F1in
Have the red LEDs MA0 and SA0 on the DIU:LTG gone out?
32
Y h ... 33
N h ... 32
Fault clearance
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU module in question.
33
Connect LTU:U21 to the link

Open the loop and connect the LTU:U21 to the link
34
Establish test loop for cable without CCS

Link the outgoing cable without CCS from the LTU:U20 of LTGx (LTGy) to the
LTE which is to be connected to the LTE of DLU system 0 (DLU system 1), if not
already done.
Red LED F2 goes out
35
Y h ... 36
N h ... 35
Fault clearance
36

37
Decision: test DLU-system 1

Has the connection of LTGy to DLU system 1 already been checked?
38
Y h ... 38
N h ... 31
Decision: F:Modem
Are there F:Modem installed in the current R:DSU?
Y h ... PROC:
MODEM
N h ... 39
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DSU 15
ITMN - OFFLINE
39
Commissioning
System
Decision: next R:DSU
Y h ... 40
N h ... 6
Have all R:DSU of the NE already been switched on?
40
Decision: R:Modem
Repeat the following procedure until all R:Modem of the NE are put into
service
h ...PROC:
MODEM
If no R:Modem is installed in the NE or all R:Modem have already been put

into service, continue:
h ... END
END
PROC:DSU 16
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.9
Off-line Installation of modems for 3.1 kHz

audio bearer services
MODEM
3.9.1
3.9.1.1
Rack Layouts
Rack Layout R:DSU (A-B-B-Modem) / (Fuse Assignment for
Modems)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:MODEM 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
01
Shelf 0
05
MUT02
F:DLU(A)
11
Shelf 1
15
02
Shelf 2
06
MUT03
F:DLU(B)
12
Shelf 3
16
03
Shelf 4
MUT05
07
F:DLU(B)
13
Shelf 5
17
04
14
to PSU
to PSU
Modem
MUT06
Modem
CD
Fig. 3.9.1 R:DSU, Configuration A-B-B-Modem
PROC:MODEM 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.9.1.2
ITMN - OFFLINE
Rack Layout R:Modem / (Fuse Assignment for Modems)

FU 01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19 FU
FU 02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20 FU
FU
Fuse panel
01
to PSU
02
to PSU
03
to PSU
04
to PSU
Modem
05
to PSU
Modem
06
to PSU
Modem
Modem
Modem
Modem
not equipped
not equipped
Fig. 3.9.2 R:Modem
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:MODEM 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.9.2
Commissioning
System
Modem Frame Layouts

Two different types of modems for 3.1 kHz audio bearer services can be used in the
DSU:
GPT modem
NEUHAUS modem
According to the type of modem it is possible to place 12 (NEUHAUS) or 14 (GPT)

modems into one frame F:Modem.
All modems in a frame are supplied by one power supply unit (PSU). It is not possible
to mix both types of modems in one frame, because they are fed by different types of
PSUs.
The modem frames F:Modem can be located in the Mounting Units 06 and 07 of the
R:DSU and/or in a separate rack R:Modem.
3.9.2.1
Frame F:Modem (GPT)
P
S
U
10 11 12 13 14
Modem frame (Type GPT)

Fig. 3.9.3 Frame F:Modem (GPT)
PROC:MODEM 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.9.2.2
ITMN - OFFLINE
Frame F:Modem (NEUHAUS)
P
S
U
10
11
12
Modem frame (Type NEUHAUS)

Fig. 3.9.4 Frame F:Modem (NEUHAUS)
Prepare modem frames

Unscrew the fuses of all modem frames F:Modem of the current rack, if not
already done
The fuse assignment for the modem frames is shown in:
...... 3.9.1
Switch on PSU
Unplug all modems in the first/next F:Modem but leave in position
Plug in the PSU of this F:Modem
Screw in the fuse for this F:Modem
Check if PSU is working:
On PSU for GPT: Green LED Mains in and red LED PWR Monitor must
light up
On PSU for NEUHAUS: All 3 Green LEDs must light up
Is the PSU working?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 5
N h ... 3
PROC:MODEM 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Replace PSU
Unscrew the corresponding fuse
Replace the PSU by spare module of the same PSU type
Screw in the corresponding fuse
Check if PSU is working:
On PSU for GPT: Green LED Mains in and red LED PWR Monitor must
light up
On PSU for NEUHAUS: All 3 Green LEDs must light up
Y h ... 5
N h ... 4
Is the PSU working?

h ... 2
Plug in modems
Plug in the first/next modem of the frame where the PSU has been switched on
Is the modem working? (Red LED for Power must light up)
Y h ... 8
N h ... 6
Replace modem
Replace the modem by spare module of the same modem type
Is the modem working? (Red LED for Power must light up)
Y h ... 8
N h ... 7

Decision: next modem

Have all modems of the frame already been plugged in
Y h ... 9
N h ... 5
Decision: next F:Modem

Have all modem frames of the current rack already been put into service?
10
h ... 5
Y h ... 10
N h ... 2
Return block
Return to calling procedure
END
PROC:MODEM 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.10

(Frames D / E / F)
DLUB
3.10.1
Documents
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Maintenance Manual MMN:DLUB

AKUHW Lists
PROC:DLUB 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.10.2
3.10.2.1
FU 01
FU
03
02
Fuse Assignments
Fuse Assignment R:DLUB (D-E-D-E)
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
FU
32
FU
FU
01 A001-057
03
04
C001,C015-033,057*
08 A008,A039-057
11 C001,C015-033
21
C001,C015-033,057*
Shelf 1
M
G
B
R
G
B
D
C
C
D D
C C
C C
D D
C C
C C
D D
C C
C C
B
D
2
Shelf 2
D
C
C
R
G
B
D D
C C
C C
F:DLU(E)
D D
C C
C C
B
D
3
Shelf 3
F:DLU(D)
Shelf 0
Shelf 1
D D
C C
C C
M
G
B
R D
G C
B C
D D
C C
C C
C008,C039-057
24 A001,A015-033
25 A008,A039-057
28 C001,C015-033
29
D D
C C
C C
Fuse panel
F:DLU(D)
Shelf 0
C008,C039-057
18 A001-057
20
R
G
B
C008,C039-057
07 A001,A015-033
12
D
C
C
MUT01
D D
C C
C C
D D
C C
C C
Shelf 2
Shelf 3
C008,C039-057
B
D
2
B
D
3
F:DLU(E)
D D
C C
C C
D D
C C
C C
MUT02
A068-121
C116,C068-086
02
05
C123,C092-110
06
MUT03
A116,A068-086
09
A123,A092-110
10
C116,C068-086
13
C123,C092-110
14
MUT05
A068-121
C116,C068-086
19
22
C123,C092-110
23
MUT06
A116,A068-086
26
A123,A092-110
27
C116,C068-086
30
C123,C092-110
31
CD
* 057 Only if MGB is inserted.
Note: If only one DCC is used per halfshelf, the DCC Pos shf-1 and shf-3 are omitted as well as the according
fuses.
Fig. 3.10.1 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-E)
PROC:DLUB 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.10.2.2
FU 01
FU
03
02
Fuse Assignment R:DLUB (D-E-D-D)

05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
FU
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
01 A001-057
03
04
C001,C015-033,057*
D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C
F:DLU(D)
Shelf 0
Shelf 1
M
G
B
D D
C C
C C
B
D
2
Shelf 2
08 A008,A039-057
11 C001,C015-033
21
C001,C015-033,057*
29
D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C
F:DLU(E)
D D
C C
C C
B
D
3
Shelf 3
C001,C015-033,057*
MUT02
A068-121
02
C116,C068-086
F:DLU(D)
M
G
B
R
G
B
D
C
C
D D
C C
C C
06
MUT03
A116,A068-086
09
A123,A092-110
10
C116,C068-086
D D
C C
C C
F:DLU(D)
Shelf 2
Shelf 3
M
G
B
C008,C039-057
R
G
B
D
C
C
D D
C C
C C
13
14
MUT05
A068-121
19
C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110
D R
C G
C B
05
C123,C092-110
C123,C092-110
Shelf 0
Shelf 1
D D
C C
C C
C008,C039-057
24 A001-057
28
D D
C C
C C
C008,C039-057
18 A001-057
20
D D
C C
C C
C008,C039-057
07 A001,A015-033
12
R D
G C
B C
22
23
MUT06
A068-121
26
C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110
30
31
CD
Fig. 3.10.2 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-D)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUB 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.10.2.3
FU 01
FU
03
02
Fuse Assignment Rack R:DLUB (D-E-D-F)

05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
FU
32
FU
FU
MUT01
Fuse panel
01 A001-057
03
04
C001,C015-033
D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C
F:DLU(D)
Shelf 0
Shelf 1
M
G
B
D D
C C
C C
B
D
2
Shelf 2
08 A008,A039-057
11 C001,C015-033
21
D D
C C
C C
C001,C015-033,057*
D
C
C
R
G
B
D D
C C
C C
F:DLU(E)
F:DLU(D)
R D
G C
B C
D D
C C
C C
M
G
B
C008,C039-057
24 A001,A015-033
D D
C C
C C
B B
D D
2 3
Shelf 2
25 A008,A039-057
MUT02
A068-121
C116,C068-086
F:
DLU(F)
D D
C C
C C
02
05
C123,C092-110
06
MUT03
A116,A068-086
09
A123,A092-110
10
C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110
Shelf 0
Shelf 1
D D
C C
C C
D D
C C
C C
B
D
3
Shelf 3
C008,C039-057
18 A001-057
20
D D
C C
C C
C008,C039-057*
07 A001,A015-033
12
R D
G C
B C
13
14
MUT05
A068-121
C116,C068-086
19
22
C123,C092-110
23
A116,A074-92
26
A123,A098-110
27
CD
Fig. 3.10.3 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-F)
PROC:DLUB 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.10.3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Equipment of the different frames

Detailed information about the equipment of the different frames are listed in the equipment list and the mounting location list of the MMN:DLUB, APP.
3.10.4
Shelter DLU 400/700

The shelter can contain the following equipment:
Remote Shelter DLU 400 (Fig. 3.10.4)

Basic frame D for DLUB (F:DLU(D)) with a max. of 384 subscribers or basic frame
G for DLUD (F:DLU(G)) with a max. of 448 subscribers

Basic frame F:DLU(D)) or F:DLU(G)) and also extension frame F for DLUB
(F:DLU(F)) with a max. of 240 subscribers
Transmission equipment for the shelter (optional)

The following transmission equipment is provided in the shelter for connection to the
network node or for the connection of additional shelters (ring or star configuration):
Transmission technology in the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
SDH: synchronous multiplexers (SMA1/4) or, alternatively,
synchronous dual terminal multiplexers (STM1D)
Transmission technology in the plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
PDH technology in the shelter:
Optical/HDSL terminal multiplexer for 2 Mbit/s (OMX2/HMX)
Optical terminal multiplexer for 34 Mbit/s (OMX16)
(PDH technology can also be integrated in the DLU hardware)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUB 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.10.4.1
Commissioning
System
MDF/ DDF distribution frame
Air conditioning (fan and heater)
Power supply unit, including standby battery
Cable TV
Modem for OFDC (optional)
Overview Shelter 400/700
SIEMENS
DDF
DDF
24 PCM30 24 PCM30
Basic frame D
(F:DLU(D)) or G
(F:DLU(G))
MDF
200 DA internal
SMA 1/4 or SMT1D

(SDH)
MDF
200 DA internal
1600 mm
Connector panel
Fan
Fan
MDF
200 DA external
DC distribution
OFDC modem
Connector panel
MDF
200 DA external
MDF
200 DA external
AC distribution
OMX2/HMX or OMX16
(PDH)
AC/DC converter (48 V/30 A)
(Connection for
emergency power supply)
Mains access (MAP)
or
lightning overvoltage
protection (LOP)
Heater 1600 W
Cable TV
Battery
500 mm
1800 mm
Side view (left)
Front view
Fig. 3.10.4 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 400
PROC:DLUB 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
SIEMENS
DDF
DDF
24 PCM30 24 PCM30
DDF
24 PCM30
104 DA
internal
Connecting panel
Basic frame D
(F:DLU(D)) or G
(F:DLU(G))
MDF
200 DA internal
SMA 1/4 or SMT1D

(SDH)
MDF
200 DA internal
1800 mm
MDF
200 DA internal
Fan
Extension frame F
(F:DLU(F))
MDF
200 DA external
Connecting panel
MDF
200 DA external
Fan
OFDC modem
MDF
200 DA external
DC distribution
MDF
200 DA external
AC distribution
MDF
200 DA external
(Connection for emergency power supply)
OMX2/HMX or OMX16
(PDH)
AC/DC
converter
(48 V/30 A)
Heater 1600 W
Cable TV
Mains access (MAP)

or
protection (LOP)
Battery
500 mm
1800 mm
Side view (left)
Front view
3.10.4.2
Fuse Assignment PPD (Primary power distribution)

Sicherungen
gesicherte Einheit
F1
25 A
AC Power supply
(Fehlerstromschutzschalter)
F2
16 A
Rectifier 1
F3
16 A
Rectifier 2 (optional)
F4
10 A
Heater
F5
10 A
Cabel TV (optional)
Tab. 3.10.1 Assignment of primary fuses
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUB 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Sicherungen
F6
10 A
gesicherte Einheit
Socket (for OFDC-Modem)
3.10.4.3
Fuse Assignment SPD (Secondary power distribution)

Fuses
Unit
F1
10 A
DLU Shelf 0 (System side 1)
F2
10 A
F3
10 A
F4
10 A
F5
10 A
Transmission equipment (SDH)

or
Radio equipment SRA L1/SRA L2
F6
10 A
not used
F7
10 A
Transmission equipment (PDH)

or
F8
10 A
Shelter DLU 400: not used

bzw.
Shelter DLU 700: Shelf 2 (System side 1)
F9
10 A
Fan 2
F10
10 A
Fan 1
F11
10 A
Monitoring and heater control
F12
10 A

bzw.
F13
50 A
Battery
Tab. 3.10.2 Assignment of secondary fuses

Caution:
The fuse cover must not be removed by the maintenance. personnel. If maintenance
work on the fuses is necessary, this can only be carried out by trained specialists. Before
the fuse cover is removed the 220 V AC line voltage must be switched off.
PROC:DLUB 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.10.5
3.10.5.1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Remote DLU
Connection of a remote DLU to two LTG
Plug position
DLU
D
I
U
D
L
U
0
D
I
U
D
L
U
1
DLU
D
I
U
D
L
U
0
D
I
U
D
L
U
1
LTGx
PDC0
A2 051
LTU
U21
B2 051
LTU
U21
A2 074
LTU
U20
B2 074
LTU
U20
A2 051
LTU
U21
B2 051
LTU
U21
A2 074
LTU
U20
PDC1
PDC0
PDC1
S
I
L
C
LTGy
PDC0
PDC1
PDC0
PDC1
B2 074
S
I
L
C
LTU
U20
Fig. 3.10.6 Connection of DLUB to two LTG

The diagram above shows the connection of the DLUB to two LTGs. One DLUB system
is connected to the LTGx and the other to the LTGy. The dotted lines represent the links
without CCS.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUB 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.10.5.2
Commissioning
System
Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU

DIU120A
DIU:DLU
Pin No.(*)
Pin No. (Plug pin)
Sym.
LE
Koax.
LE
50
29
51
51
F2in...F1out
F1in...F2out
E134
C134
E136
E136
E138
C136
E132
E132
E134
C134
E136
E136
E138
C136
F2out
31
LTU/U20
PDC1
49
F2in...F1out
F2out
50
29
51
51
F2in
F1in...F2out
F1out...F2in
F2out...F1in
F2in
52
E132
F2in
F1out...F2in
F2out...F1in
F2in
49
E132
49
F2out
52
Koax.
LTU/U21
PDC0
49
Sym.
F2out
31
Fig. 3.10.7 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU (DIU120A)

(*): The pin numbers refer to the first of four PDC connectors of the DIU120A. An overview of all pin numbers is shown in the following table:
PDC(0)
Sym
Koax
PDC(1)
Sym
Koax
PDC(2)
Sym
Koax
PDC(3)
Sym
Koax
E132
E132
E142
E142
E152
E152
E212
E212
E134
C134
E144
C144
E154
C154
E214
C214
E136
E136
E146
E146
E156
E156
E216
E216
E138
C136
E148
C146
E158
C156
E218
C216
Tab. 3.10.3 Pin numbers for PCM30 connectors of DIU120A
PROC:DLUB 10
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
DIU120A MOLOCS:
305
255
101
151
203
SU1
F:LTGM(A) Rearview
SU2
row C
(mounting area 1)
SU3
SU4
SU5
SU1
SU2
row D
(mounting area 2)
SU3
SU4
PDC0
PDC1
PDC2
0 (no pins available)

1
2
Pin E 2 1 2
Pins for PDC3 (sym.)
Pin E 2 1 4
Pin E 2 1 6
Pin E 2 1 8
9
Fig. 3.10.8 Numbering method on F:LTGM
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUB 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
DIU30D
DIU:DLU
Pin No. (Plug pin)
Pin No. (Plug pin)

Sym.
LE
Koax.
LE
49
F2in...F1out
F2out
50
29
51
51
F2out...F1in
F2in
52
F1in...F2out
F1out...F2in
F2in...F1out
F2out
51
51
F2out...F1in
F2in
52
50
29
51
51
52
31
49
49
50
29
51
51
52
31
LTU/U20
49
29
49
F2out
31
50
49
F2in
PDC1
49
Koax.
LTU/U21
PDC0
49
Sym.
F2in
F1in...F2out
F1out...F2in
F2out
31
Fig. 3.10.9 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU (DIU30D)
3.10.5.3
Connection path from DLUB to LTE
DLU
to/from LTGx
D
I
U
D
L
U
0
PDC0
F2in
PCM 30 with CCS
F1out
LTE
F2out
F1in
F2in
F1out
to/from LTGx
PDC1
PCM 30 without CCS
LTE
F2out
F1in
F2in
F1out
to/from LTGy
D
I
U
D
L
U
1
PDC0
PCM 30 with CCS
LTE
F2out
F1in
F2in
F1out
to/from LTGy
PDC1
PCM 30 without CCS

F2out
LTE
F1in
Fig. 3.10.10 Connection path from DLUB to LTE
PROC:DLUB 12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.10.5.4
ITMN - OFFLINE
to/from DLU
F1in
LTE
F1out
F2out
PCM 30 with CCS
LTU
U21
PCM 30 without CCS
LTU
U20
F2in
to/from DLU
F1in
F2out
LTE
F2in
F1out
S
I
L
C
LTGx
LTGy
to/from DLU
F1in
LTE
F2out
F1out
F2in
F1in
F2out
PCM 30 with CCS
LTU
U21
PCM 30 without CCS
LTU
U20
S
I
L
C
to/from DLU
LTE
F1out
F2in
Y h ... 3
N h ... 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 1
PROC:DLUB 13
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Basic test (rack)

CAUTION:
Check and if necessary correct positioning of straps and switch settings on the
modules
......MMN:DLUB
TAB MOD:DLU
Create basic state
......(see 3.10.2)

Switch off all DCCxx (RGB, MGB, if present)
h ... 5
Unscrew all fuses in the R:DLU
If SLM_8 or SLMD modules are used, each halfshelf is supplied by one DCC_8
(DCCDD, DCCDC, DCCCR) instead of 2 DCCDF.
These DCC_8 are inserted in the mounting locations of DCC x-0 and DCC x-2.
DCC x-1 and DCC x-3 are omitted and also the corresponding fuses.
The following steps have to be carried out for each shelf of the DLUB.
Information block: Thermal switch
In every DLUB rack, a thermal switch is built into the bottom panel of the rack.
The contact is fixed at the allowable room temperature. If this temperature is
exceeded, then, via this thermal switch all DCCs in the rack receive ground
potential via the individual control input.
In this way the DCCs are switched off.
Exception: The DCCs in basic shelf0 are not switched off. In this way messages
are still possible.
If the temperature goes down, the DCCs are switched back on.
PROC:DLUB 14
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Screw in fuses
...... (see 3.10.2)
Screw in the fuse for the first/next DCCxx which is to be switched on

Switch on the corresponding DCCxx
Y h ... 10
N h ... 8
Replace DCCxx
Switch off DCCxx
Replace DCCxx by spare module
Switch on DCCxx
Y h ... 10
N h ... 9
10
Decision: next DCCxx

Are all DCCs in the shelf switched on?
11
Y h ... 12
N h ... 7
Decision: RGB
Is at least one module M:RGB present in the rack?
13
Y h ... 11
N h ... 7
Decision: next shelf

Are all DCCs in each shelf of the rack switched on?
12
h ... 7
Y h ... 13
N h ... 18
Switch on RGB
Fuse allocation to DCCxx and RGB-modules (if present) in F:DLU(D)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUB 15
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
MUT
FUSE
DCCxx
RGB
02
01
0-0
02
0-2
18
0-0
19
0-2
24
2-0
26
2-2
05
06
Remark
Only in Version D, E, D, D
Switch on the first / next RGB (in F:DLU(D))
Y h ... 16
N h ... 14
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the RGB module lit?
14
Replace defective RGB

Switch off defective RGB
Replace defective RGB by spare module
(Replacing the RGB module under power is possible)
Switch on RGB
Y h ... 16
N h ... 15
15

h ... 13
16
Measure ringing voltage
The ringing voltage can be measured with a multimeter between the test jacks
on the front panel of the RGB module.
......MMN:DLUB
TAB:MOD
Measure the ringing voltage between the test jacks.

Is the ringing voltage correct?
17
Decision: next RGB

Have all RGB modules in the rack already been switched on?
18
Y h ... 17
N h ... 14
Y h ... 18
N h ... 13
Decision: MGB
Is at least one module M:MGB present in the rack?
PROC:DLUB 16
Y h ... 19
N h ... 23
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
19
ITMN - OFFLINE
Switch on MGB
The MGB modules in F:DLU(D) are (if present) redundantly supplied via the
fuses of DCCxx 1-0 and 1-1
Fuse allocation to DCCxx and MGB-modules (if present) in F:DLU(D)
MUT
FUSE
DCCxx
Remark
02
03
1-0
Parallel for one MGB module
04
1-1
20
1-0
21
1-1
28
3-0
29
3-1
05
06

(Only possible in Version D, E, D,
D)
Switch on MGB in the first / next F:DLU(D)

Is the green LED on the faceplate of the MGB module lit?
20
Y h ... 22
N h ... 20
Replace defective MGB

Switch off defective MGB
Replace defective MGB by spare module
(Replacing the MGB module under power is possible)
Switch on MGB
21
Y h ... 22
N h ... 21

22
h ... 19
Decision: next MGB

Have all MGB modules in the rack already been switched on?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 23
N h ... 19
PROC:DLUB 17
ITMN - OFFLINE
23
Commissioning
System
Information about TESMOD2E
Before on-line testing of the DLUB, all the test routines that can be called by the
CP with MML commands can also be called by means of the TESMOD2E (TESt
MOdule for DLU 2 Extended) and the results displayed. In this way TESMOD2E
can be used in off-line mode to obtain a statement on the operability of the
DLUB to be put into service before the DLUB is connected to the parent
exchange via the PCM lines.
Answer the following question with yes only if a TESMOD2E is available and online testing is not possible in the foreseeable future.
Y i....PROC:
Do you want to test the DLUB with the TESMOD2E ?
TESMOD2E
N h ... 24
h ... 24
After finishing DLUB testing with TESMOD2E continue
24
The connection of the DLUB to LTG is shown in:

(LTGs used are LTGB, LTGF, LTGG, LTGM)
......(see
Fig. 3.10.
6)
According to the LTG the DIU30D or DIU120A is used as LTU. The wiring
between DIU:DLU and the corresponding LTU is shown in the following figures:
25
Wiring to DIU120A
......(see
Fig. 3.10.
7)
Wiring to DIU30D
......(see
Fig. 3.10.
9)
Information about connection path from DLUB to LTE
Because the DLUB and the start of the PCM link may be located apart, special
precautions must be taken to ensure that the cabling between DIU:DLU and LTE
(line terminating equipment / loading equipment) is correct. If it is, the corresponding PCM link simply needs to be connected to the LTE. If then no connection can be established between DLUB and LTGB, the PCM link is interrupted.
......(see
Fig. 3.10.
10)
The connection of DLUB to LTE is shown in
26
Establish connection DIU:DLU to LTE
The connection first has to be established for DIU:DLU0 and than for DIU:DLU1
PROC:DLUB 18
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
27
ITMN - OFFLINE
Create test loop for PDC0

Link up the outgoing cable with CCS (PDC0) from the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) to
the LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
28
Y h ... 29
N h ... 28
Fault clearance
29

30

Link up the outgoing cable without CCS (PDC1) from the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1)
to the LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
31
Y h ... 32
N h ... 31
Fault clearance
32

33
Decision: next DLUB system
Note that DLUB system 1 is connected to another LTG as shown in

Has DLUB system1 already been checked?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
...... 6)(see Fig. 3.10.

Y h ... 34
N h ... 27
PROC:DLUB 19
ITMN - OFFLINE
34
Commissioning
System
Establish connection LTG to LTE
The connection first has to be established for LTGx (to DLUB system 0) and
than for LTGy (to DLUB system 1).
......(see
Fig. 3.10.
11)
35
Create test loop for cable with CCS

which is to be connected to the LTE of DLUB system 0 (DLUB system 1), if not
already done.
Y h ... 37
N h ... 36
36
Fault clearance
37

38
Create test loop for cable without CCS

LTE which is to be connected to the LTE of DLUB system 0 (DLUB system 1), if
not already done.
Red LED F2 goes out
39
Y h ... 40
N h ... 39
Fault clearance
40

PROC:DLUB 20
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
41
ITMN - OFFLINE
Decision: test connection to DLUB system 1

Has the connection of LTGy to DLUB system 1 already been checked?
Y h ... END
N h ... 35
END
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUB 21
ITMN - OFFLINE
PROC:DLUB 22
Commissioning
System
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.11
Testing DLUB with the TESMOD2E

TESMOD2E
3.11.1
Overview of TESMOD2E parts

The test module can be divided into two parts: the control/ memory board and the control
panel. TESMOD2E can have an input and display panel connected and/or a printer.
TESMOD2E is plugged into the mounting location of the DLUC module and the DLUC
module is plugged into TESMOD2E.
X
HEX display
L
E
D
PIOP
8255
off/on
Memory bank
switchover
LIST key
= TESMOD /DLUC
= SME/TESMOD
=A
= LIMITER
= PRINTER
62256-RAM
Plug
DLUC
Control
logic
27C201EPROM
27C201EPROM
= RUN IN
27256EPR
= SINGLE/CONTI.
27256EPR
= STOP
RESET key
Control panel
PT 80 connector
Connector for input
and display panel
Control/memory board
Module frame
connector
Fig. 3.11.1 TESMOD2E -Overview
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:TESMOD2E 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.11.2
Commissioning
System
Control and memory unit

The control logic for TESMOD2E is used to access the memory and peripheral components and to switch over the memory areas between the DLUC module and TESMOD2E
The organization of the memory areas on both modules is shown in the following figure.
DLUC
0000H
TESMOD2E
0000H
27C256 /
62256
EPROM
Country
6000H
8000H
RAM
27C256 /
62256
C000H
E000H
62256
0
1
.
31
32
.
.
27C201
27C201
63
FFFFH
FFFFH
Fig. 3.11.2 Memory organization for DLUC and TESMOD2E

The memory area is switched over with the comparator chip and a register. The DLUC
memory area is always enabled if the address wanted is larger than the value stored in
the register. The TESMOD2E memory is disabled during this access procedure. On the
DLUC module the memory chips are accessed or disabled by the enabling and disabling
of the CS chip.
The DLUC memory area is enabled by:
PROC:TESMOD2E 2
switch position on TESMOD2E

access to the RAM area of the DLUC module
switchover by program
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
The memory unit of TESMOD2E is realized by a program memory with a capacity of 48

Kbyte, a data memory with a capacity of 16 Kbyte and 2 country specific EPROMs with
a total capacity of 512 Kbyte. The total memory area of both country specific EPROMs
is divided into 64 memory banks with a capacity of 8 Kbyte each.
Each memory bank contains the country specific loading data of one country. Switchover between the memory banks is realized by a decoder with address latch. The corresponding memory bank is selected by the 'PORT command OUT adr.'.
The addresses of the TESMOD2E memory area are located on the same level as the
EPROM area of the M:DLUC (see Fig. 3.11.2)
The module PIOP 8255 is used as an interface to switches, LEDs, Hex-displays and the
printer.
3.11.3
Control panel
The control panel contains switches, keys and displays.
3.11.3.1
Switch functions
Switch
STOP OFF/ON
SINGLE/CONT
RUN IN OFF/ON
PRINTER OFF/ON
Position
Meaning
ON
A test run can be stopped by putting the switch to the ON position. The
program stops when the job buffer has been processed.
OFF
The test is resumed by changing the switch to the OFF position.
SINGLE
When the switch is in the SINGLE position, the selected program is

executed once. All the tests executed are shown in the test log.
CONT
The selected program executes 65535 times. The test log will contain
only those tests in which faults occurred.
ON
Run-in mode: The program executes 65535 times. A printer must be

connected. If faults have occurred, a summary of the fault messages is
printed out after every program execution. If the same fault occurs on
three consecutive occasions, the message "Same fault from test run X to
Y" is only printed out from time to time. This happens until another fault
occurs.
OFF
The run-in mode is switched off.
OFF
The printer is switched off.
ON
The printer is switched on. A printer must be connected, otherwise the

program does not execute.
Caution! Do not connect a print multiplexer
LIMITER OFF/ON
ON
Only 10 consecutive fault messages are printed out.

Fault output does not start again until a new program step has begun.
OFF
Fault output is only interrupted when the fault field is full (approx. 500
messages).
Tab. 3.11.1 Switch functions
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:TESMOD2E 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Switch
Position
A OFF/ON
SME/TESMOD
EPROM
DLUC/TESMOD
Meaning
OFF
Normal initialization procedure:

In this position, the RAM area and the DMA/DLC chips undergo a pretest
in the first run. In a subsequent run these chips are not pretested. If the
configuration data have been entered, the load routine is executed. After
the DLU load routine, the TESMOD2E is ready for test command input.
ON
In this position no more activities are carried out after initialization of the
TESMOD2E .
SME
With the switch in this position, control is taken over by the ETA85
controller.
TESMO
D
TESMOD with original processor on DLUC module.

It is controlled by the input and display panel.
DLUC
When power has been switched on or the reset key pressed, the DLU
operating program is started. The TESMOD2E functions are not available in this setting.
3.11.3.2
Key functions
Key
Function
LIST
Printer switch "OFF":

The test log is displayed in the form of a code on the HEX display in single-step mode.
Advance step-by-step by repeatedly pressing the LIST key. When each code number is
output the red LED indicates whether the value displayed refers to a text message or a fault
message.
Red LED on: Fault message
Red LED off: Text message
Printer switch "ON":
The test log is printed out.
RESET
The RESET key resets the processor and restarts the program depending on the EPROM
DLUC/TESMOD.
Tab. 3.11.2 Key functions
3.11.3.3
Displays
Display
Hexadecimal display
Meaning
This identifies the test routines and the coded test results.
Tab. 3.11.3 Displays
PROC:TESMOD2E 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Display
Meaning
Red LED
Each time a code number is output, the red LED indicates whether the value
displayed refers to a text message or a fault message.
red LED on - fault message
red LED off - text message
Green LED
The green LED indicates that a test is currently running.
Tab. 3.11.3 Displays
3.11.4
Input and display panel
DISPLAY
HEX - INPUT
S
W
I
T
C
H
E
S
K
E
Y
FUNCTION KEYS
Fig. 3.11.3 Input and display panel
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:TESMOD2E 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
As shown in the figure above, the input and display panel contains:
3.11.4.1
a 16-character alphanumeric display
a hexadecimal key pad
a function key pad
two switches
a RESET key
16-character display
The 16-character alphanumeric display shows the test messages, addresses and data.
3.11.4.2
RESET key
Press the RESET key to reset the DLUC, initialize, and then to load the DLU.
3.11.4.3
Switch functions
Switch
TEST PORT/ALL
RAM TESMOD /DLUC
Position
Meaning
PORT
With the switch in this position, one module can be tested on its own.
ALL
With the switch in this position, all the modules of a module type are
tested.
TESMOD
Press the G key to modify or display files, or to start programs from

the TESMOD2E memory area.
DLUC
Press the G key to modify or display files, or to start programs from

the DLUC memory area.
3.11.4.4
Hexadecimal key pad

The hexadecimal key pad is used to enter the module flag byte, to select test routines
and to enter addresses and data.
3.11.4.5
Function key pad

The function key pad comprises eight keys. When one of these function keys is pressed,
the function is selected on the basis of the key value that has been read in, a corresponding status byte is set and the necessary memory cells reserved. The two key pads
are then interrogated for input. If one of the hexadecimal keys is now pressed, this value
is stored and displayed. When a new function key is pressed, the status byte is reset
and the memory cells reserved again. If the E key is pressed, the function called is
executed. When the function has terminated, the status byte is cleared and the keys are
interrogated again for input. The function keys are explained below:
PROC:TESMOD2E 6
E key
The E key (Enter) starts routines or initiates actions which have been called by the
other function keys.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.11.5
ITMN - OFFLINE
B key
Before starting the test routines, the configuration data of the DLU (each inserted
module is represented by an identification byte) have to be input. By pressing the B
key all modules, except the controller modules (DLUC,DIUD,BDCG) and the TU
modules (FMTU, LCMM) will be preset with the identification byte of a normal
subscriber line module.
The preset id bytes are only written into the memory if pressing the B key is followed
by pressing the E key. Thus it can be avoided that identification bytes, which have
been input manually, are unintentionally overwritten by pressing the B key.
T key
Press the T key (Test) and state the test block number to call all test routines. The
test routines are started by pressing the E key. After the test the result is output and
the keys are interrogated for new input.
D key
Press the D key to display the DLUC or TESMOD2E data. The position of the RAM
TESMOD2E /DLUC switch determines the memory area from which the data are
taken. After pressing the D key, enter the required address. The contents of the
address are displayed when the E key has been pressed. The I key can be used to
display neighboring memory cells.
I key
Press the I key to increment the address by one. This key can also be used for the
decrement function when the configuration data are being entered, if the TEST
PORT/ALL switch is in the PORT position when the I key is pressed.
S key
Press the S key (Substitute) to change the contents of memory cells. The display
shows the address of the memory location to be changed, the contents of the
memory location and the data to be entered. Press the E key to transfer the data
entered on the keypad into the memory cell.
G key
Press the G key (Go) to start a program from any address.
L key
Press the L key (List) to print out the last test log.
Test options with TESMOD2E

To call the individual test routines, press the T key and then specify the test by stating
the test code number. The following table gives an overview of the individual test
routines.
Test code no.
Test object
Entire DLU system
DLUC
GCG
All BD/DCC if switch PORT/ALL is at ALL
One BD/DCC if switch PORT/ALL is at PORT
Tab. 3.11.5 Test codes and test routines
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:TESMOD2E 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Test code no.
Test object
DIU:DLU
All SLMACs if switch PORT/ALL is at ALL
One SLMAC if switch PORT/ALL is at PORT
SASC
All TU modules
FMTU
LCMM
LVMM (not possible in DLUB)
EMSP
All SLMD if switch PORT/ALL is at ALL
One SLMD if switch PORT/ALL is at PORT
ALEX
MTA
MTAM
10
LTAM
11
TBAM
12
SLCI Version 6.2 or later
20
DIAGNOSIS for Version 6.2
30
QUICKCHECK for SLMA / SLMD
40
MDF test for Version 5.1
Tab. 3.11.5 Test codes and test routines

Tests of the entire DLU system are carried out in the following sequence:
DLUC test
GCG test
BD test
DIU:DLU test
TU test
SLMAC test
EMSP test
The tests listed above check the following:
DLUC test
Checksum per EPROM with reference value

Checksum of all EPROMs
Writability of the RAM cells
Writability of the RAM cells with different bit patterns
Availability of memory addresses
GCG test
Switchover of clock systems
Loop test for checking the correct DLU clock distribution
PROC:TESMOD2E 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Analysis of acknowledgments issued by the GCG
BD test
Disconnection of an SLMA group of four
DCC and RGB flag tests are already implemented in the diagnosis
DIU:DLU test
TU test
TSX status bit

All PCM channels
PCM link up to the LTGB interface
Signaling path to the LTGB
PCM link up to the COSLAC/SICOFI
meter pulse
Ringing current indicator
Leak current, short-to-ground and voltage failure indicator
LN-, LR, C-, D-, EN-, EH- and UN-indicators
Reference values on LCMM for resistance, voltage and capacitance
SLMA test
Signaling path DLUP <---> SLMCP

Interface between SLMCP and COSLAC/SICOFI
Line-dependent COSLAC data (if COSLAC is used)
Loopback setting of COSLAC/SICOFI in analog area
B seizure:
Testing feeding voltage
Port seizure as B subscriber
Ringing trough connection
Ring tripping
Testing feeding voltage (low impedance)
Testing feeding voltage (high impedance)
clear back
A subscriber:
Port seizure as A subscriber
Digit input
Testing speech path (frequency and level)
Testing meter pulse
Reversal
(Loop open)
clear forward
overload test
Testing the test relays
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
EMSP test
The EMSP test checks the line-dependent COSLAC data.
PROC:TESMOD2E 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.11.6
3.11.6.1
Commissioning
System
Tables relevant for the procedure

Basic switch settings
Switch
EPROM
Switch position
DLUC/TESMOD
TESMOD
STEUERUNG SME/TESMOD
TESMOD
OFF/ON
OFF
LIMITER
OFF/ON
ON
PRINTER
OFF/ON
ON
OFF (only if there is no printer)
RUN IN
OFF/ON
OFF
TEST
SINGLE/CONT
SINGLE
STOP
OFF/ON
OFF
Tab. 3.11.6 Basic switch settings on control panel
Switch
TEST
RAM
Switch position
PORT/ALL
TESMOD/DLUC
PORT
TESMOD
Tab. 3.11.7 Basic switch settings on the input and display

panel
3.11.6.2
Mounting locations for SLMD short circuit connectors

Frame
left halfshelf
right halfshelf
F:DLU(D)
C2 15/27/39/51
C2 68/80/92/104
F:DLU(E)
A2 15/27/39/51
A2 68/80/92/104
C2 15/27/39/51
C2 68/80/92/104
A2 15/27/39/51
A2 80/92/104
F:DLU(F)

Q965, Q1101, Q838
PROC:TESMOD2E 10
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Frame
left halfshelf
right halfshelf
F:DLU(D)
F:DLU(E)
F:DLU(F)
C2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57
C2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110
A2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57
A2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110
C2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57
C2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110
A2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57
A2 74/80/86/92/98/104/110

Q1103, Q1192
3.11.6.3
Mounting locations for SLMX short circuit connectors

Frame
left halfshelf
right halfshelf
F:DLU(D)
F:DLU(E)
F:DLU(F)
C2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57
C2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110
A2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57
A2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110
C2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57
C2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110
A2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57
A2 74/80/86/92/98/104/110
Tab. 3.11.10 Mounting locations for module type Q1338
3.11.6.4
ID-Bytes for Configuration Data

Shelf
ID-Bytes for DCCs in left

halfshelf
ID-Bytes for DCCs in right

halfshelf
00 / 01
02 / 03
04 / 05
06 / 07
08 / 09
0A / 0B
0C / 0D
0E / 0F
Tab. 3.11.11 DCC ID-Bytes
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:TESMOD2E 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Flag byte
Module
not present
DCC
RGB
Tab. 3.11.12 Flag-Bytes
ID-Byte
Module
00
not present
01
SLMA:COS
02
SLMA:CM16
03
04
SLMA:CCBR
05
SLMA:CRMP
06
SLMD:C
07
LMEM
08
LVMM
09
FTEM
0A
ALEX
0B
EMSP
0C
GCG
0D
DLUC
0E
DIU:DLU
0F
SLMA:C12R
10
SLMA:CMC
11
SLMA:SAB
12
SLMA:TPL / SLMA:TAB
13
SLMA:DID
14
SLMA:CAB
15
SLMA:CMRL
18
SLMA:GAB
19
SLMA:GLAB
1A
MTAM
1B
LTBAM-TBA
EBP 1F
1C
LTBAM-LTA
EBP 1E
Q828 or Q1094-X1/X2
1D
1E
SLMA:DIOD
1F
20
SLMA:FPB
Tab. 3.11.13 Module ID-Bytes
PROC:TESMOD2E 12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
ID-Byte
Module
21
SLMA:CSR
22
SLMD:A
23
SLMA:BEL
24
SLMA:12R
25
SLMD:B
27
SLMA:FPC
28
FMTU
29
LCMM
2A
2B
2C
EMSP
2D
SASC
2F
SLCIM
Q1094-X4
30
31
32
SLMA:FPS
33
IWEA
34
35
IWEB
36
SLMA CSP (Brasil)
37
ALMA (Brasil)
38
OLMA (Brasil)
39
OLMAC (Brasil)
3A
SLMA FPD
3C
SLMA:FPC8 (Austria)
41
SLMX
49
DIUDRA (SDE)
4A
DIUDRB (SDE)
4B
SUR
50
SLMA:FPE
51
SLMA:FPF
52
MGB
Tab. 3.11.13 Module ID-Bytes
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:TESMOD2E 13
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Switch settings on the TESMOD2E

Put all switches on the control panel to the basic position according to:
Put switches on the input and display panel to the basic position according to:
......(see
Tab.
3.11.6)
......(see
Tab.
3.11.7)
Connect the TESMOD2E

Switch off current converter DCCxx in the left halfshelf of shelf 0 and switch off
RGB0 (if present)
The LEDs on the module faceplates of DCCxx and RGB in the left halfshelf of
shelf 0 go out
Pull control module DLUC0 in the left halfshelf of shelf 0
Plug TESMOD2E into the mounting location of DLUC0
Plug module DLUC0 onto the TESMOD2E module
Connect control and display panel to TESMOD2E
Switch on printer and connect to control and display panel
Plug in ADL
Plug ADL test module onto the rear of mounting location A2/B2 051 and C2/D2
074
Set switches on the ADL test module to the following positions:
S1 = ON
S2 = OFF
S3 = OFF
S4:
S4 = OFF : No CRC4 mode (switch S5 on M:DIUDC at OFF) for WM
S4 = ON : CRC4 mode (if S5 on M:DIUDC is ON) for DBP
As of Version 6.2, only the ADL is used as a DIU termination
Prepare SLMD-Test
Connect the network terminator (NT) for ISDN subscribers on the back of the
SLMD modules.
PROC:TESMOD2E 14
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
For module frames with code number S30804-B2709-X- * (F:DLU(D)) to the

following points:
A-wire of NT to pin B2 039 37
B-wire of NT to pin B2 039 38
The SLMD short-circuit connector S30189-H4906-A110 can be used for SLMD

module types Q965, Q1101 and Q838. One SLMD short-circuit connector is
required per SLMD. The SLMD short circuit connector is like the SLMD module
plugged into a mounting location with integer value.
The following mounting locations for SLMD short-circuit connectors are

possible:
The SLMD short-circuit connector S30189-H4906-A110 must be used for SLMD
module types Q1103 and Q1192. One SLMD short-circuit connector is required
per SLMD.
The following mounting locations for SLMD short-circuit connectors are

possible:
...... 3.11.9)
(see Tab.
Prepare SLMX-Test
The SLMX short-circuit connector S30257-Z7103-A20 can be used for SLMX
module type Q1338. One SLMX short-circuit connector is required per SLMX.
The SLMX short circuit connector must be plugged into the rear side of the
SLMX mounting location.
The following mounting locations for SLMX short-circuit connectors are

possible:
...... 3.11.8)
(see Tab.
...... 3.11.10)
(see Tab.
Information about Country settings
If the STOP-Switch is in position OFF before switching on the power, the last
selected country memory bank is active.
If another country is to be activated, the STOP Switch has to be set to position
ON before power is switched on. Then the program runs in an endless loop after
switching on the power and the user can select the relevant country memory
bank. After selecting the correct country memory bank the STOP Switch is to be
set to position OFF again and the automatic initializing starts.
Decision: select memory bank with country specific loading data

Is already the correct memory bank with the country specific loading data
selected?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 9
N h ... 8
PROC:TESMOD2E 15
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Select memory bank with country specific loading data

Set STOP-Switch to position ON
Switch on current converter DCCxx in the left halfshelf and RGB0 (if present)
The program runs in an endless loop.
Select the correct memory bank with the HEX-keys or by pressing the I-key
(increment) or L-key (decrement)
h ... 10
Set STOP-Switch to position OFF
Switch on DCCxx
The LEDs on the faceplates of modules DCCxx and RGB in the left halfshelf of
shelf 0 light up.
10
Initializing TESMOD2E
TESMOD2E is automatically initialized. A RAM test and a DLC/DMA test are

then carried out on the DLUC. If no faults are found during the test, the DLUC is
subsequently initialized.
At the end of the TESMOD initialization the display shows:
' BASIC - TEST ' ' **NO FAULTS DETECTED** ' ' END OF TEST '
and the configuration data can be entered.
Y h ... 12
N h ... 11
Does the display panel show '**NO FAULT DETECTED**'?
11
Replace defective TESMOD2E
The TESMOD2E is probably defective and must be replaced

Switch off current converter DCCxx and RGB0 (if present) in the left halfshelf of
shelf 0
Remove input and display panel from TESMOD2E
Remove DLUC0 module from TESMOD2E
Replace TESMOD2E in DLUC0 mounting location
Plug DLUC0 onto TESMOD2E
Connect input and display panel to TESMOD2E
h ... 9
After replacing defective TESMOD2E continue
12
Decision: automatic input of configuration data
The rack capacity stage has to be input before starting the DLU test. For this
reason it is necessary to generate the configuration data. Every module which is
present in the DLU is entered in the configuration data.
Caution: Only the modules entered in the configuration data will be tested
PROC:TESMOD2E 16
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Depending on the switch A OFF/ON the configuration data are input automatically or manually:
A=OFF : Configuration data are input automatically
A=ON : Configuration data have to be input manually
Is the configuration data input automatically?
13
Y h ... 13
N h ... 15
Automatic input of configuration data
A printer should be connected for automatic input of configuration data so that a

printout of the data can be made. Whenever automatic configuration data is
executed, the display "GET EQUIPMENT DATA" appears on the control panel or
on the printout. Each time an automatic input of configuration data has taken
place, the printout of the data should be compared with the actual rack configuration. If a module is installed at a mounting location, the printout of the configuration data must show the hardware ID of the module in question. If it shows 00,
however, instead of the right hardware ID, the module in question is defective.
The BD modules do not appear in the configuration data printout.
The RGB, MGB and DCC modules are recognized automatically.
The DCCs are assigned to the following HEX-numbers:
...... 3.11.11)
(see Tab.
In the case of automatic configuration data input, only the DIUD in the shelf in
which the TESMOD2E is plugged in is entered in the configuration data; the
DIUD in the other DLUC system is not entered, however.
DLUB READY is printed out after successful input of the configuration data
DLUB READY
Compare the configuration data printout with the rack layout
Are all the modules contained in the configuration data?
14
Y h ... 16
N h ... 14
Replace modules
Switch off DCC
Modules marked 00 must be replaced
Switch on DCC
After replacing modules continue
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 13
PROC:TESMOD2E 17
ITMN - OFFLINE
15
Commissioning
System
Manual input of configuration data
The TESMOD2E needs the configuration data for the DLU load routine. The
configuration data contain the module data and the capacity stage.
Press the B key on the input panel
"DLU DATA" appears on the alphanumeric display
Press the E key on the input panel
The alphanumeric display shows the number of the first DCC and the corresponding flag byte.
......(see
Tab.
3.11.12)
The flag byte must be entered on the keypad according to:
The TESMOD2E begins with the left-hand DCC in shelf 0. After entering the
code number, press the I key and the TESMOD2E is ready for entry of the next
code number. The DCCxx are numbered from 00 through 0F. Simply enter that
the DCCxx is present or not. The bus distributors are automatically entered
when the DCCxx are entered. If both DCCxx in a shelf are entered as not
present, the entire shelf is taken as not present. Positions 10 and 11 are
reserved for the RGB.
Caution!
When the TEST PORT/ALL switch is changed to the ALL position, the I key no
longer has the increment function, but the decrement function. This means that
if an input error is made, the entire configuration data do not have to be reentered.
Enter the configuration data for all DCCxx and RGB according to the following
table:
......(see
Tab.
3.11.12)
Press the E key when all 18 flag bytes have been entered.
The bytes are stored in the EPROM EMULATOR.
The TESMOD2E is now ready for entry of the remaining module types.
......(see
Tab.
3.11.13)
Enter the configuration data for the remaining modules according to:
Press the E key when all flag bytes have been entered.
All flag bytes are stored in the EPROM EMULATOR.
When the configuration data have been entered, the DLU is loaded with system,
device, module and port data. The operation and maintenance program of the
DLU is then started up until all the modules present have been created and activated.
When the load routine has terminated, TESMOD2E is ready for tests to be
executed and indicates this on the display with DLUB READY.
PROC:TESMOD2E 18
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
16
ITMN - OFFLINE
Test entire DLU with TESMOD2E

Press the T key
The display shows a 0
The code number 0 executes all the possible tests on the DLU in sequence.
...... (see 3.11.5)
Start the tests by pressing E
When these tests have terminated, the green LED on the control panel goes out
and the number of errors is shown on the display panel.
17
Evaluate message
Branch to the following blocks according to the message which is displayed
18
The message NO ERRORS DETECTED is displayed
h ... 28
The message XX ERRORS DETECTED is displayed (XX indicates the

number of errors that have occurred)
h ... 18
L key
If a module needs to be replaced, it must be marked as faulty once it has been

removed.
Press the L key
The display outputs the first error that occurred, stating the fault location
(module identification).
19
Identify the errors that have occurred (1)

Does the error displayed relate to an SLMAC module?
20

Is LOOP TEST ERROR displayed?
21
If LOOP TEST ERROR is output for the entire SLMAC
h ... 23
h ... 22
Pull SLMAC module

Pull the identified SLMAC module and then reinsert it
23
Y h ... 21
N h ... 23

If LOOP TEST ERROR is output for one port only
22
Y h ... 20
N h ... 23
h ... 26
Decision: fault clearance

Is it probable that the displayed error can be cleared?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 24
N h ... 25
PROC:TESMOD2E 19
ITMN - OFFLINE
24
Clear error
Clear displayed error
25
h ... 26
Replace module
Replace the module indicated in the display
26
Commissioning
System
h ... 26
Display next error

Display the next error by pressing I
Is another error displayed?
27
RESET
Press RESET key
28
Y h ... 19
N h ... 27
h ... 16
DLU system 1 already tested?

Has DLU system 1 already been tested?
PROC:TESMOD2E 20
Y h ... 30
N h ... 29
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
29
ITMN - OFFLINE
Test DLU system 1

Switch off current converter DCCxx in the left halfshelf of shelf 0 and switch off
RGB0 (if present)
shelf 0 go out
Pull control module DLUC0 in the left halfshelf of shelf 0
Unplug TESMOD2E
Plug in DLUC0 again
shelf 0 are lit
Switch off current converter DCCxx in the right halfshelf of shelf 0 and switch off
RGB1 (if present)
The LEDs on the module faceplates of DCCxx and RGB in the right halfshelf of
shelf 0 go out
Pull control module DLUC1 in the right halfshelf of shelf 0
Plug TESMOD2E into the DLUC1 mounting location
Plug the DLUC1 onto the TESMOD2E
Switch on printer and connect to the control and display panel
Switch on current converter DCCxx in the right halfshelf of shelf 0 and RGB1 (if
present)
The LEDs on the module faceplates of the DCCxx and RGB in the right halfshelf
of shelf 1 light up.
TESMOD2E is automatically initialized when power is switched on. A RAM test

and a DLC/DMA test are then carried out on the DLUC. If no faults are found
during the tests, the DLUC is subsequently initialized. The configuration data do
not have to be reentered for DLU system 1 as they are still stored in the EPROM
emulator. After initialization the DLU is loaded with system, device, module and
port data. Subsequently, the operation and maintenance software of the DLU is
started until all the modules present have been created and activated.
When the load routine has terminated, the TESMOD2E is ready for tests to be
executed and indicates this by displaying DLUB READY.
h ... 12
30
End of DLU-Test with TESMOD2E
End of DLU-Test with TESMOD2E

END
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:TESMOD2E 21
ITMN - OFFLINE
PROC:TESMOD2E 22
Commissioning
System
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.12

(Frames G / E / F)
DLUD
3.12.1
Documents
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Maintenance Manual MMN:DLUD

AKUHW Lists
PROC:DLUD 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.12.2
Fuse Assignments
3.12.2.1
FU 01
FU
03
02
Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-E)

05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
FU
32
FU
FU
01 A001-057
03
04
C001,C015-033,057*
D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C
Sicherungsschiene
F:DLU(G)
Shelf 0
Shelf 1
11 C001,C015-033
D D
C C
C C
B
D
2
Shelf 2
C001,C015-033,057*
D
C
C
D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C
F:DLU(G)
Shelf 0
D
C
C
D
C
C
B
D
3
Shelf 3
Shelf 1
F:DLU(E)
D
C
C
D R
C G
C B
D
C
C
M
G
B
D
C
C
D
C
C
C008,C039-057
24 A001,A015-033
25 A008,A039-057
28 C001,C015-033
29
D D
C C
C C
C008,C039-057
18 A001-057
21
D
C
C
M
G
B
08 A008,A039-057
20
D R
C G
C B
C008,C039-057
07 A001,A015-033
12
MUT01
D D
C C
C C
D D
C C
C C
Shelf 2
Shelf 3
C008,C039-057
B
D
2
B
D
3
F:DLU(E)
D
C
C
D
C
C
D
C
C
D
C
C
MUT02
A066-125
C116,C068-086
02
05
C123,C092-110
06
MUT03
A116,A068-086
09
A123,A092-110
10
C116,C068-086
13
C123,C092-110
14
MUT05
A066-125
C116,C068-086
19
22
C123,C092-110
23
MUT06
A116,A068-086
26
A123,A092-110
27
C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110
30
31
CD
* 057 nur wenn MGB gesteckt ist.
Hinweis: Wird nur ein DCC pro Halbshelf verwendet, entfallen die DCC Pos shf-1 und shf-3 und somit auch
die zugehrigen Sicherungen.
Fig. 3.12.1 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-E)
PROC:DLUD 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.12.2.2
FU 01
FU
03
02
Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-G)

05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
32
FU
FU
FU
01 A001-057
03
04
C001,C015-033,057*
D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C
Sicherungsschiene
F:DLU(G)
Shelf 0
Shelf 1
M
G
B
D D
C C
C C
11 C001,C015-033
C001,C015-033,057*
29
R
G
B
D
C
C
D
C
C
R
G
B
D D
C C
C C
D
C
C
D
C
C
C001,C015-033,057*
MUT02
A066-125
02
C116,C068-086
D
C
C
D
C
C
M
G
B
R
G
B
D
C
C
06
MUT03
A116,A068-086
09
A123,A092-110
10
C116,C068-086
D D
C C
C C
F:DLU(G)
Shelf 2
Shelf 3
C008,C039-057
M
G
B
D
C
C
D
C
C
R
G
B
D
C
C
13
14
MUT05
A066-125
19
C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110
D R
C G
C B
05
C123,C092-110
C123,C092-110
F:DLU(G)
Shelf 0
D
C
C
D
C
C
B
D
3
Shelf 3
Shelf 1
F:DLU(E)
C008,C039-057
24 A001-057
28
D D
C C
C C
C008,C039-057
18 A001-057
21
D
C
C
B
D
2
Shelf 2
08 A008,A039-057
20
D
C
C
C008,C039-057
07 A001,A015-033
12
MUT01
22
23
MUT06
A066-125
26
C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110
30
31
CD
Hinweis: Wird nur ein DCC pro Halbshelf verwendet, entfallen die DCC Pos shf-1 und shf-3 und somit auch die
Fig. 3.12.2 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-G)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUD 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.12.2.3
FU 01
FU
03
02
Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-F)

05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
21
19
18
20
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33 FU
31
30
FU
32
FU
FU
01 A001-057
03
04
C001,C015-033,057*
D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C
Sicherungsschiene
F:DLU(G)
Shelf 0
Shelf 1
11 C001,C015-033
D D
C C
C C
B
D
2
Shelf 2
D D
C C
C C
C001,C015-033,057*
D
C
C
R
G
B
D D
C C
C C
F:DLU(E)
Shelf 3
R
G
B
D
C
C
D
C
C
D
C
C
F:DLU(G)
D
C
C
D
C
C
M
G
B
R
G
B
D
C
C
C008,C039-057
24 A001,A015-033
D D
C C
C C
Shelf 2
25 A008,A039-057
MUT02
A066-125
C116,C068-086
B B
D D
2 3
F:
DLU(F)
D
C
C
D
C
C
02
05
C123,C092-110
06
MUT03
A116,A068-086
09
A123,A092-110
10
C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110
Shelf 0
Shelf 1
D
C
C
D
C
C
B
D
3
C008,C039-057
18 A001-057
21
D
C
C
M
G
B
08 A008,A039-057
20
D
C
C
C008,C039-057
07 A001,A015-033
12
MUT01
13
14
MUT05
A066-125
C116,C068-086
19
22
C123,C092-110
23
A116,A074-92
26
A123,A098-110
27
CD
Hinweis: Wird nur ein DCC pro Halbshelf verwendet, entfallen die DCC Pos shf-1 und shf-3 und somit auch die
Fig. 3.12.3 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-F)
PROC:DLUD 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.12.3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Equipment of the different Frames

Detailed information about the equipment of the different frames are listed in the equipment list and the mounting location list of the MMN:DLUD, APP.
3.12.4
Shelter DLU 400/700

The shelter can contain the following equipment:

Basic frame D for DLUB (F:DLU(D)) with a max. of 384 subscribers or basic frame
G for DLUD (F:DLU(G)) with a max. of 448 subscribers

Basic frame F:DLU(D)) or F:DLU(G)) and also extension frame F for DLUB
(F:DLU(F)) with a max. of 240 subscribers
Transmission equipment for the shelter (optional)

The following transmission equipment is provided in the shelter for connection to the
network node or for the connection of additional shelters (ring or star configuration):
Transmission technology in the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
SDH: synchronous multiplexers (SMA1/4) or, alternatively,
synchronous dual terminal multiplexers (STM1D)
Transmission technology in the plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
PDH technology in the shelter:
Optical/HDSL terminal multiplexer for 2 Mbit/s (OMX2/HMX)
Optical terminal multiplexer for 34 Mbit/s (OMX16)
(PDH technology can also be integrated in the DLU hardware)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUD 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.12.4.1
Commissioning
System
MDF/ DDF distribution frame
Air conditioning (fan and heater)
Power supply unit, including standby battery
Cable TV
Modem for OFDC (optional)
Overview Shelter 400/700
SIEMENS
DDF
DDF
24 PCM30 24 PCM30
Basic frame D
(F:DLU(D)) or G
(F:DLU(G))
MDF
200 DA internal
SMA 1/4 or SMT1D

(SDH)
MDF
200 DA internal
1600 mm
Connector panel
Fan
Fan
MDF
200 DA external
DC distribution
OFDC modem
Connector panel
MDF
200 DA external
MDF
200 DA external
AC distribution
OMX2/HMX or OMX16
(PDH)
AC/DC converter (48 V/30 A)
(Connection for
emergency power supply)
Mains access (MAP)
or
protection (LOP)
Heater 1600 W
Cable TV
Battery
500 mm
1800 mm
Side view (left)
Front view
PROC:DLUD 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
SIEMENS
DDF
DDF
24 PCM30 24 PCM30
DDF
24 PCM30
104 DA
internal
Connecting panel
Basic frame D
(F:DLU(D)) or G
(F:DLU(G))
MDF
200 DA internal
SMA 1/4 or SMT1D

(SDH)
MDF
200 DA internal
1800 mm
MDF
200 DA internal
Fan
Extension frame F
(F:DLU(F))
MDF
200 DA external
Connecting panel
MDF
200 DA external
Fan
OFDC modem
MDF
200 DA external
DC distribution
MDF
200 DA external
AC distribution
MDF
200 DA external
(Connection for emergency power supply)
OMX2/HMX or OMX16
(PDH)
AC/DC
converter
(48 V/30 A)
Heater 1600 W
Cable TV
Mains access (MAP)

or
protection (LOP)
Battery
500 mm
1800 mm
Side view (left)
Front view
3.12.4.2
Fuse Assignment PPD (Primary power distribution)

Sicherungen
gesicherte Einheit
F1
25 A
AC Power supply
(Fehlerstromschutzschalter)
F2
16 A
Rectifier 1
F3
16 A
Rectifier 2 (optional)
F4
10 A
Heater
F5
10 A
Cabel TV (optional)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUD 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Sicherungen
F6
10 A
gesicherte Einheit
Socket (for OFDC-Modem)
3.12.4.3
Fuse Assignment SPD (Secondary power distribution)

Fuses
Unit
F1
10 A
F2
10 A
F3
10 A
F4
10 A
F5
10 A
Transmission equipment (SDH)

or
F6
10 A
not used
F7
10 A
Transmission equipment (PDH)

or
F8
10 A

bzw.
F9
10 A
Fan 2
F10
10 A
Fan 1
F11
10 A
Monitoring and heater control
F12
10 A

bzw.
F13
50 A
Battery
Tab. 3.12.2 Assignment of secondary fuses

Caution:
The fuse cover must not be removed by the maintenance. personnel. If maintenance
work on the fuses is necessary, this can only be carried out by trained specialists. Before
the fuse cover is removed the 220 V AC line voltage must be switched off.
PROC:DLUD 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.12.5
3.12.5.1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Remote DLU
Connection of a remote DLUD to two LTG
Plug position
DLU
LTGx
D
L
U
S
0
D
L
U
S
1
LTU
U21
PDC0
B2 057
LTU
U21
PDC1
S
I
L
C
LTU
U20
PDC0
B2 066
LTU
U20
PDC1
DLU
LTGy
D
L
U
S
0
D
L
U
S
1
LTU
U21
PDC0
B2 057
LTU
U21
PDC1
S
I
L
C
LTU
U20
PDC0
B2 066
PDC1
LTU
U20
Fig. 3.12.6 Connection of remote DLUD to two LTG

The diagram above shows the connection of the remote DLUD to two LTGs. One DLUD
system is connected to the LTGx and the other to the LTGy. The dotted lines represent
the links without CCS.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUD 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.12.5.2
Commissioning
System
Wiring between DLUS and LTU

DIU120A
DLUS
Pin No.(*)
Pin No. (Plug Pin)
Sym.
LE
Koax.
LE
54
57
55
55
F2in...F1out
F1in...F2out
E134
C134
E136
E136
E138
C136
E132
E132
E134
C134
E136
E136
E138
C136
F2out
58
LTU/U20
PDC1
43
F2in...F1out
F2out
44
47
45
45
F2in
F1in...F2out
F1out...F2in
F2out...F1in
F2in
46
E132
F2in
F1out...F2in
F2out...F1in
F2in
43
E132
53
F2out
56
Koax.
LTU/U21
PDC0
53
Sym.
F2out
48
Fig. 3.12.7 Wiring between DLUS and LTU (DIU120A)

(*): The pin numbers refer to the first of four PDC connectors of the DIU120A. An overview of all pin numbers is shown in the following table:
PDC(0)
Sym
Koax
PDC(1)
Sym
Koax
PDC(2)
Sym
Koax
PDC(3)
Sym
Koax
E132
E132
E142
E142
E152
E152
E212
E212
E134
C134
E144
C144
E154
C154
E214
C214
E136
E136
E146
E146
E156
E156
E216
E216
E138
C136
E148
C146
E158
C156
E218
C216
Tab. 3.12.3 Pin numbers for PCM30 connectors of DIU120A
PROC:DLUD 10
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
DIU120A MOLOCS:
305
255
101
151
203
SU1
F:LTGM(A) Rearview
SU2
row C
(mounting area 1)
SU3
SU4
SU5
SU1
SU2
row D
(mounting area 2)
SU3
SU4
PDC0
PDC1
PDC2
0 (no pins available)

1
2
Pin E 2 1 2
Pins for PDC3 (sym.)
Pin E 2 1 4
Pin E 2 1 6
Pin E 2 1 8
9
Fig. 3.12.8 Numbering method on F:LTGM
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUD 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
DIU30D
DLUS
Pin No. (Plug Pin)
Sym.
Pin No. (Plug pin)

LE
Koax.
LE
53
F2in...F1out
F2out
54
57
55
55
F2out...F1in
F2in
56
F1in...F2out
F1out...F2in
F2in...F1out
F2out
45
45
F2out...F1in
F2in
46
50
29
51
51
52
31
49
49
50
29
51
51
52
31
LTU/U20
43
47
49
F2out
58
44
49
F2in
PDC1
43
Koax.
LTU/U21
PDC0
53
Sym.
F2in
F1in...F2out
F1out...F2in
F2out
48
Fig. 3.12.9 Wiring between DLUS and LTU (DIU30D)
3.12.5.3
Connection path from DLUD to LTE
To/from LTGx
DLU
D
L
U
S
0
PDC0
F2in
PCM 30 with CCS
F1out
LTE
F2out
F1in
F2in
F1out
To/from LTGx
PDC1
PCM 30 without CCS
LTE
F2out
F1in
F2in
F1out
To/from LTGy
D
L
U
S
1
PDC0
PCM 30 with CCS
LTE
F2out
F1in
F2in
F1out
To/from LTGy
PDC1
PCM 30 without CCS

F2out
LTE
F1in
Fig. 3.12.10 Connection path from DLUD to LTE
PROC:DLUD 12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.12.5.4
ITMN - OFFLINE
To/from DLU
F1in
LTE
F1out
F2out
PCM 30 with CCS
LTU
U21
PCM 30 without CCS
LTU
U20
F2in
To/from DLU
F1in
F2out
LTE
F2in
F1out
LTGx
S
I
L
C
LTGy
To/from DLU
F1in
LTE
F2out
F1out
F2in
F1in
F2out
PCM 30 with CCS
LTU
U21
PCM 30 without CCS
LTU
U20
S
I
L
C
To/from DLU
LTE
F1out
F2in
Y h ... 3
N h ... 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 1
PROC:DLUD 13
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Basic test (rack)

CAUTION:
Check and if necessary correct positioning of straps and switch settings on the
modules
......MMN:DLUD
TAB MOD:DLU
Create basic state
......(see 3.12.2)

Switch off all DCCxx (RGB, MGB, if present)
h ... 5
Unscrew all fuses in the R:DLUD
If SLM_8 or SLMD modules are used, each halfshelf is supplied by one DCC_8
(DCCDD, DCCDC, DCCCR) instead of 2 DCCDF.
These DCC_8 are inserted in the mounting locations of DCC x-0 and DCC x-2.
DCC x-1 and DCC x-3 are omitted and also the corresponding fuses.
The following steps have to be carried out for each shelf of the DLUD.
Information block: Thermal switch
In every DLUD rack, a thermal switch is built into the bottom panel of the rack.
The contact is fixed at the allowable room temperature. If this temperature is
exceeded, then, via this thermal switch all DCCs in the rack receive ground
potential via the individual control input.
In this way the DCCs are switched off.
Exception: The DCCs in basic shelf0 are not switched off. In this way messages
are still possible.
If the temperature goes down, the DCCs are switched back on.
PROC:DLUD 14
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Screw in fuses
...... (see 3.12.2)
Screw in the fuse for the first/next DCCxx which is to be switched on

Switch on the corresponding DCCxx
Y h ... 10
N h ... 8
Replace DCCxx
Switch off DCCxx
Replace DCCxx by spare module
Switch on DCCxx
Y h ... 10
N h ... 9
10
Decision: next DCCxx

Are all DCCs in the shelf switched on?
11
Y h ... 12
N h ... 7
Decision: RGB
Is at least one module M:RGB present in the rack?
13
Y h ... 11
N h ... 7
Decision: next shelf

Are all DCCs in each shelf of the rack switched on?
12
h ... 7
Y h ... 13
N h ... 18
Switch on RGB
Fuse allocation to DCCxx and RGB-modules (if present) in F:DLU(G)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUD 15
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
MUT
FUSE
DCCxx
RGB
02
01
0-0
02
0-2
07
2-0
09
2-2
18
0-0
19
0-2
24
2-0
26
2-2
03
05
06
Remark
Only in Version G,G,G,G
Only in Version G,E,G,G or

G,G,G,G
Switch on the first / next RGB (in F:DLU(G))
Y h ... 16
N h ... 14
14
Replace defective RGB

Switch off defective RGB
Replace defective RGB by spare module
(Replacing the RGB module under power is possible)
Switch on RGB
Y h ... 16
N h ... 15
15

h ... 13
16
Measure ringing voltage
The ringing voltage can be measured with a multimeter between the test jacks
on the front panel of the RGB module.
......MMN:DLUD
TAB:MOD
Measure the ringing voltage between the test jacks.

Is the ringing voltage correct?
17
Y h ... 17
N h ... 14
Decision: next RGB

Have all RGB modules in the rack already been switched on?
PROC:DLUD 16
Y h ... 18
N h ... 13
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
18
ITMN - OFFLINE
Decision: MGB
Y h ... 19
N h ... 23
Is at least one module M:MGB present in the rack?
19
Switch on MGB
The MGB modules in F:DLU(D) are (if present) redundantly supplied via the
fuses of DCCxx 1-0 and 1-1
Fuse allocation to DCCxx and MGB-modules (if present) in F:DLU(D)
MUT
FUSE
DCCxx
Remark
02
03
1-0
04
1-1
11
3-0
12
3-1
20
1-0
21
1-1
28
3-0
29
3-1
03
05
06

(Only possible in Version G,G,G,G)

(Only possible in Version G,E,G,G
or G,G,G,G)
Switch on MGB in the first / next F:DLU(G)

20
Y h ... 22
N h ... 20
Replace defective MGB

Switch off defective MGB
Replace defective MGB by spare module
(Replacing the MGB module under power is possible)
Switch on MGB
21
Y h ... 22
N h ... 21

22
h ... 19
Decision: next MGB

Have all MGB modules in the rack already been switched on?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 23
N h ... 19
PROC:DLUD 17
ITMN - OFFLINE
23
Commissioning
System
The connection of the DLUD to LTG is shown in:

(LTGs used are LTGB, LTGF, LTGG, LTGM)
......(see
Fig. 3.12.
6)
According to the LTG the DIU30D or DIU120A is used as LTU. The wiring
between DIU:DLU and the corresponding LTU is shown in the following figures:
24
Wiring to DIU120A
......(see
Fig. 3.12.
7)
Wiring to DIU30D
......(see
Fig. 3.12.
9)
Information about connection path from DLUD to LTE
Because the DLUD and the start of the PCM link may be located apart, special
precautions must be taken to ensure that the cabling between DLUS and LTE
(line terminating equipment / loading equipment) is correct. If it is, the corresponding PCM link simply needs to be connected to the LTE. If then no connection can be established between DLUD and LTGB, the PCM link is interrupted.
......(see
Fig. 3.12.
10)
The connection of DLUD to LTE is shown in
25
Establish connection DLUS to LTE
The connection first has to be established for DLUS0 and than for DLUS1
26

Link up the outgoing cable with CCS (PDC0) from the DLUS0 (DLUS1) to the
LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
Did the red LED for PDC0 alarm on DLUS0 (DLUS1) go out?
27
Y h ... 28
N h ... 27
Fault clearance
If no faults can be found here, replace the DLUS0 (DLUS1) module.
28

PROC:DLUD 18
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
29
ITMN - OFFLINE

Link up the outgoing cable without CCS (PDC1) from the DLUS0 (DLUS1) to the
LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
Did the red LED for PDC0 alarm on DLUS0 (DLUS1) go out?
30
Y h ... 31
N h ... 30
Fault clearance
If no faults can be found here, replace the DLUS0 (DLUS1) module.
31

32
Decision: next DLUD system
Note that DLUD system 1 is connected to another LTG as shown in

Has DLUD system1 already been checked?
33
...... 6)(see Fig. 3.12.

Y h ... 33
N h ... 26
Establish connection LTG to LTE
The connection first has to be established for LTGx (to DLUD system 0) and
than for LTGy (to DLUD system 1).
34
...... 11)
(see Fig. 3.12.
Create test loop for cable with CCS

which is to be connected to the LTE of DLUD system 0 (DLUD system 1), if not
already done.
35
Y h ... 36
N h ... 35
Fault clearance
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:DLUD 19
ITMN - OFFLINE
36
Commissioning
System

37
Create test loop for cable without CCS

LTE which is to be connected to the LTE of DLUD system 0 (DLUD system 1), if
not already done.
Red LED F2 goes out
38
Y h ... 39
N h ... 38
Fault clearance
39

40
Decision: test connection to DLUD system 1

Has the connection of LTGy to DLUD system 1 already been checked?
Y h ... END
N h ... 34
END
PROC:DLUD 20
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.13
Off-line Installation of CP113D

CP113D
3.13.1
Documents
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
AKUHW Lists (Equipment Lists)

Maintenance Manual MMN:CP113D
Maintenance Manual MMN:PC - BASIS, Ordering no.: A30808-X3069-Y260- * 7620
MMN:SW
NM:CP113D
NM:CP Devices
Manuals required:
MTD
MDD
PC
PROC:CP113D 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.13.2
Commissioning
System
Abbreviations
Abb.
3.13.3
B:CMY
bus to common memory
B:IOC
bus system for input/output control
BAP
base processor
CAP
call processor
CI
common interface
CMY
common memory
F:
frame
IOC
input/output control
IOP
input/output processor
LMY
local memory
MDD
magnetic disk device
MI
memory interface
MOLOC
mounting location
MTD
magnetic tape device
MUT
mounting unit
MYB
memory bank
MYC
memory control
PI
processor interface
PU
processor unit
R:
rack
Test Equipment and Resources
3.13.4
Meaning
APS (contained on both disks)

Multimeter (DMM)
Scratch tapes with write ring
General Information about Testing CP113D

The coordination processor CP113D undergoes a system test before leaving the manufacturing plant. The individual racks are tested to check that the voltage converters, the
logic components and the internal cabling function correctly.
a) The cables of the CP rack row are supplied as a supplementary package to the coordination processor and are given a system test in the rack (except when cables are
supplied later).
PROC:CP113D 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
b) Once accepted by the test department, all modules are protected from unauthorized
access (by means of a loop secured round each individual module frame).
c) The magnetic tape device, the disk drives and the personal computers are systemtested and separately packed for delivery. The disk storage units had the test-APS
copied onto them in the test department.
d) The coordination processor is checked in the system test department with a test
APS. This APS is located on both magnetic disks.
e) The CP113D installation test can begin once installation is completed. The APS on
the disks is used for system testing.
f)
The CP113D is tested in the following steps:

Off-line test:
Visual check of devices and cabling
Preset all devices (if not already done at the factory)
Start up the PC on-line following manufacturer's instructions (if not already done
at the factory)
Start the fans
Switch on power to all equipment
Off-line diagnostics of CMY, IOC, IOP, (BAP/CAP only if faulty)
On-line test:
Start up hardware
Load application program system (test APS) and start operating system (APS
present on both system disks)
Configure the necessary operating states in the CP area
Check the logic components and devices:
common memory (CMY),
base processor (BAP),
input/output control (IOC)
input/output processor (IOP)
bus to common memory (B:CMY)
magnetic tape device (MTD) and
magnetic disk device (MDD)
using the appropriate test and diagnostic software
Introduce hardware modifications if necessary
Incorporate the current operating APS and repeat the on-line tests
g) Error messages output by the test programs are handled on the basis of the MMN.
h) Implementation of modifications according to instructions (notices are sent by the
modification service). The modification guidelines must be observed. If the installation tester does not carry out the modifications himself, he should at least know
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
which ones are made.Any faults that occur when the modifications have been incorporated must be eliminated with the operating APS and the MMN.
i)
After each hardware modification to a device, the modification service must be

informed of the new device issue.
j)
A fault report must be written on each hardware fault (for repairs and statistics).
k) Always disconnect power before unplugging modules and plugging them in again.
l)
PROC:CP113D 4
If modules with DIP switches are replaced by spares, find the correct new settings
in the MMN:CP113D - TAB.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.13.5
Overview of the Hardware belonging to the CP Complex
MAXIMUM Configuration
MINIMUM Configuration
IOP
IOP
IOP
IOP
IOC-1
IOC-3
CAP-5
CAP-0
BAP-0
BAP-1
LMY
LMY
LMY
LMY
LMY
LMY
PU PU
0
1
PU PU
0
1
PU PU
0
1
PU PU
0
1
PU PU
0
1
PU PU
0
1
CI
CI
CI
CI
CI
CI
PI
PI
PI
MI
PI
B:IOC
PI
PI
PI
MI
B:CMY-1
IOC-2
MI
PI
PI
MI
CMY-0
CMY-1
MYC
MYB
0
B:IOC
PI
PI
B:CMY-0
PI
IOC-0
MYB
1
MYB
2
MYC
MYB
3
MYB
0
MYB
1
MYB
2
MYB
3
Fig. 3.13.1 Overview: Hardware belonging to the CP-Complex
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.13.6
Overview of Interfaces B:CMY
BAP-0
IOC-0
BAP-1
IOC-1
IOC-2
IOC-3
CAP-0
CPCIA
CPCIB
CPCIA
CPCIB
CPCIA
CPCIB
CPCIA
CPCIB
CPCIA
CPCIB
CPCIA
CPCIB
CPCIA
CPCIB
.....
CAP-5
CPCIA
CPCIB
Only for CP113D with R:CP113B.

Connection with PIDAT and PIADR as for other Processors.
Interface modules to B:CMY

Interface modules to the processors
PIDAT
PIADR
PIDAT
PIADR
PIDAT
PIADR
PIDAT
PIADR
PIDAT
PIADR
PIDAT
PIADR
B:CMY-0
B:CMY
PIDAT
PIADR
PIDAT
PIADR
B:CMY-1
Interface modules to the CMY
MIAD
MIAD
MIAD
MIAD
CMYA
CMYD
CMYA
CMYD
CMYA
CMYD
CMYA
CMYD
CMY
CMY-0
CMY-1
Control C
(MYC)
Control D
Control C
(MYC)
Control D
Fig. 3.13.2 Overview of Interfaces B:CMY
PROC:CP113D 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.13.7
ITMN - OFFLINE
Module Connectors and Numbering
C
D
Backplane labelling
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
1
2
3
Rear view and numbering of a module connector in CP113D
4
5
6
7
8
129
240
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
248
Fig. 3.13.3 Module Connectors and numbering
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.13.8
Commissioning
System
Coding Switch on Module MUH:1088
MUH:1088
ON
Coding switch
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3.13.4 Coding switch on module MUH:1088
Variant
S30810-Q1088-
Capacity stage in
MBYTE
Switch Settings
S1
S2
S3
S4
X200
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
X400
16
ON
ON
OFF
ON
X500
16
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
X600
32
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
X800
64
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Coding switch settings
Tab. 3.13.1 Coding switch settings
PROC:CP113D 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.13.9
3.13.9.1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Rack Overview
Rack for CP113A - Variant A
FU
01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19
FU
02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
Fuse panel, AD:RAL
MUT01
F:CMY 0
CMY 0
MUT03
F:CMY 1
CMY 1
MUT04
Fans
F:MI 0
F:P/IOC 0
F:P/IOC 1
MUT06
BCMY 1
BAP 0
MUT07
IOC 0
BAP 1
Frame
Unit
19
---
AD:RAL,
HW-Tracer
20
---
AD:RAL,
HW-Tracer
02
F:CMY 0
CMY 0
12
F:CMY 1
CMY 1
07
--
Fans
(AIC 1)
04
F:MI 0
BCMY 0
14
F:MI 1
BCMY 1
05
F:P/IOC 0
BAP 0
06
F:P/IOC 0
IOC 0
15
F:P/IOC 1
BAP 1
16
F:P/IOC 1
IOC 1
17
--
Fanbox
(AIC 0)
MUT05
BCMY 0
F:MI 1
FU
IOC 1
Fanbox
MUT09
MUT10
MUT12
Fig. 3.13.5 Rack R:CP113A - Variant A
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.13.9.2
Commissioning
System
Rack for CP113B - Variant A

FU
01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19
FU
02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
MUT01
F:P/IOC 2
CAP 0
IOC 2
MUT03
F:P/IOC 3
CAP 1
IOC 3
MUT04
F:PI 0
F:PI 1
F:P/IOC 4
F:P/IOC 5
Fans
MUT05
BCMY 0
MUT06
BCMY 1
CAP 2
MUT07
CAP 3
CAP 4
CAP 5
Fanbox
MUT09
MUT10
FU
Frame
Unit
01
F:P/IOC 2
CAP 0
02
F:P/IOC 2
IOC 2
11
F:P/IOC 3
CAP 1
12
F:P/IOC 3
IOC 3
07
---
Fans (AIC 17)
03
F:PI 0
BCMY 0
13
F:PI 1
BCMY 1
05
F:P/IOC 4
CAP 2
06
F:P/IOC 4
CAP 3
15
F:P/IOC 5
CAP 4
16
F:P/IOC 5
CAP 5
17
--
Fanbox
(AIC 16)
MUT12
Fig. 3.13.6 Rack R:CP113B - Variant A
PROC:CP113D 10
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.13.9.3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Rack for DEVD - Variant A

FU
01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19
FU
02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
Fuse panel, AD:RAL
MUT01
F:IOP 0
IOPG 0
MUT03
F:IOP 1
IOPG 1
MUT04
Fans
MUT05
MTD 0
MUT06
Luftableitblech
F:DEV(E)
or
F:DEV(F)
M
O
D
0
M
D
D
0
M
O
D
1
Fanbox
M
D
D
1
MUT08
FU
Frame
Unit
01
F:IOP 0
IOPG 0
02
F:IOP 0
IOPG 0
05
F:IOP 0
M:LAUB
06
F:IOP 0
M:LAUB
11
F:IOP 1
IOPG 1
12
F:IOP 1
IOPG 1
15
F:IOP 1
M:LAUB
16
F:IOP 1
M:LAUB
14
---
Fans
(AIC 9)
03
---
MTD 0
07
F:DEV(E) or
F:DEV(F)
MDD 0,
MOD 0
17
F:DEV(E) or
F:DEV(F)
MDD 1,
MOD 1
08
--
Fanbox
(AIC 8)
MUT12
Fig. 3.13.7 Rack R:DEVD - Variant A
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.13.10
3.13.10.1
Commissioning
System
Fuse Assignment
Fuse Assignment of R:CP113A (Variant A)
MUT
01
Frame
AD:RAL
FU
Unit
19
External devices,
e.g. tracer
20
External devices
MOLOC
Module
03
F:CMY 0
02
CMY 0
C101,
C327
DCCx,
DCCx
04
F:CMY 1
12
CMY 1
C101,
C327
DCCx,
DCCx
05
FAN
07
Fans
06
F:MI 0
04
BCMY 0
C101,
C327
DCCx,
DCCx
07
F:MI 1
14
BCMY1
C101,
C327
DCCx,
DCCx
09
F:P/IOC 0
05
BAP 0
C101
DCCx
06
IOC 0
C327
DCCx
15
BAP 1
C101
DCCx
16
IOC 1
C327
DCCx
10
12
F:P/IOC 1
FANBOX
17
Tab. 3.13.2 Fuse Assignment of R:CP113A (Variant A)
3.13.10.2
Fuse Assignment of R:CP113B (Variant A)

MUT
Frame
01
AD:RAL
03
F:P/IOC 2
04
F:P/IOC 3
FU
Unit
MOLOC
Module
01
CAP 0
C101
DCCx
02
IOC 2
C327
DCCx
11
CAP 1
C101
DCCx
12
IOC 3
C327
DCCx
05
FAN
07
Fans
06
F:PI 0
03
BCMY 0
C101,
C327
DCCx,
DCCx
07
F:PI 1
13
BCMY 1
C101,
C327
DCCx,
DCCx
09
F:P/IOC 4
05
CAP 2
C101
DCCx
06
CAP 3
C327
DCCx
15
CAP 4
C101
DCCx
16
CAP 5
C327
DCCx
17
Fans
10
12
F:P/IOC 5
FANBOX
Tab. 3.13.3 Fuse Assignment of R:CP113B (Variant A)
PROC:CP113D 12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.13.10.3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fuse Assignment of R:DEVD (Variant A)

MUT
Frame
FU
Unit
MOLOC
Module
01
AD:RAL
--
--
03
F:IOP 0
01
IOPG 0
C101,C331
DCCMS
02
IOPG 0
C313
DCCMR
05
M:LAUB
LAUB:B
LAUB:E
06
M:LAUB
LAUB:D
LAUB:S
11
IOPG 1
C101,C331
DCCMS
12
IOPG 1
C313
DCCMR
15
M:LAUB
LAUB:B
LAUB:E
16
M:LAUB
LAUB:D
LAUB:S
04
F:IOP 1
05
FAN
14
Fans
06
MTD
03
MTD 0
08
F:DEF(F)
07
MDD 0
A056
DCCDA
MOD 0
A049
DCCDA
MDD 1
A121
DCCDA
MOD 1
A115
DCCDA
07
MDD 0
A001
DCCDA
17
MDD 1
A115
DCCDA
08
Fan
17
08
F:DEV(E)
12
FANBOX
Remark
F:DEV(E) or
F:DEV(F) can be
used alternatively
Tab. 3.13.4 Fuse Assignment of R:DEVD (Variant A)
3.13.10.4
Fuse Assignment to Fans

Rack
R:CP113A
R:DEVD
R:CP113B
(Extension Rack)
Fuse
Fans in MUT
Remark
FU 07
05
--
FU 17
12
FANBOX
FU19
--
External devices, e.g. tracer
FU 20
--
External devices
FU 14
05
--
FU 08
12
FANBOX
FU 07
05
--
FU 17
12
FANBOX
Tab. 3.13.5 Fuse Assignment to Fans
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 13
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.13.11
Commissioning
System
Overview OEM-Devices / IOPs / frames
OEM-Device
IOP-type required
Frame required
MTD:STC 2922
IOP:MTD
MTD:STC 2925
IOP:UNI
MTD:HP 88781
IOP:UNI
MDD M2263SA
(780 MByte)
IOP:MDD
F:DEV(E)
MDD HP C2490A
(2,1 GByte)
IOP:MDD
or
IOP:UNI
F:DEV(E)
or
F:DEV(F)
MDD XP34550S
(4,5 GByte)
IOP:UNI
F:DEV(F)
or
F:DEV(E)
MOD Sony SMO-F531

(1,3 GB)
IOP:UNI
F:DEV(F)
MOD Sony SMO-F541

(2,6 GB)
IOP:UNI
F:DEV(F)
Tab. 3.13.6 Overview: OEM-Devices / IOPs / frames
3.13.12
Sequence for Switching on the Frames
Rack
R:CP113A
Frame
FU
Unit
F:MI 0
06
04
BCMY 0
F:MI 1
07
14
BCMY 1
F:CMY 0
03
02
CMY 0
F:CMY 1
04
12
CMY 1
F:P/IOC 0
09
05
BAP 0
06
IOC 0
15
BAP 1
16
IOC 1
01
IOPG 0
02
IOPG 0
05
M:LAUB
06
M:LAUB
11
IOPG 1
12
IOPG 1
15
M:LAUB
16
M:LAUB
F:P/IOC 1
R:DEVD
MUT
F:IOP 0
F:IOP 1
10
03
04
Remark
Tab. 3.13.7 Sequence for Switching on the Frames
PROC:CP113D 14
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Rack
R:CP113B
Frame
MUT
FU
Unit
F:PI 0
06
03
BCMY 0
F:PI 1
07
13
BCMY1
F:P/IOC 2
03
01
CAP 0
02
IOC 2
11
CAP 1
12
IOC 3
05
CAP 2
06
CAP 3
15
CAP 4
16
CAP 5
F:P/IOC 3
04
F:P/IOC 4
09
F:P/IOC 5
10
Remark
Extension rack
Tab. 3.13.7 Sequence for Switching on the Frames
3.13.13
3.13.13.1
Displays on Module Faceplates

Displays after successful Hardware Start-up
Unit
Module
Display
LED
Remarks
4321
B:CMY-0
B:CMY-1
BCTI
none
PIDAT
PIDAT
see procedure
*(05A131) / (05A145) in BAP-SPR the inhibit-bit remains set
until startup is concluded
PIDAT
none
(05A163) for IOC-0
PIDAT
none
(05A175) for IOC-1
BCTI
none
PIDAT
PIDAT
*(06A131) / (06A145) in BAP-SPR the inhibit bit remains set

until startup is concluded
PIDAT
none
(06A163) for IOC-0
PIDAT
none
(06A175) for IOC-1

The displays on both CMY2Cs in a CMY must be identical,
otherwise error. Switching power off then at the CMY
concerned may remedy the situation
CMY-0
CMY 2C
any
none
CMY-1
CMY 2C
any
none
BAP-0
CPCL
xxxx
Sequence on the 7-segment displays is shown in the procedure
*A925
After manual start-up with BAP-0
Tab. 3.13.8 Displays after successful Hardware Startup
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 15
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Unit
Module
Display
LED
Remarks
4321
BAP-1
CPCL
xxxx
Sequence on the 7-segment displays is shown in the procedure
*A925
After manual start-up with BAP-1
IOC-0
CPCL
A385
A1A5 is also possible
IOC-1
CPCL
A385
A1A5 is also possible
IOP
IOP:TA
******CF
none
*Time display (not time-of-day) for several minutes
IOP:MB
IBREQ
IOP:SCD
V
IF:MDD
IK:DTD
none
*
*H1 or H2 or none
none
Check the Basic State (Preparation) of R:CP113 and R:DEVD
Check the basic state of R:CP113A, R:DEVD and if present R:CP113B (extension rack).
Tolerance range: -48V (-45.6 V... -57V)
Y h ... 3
N h ... 2

h ... 1
Switch off DCCs

Switch off all DCCs
Check: System test log (if included)
PROC:CP113D 16
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Check Mechanical Layout

Check racks and module frames (R:CP113A, R:DEVD and R:CP113B if
present) to see if any parts are touching, or if there is any foreign material or
transport damage.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place
If any transport damage or damaged seals have been detected, the rack layout
(R:CP113A and R:DEVD or R:CP113B) has to be checked against the equipment list.
Check the layout of the module frames and the standard cabling plan
Break module seal
Check connections between wire wrap field and chassis ground bus.
Check cabling against cable laying list A30808-A....-X...- * -33
Check Memory Settings
Check that the memory settings on all MUH:1088 modules are correct.
Unplug module MUH:1088 from all mounting locations.
The module contains a coding switch for adapting memory addressing to the
possible equipment variants.
Check switch settings of the coding switch on the MUH:1088 modules and
correct if necessary
Coding switch and the correct switch settings are given in
...... (see 3.13.8)
Check the Jumpering in F:MI0

Check the following wire wrap connections:
From MOLOC 277 PIN E 212 to MOLOC 277 PIN C 212
From MOLOC 285 PIN E 212 to MOLOC 285 PIN C 212
Test Fans
Screw in the fuses for the fans consecutively and turn fan switches on
The assignment of fuses to the fans is given in

Are all fans working?
...... 3.13.5)
(see Tab.
Y h ... 9
N h ... 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 7
PROC:CP113D 17
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Switching on the MTD

Branch to one of the following procedures for switching on the MTD according to
the MTD used:
Switching on the MTD: STC 2922 of Storage Tek
(Connected to IOP:MTD)
i....PROC:
MTD_STC2922
Switching on the MTD: STC 2925 of Storage Tek

(Connected to IOP:UNI / SCSI-Interface)
i....PROC:
MTD:STC2925
Switching on the MTD: HP 88781 A of Hewlett Packard

(Connected to IOP:UNI / SCSI Interface)
i....PROC:
MTD:HP
88781A
h ... 10
After the MTD is successfully put into service, continue:
10
Check Cabling of Disk Storage Unit (MDD)
The following different types of MDD can be used for the CP113D:
Quantum Atlas Disk storage Unit XP34550S (4,5GByte)
HP Disk storage Unit HP C2490A (2,1Gbyte)
Fujitsu Disk storage Unit M2263SA (780 Mbyte)
Check that interface cables to the IOP:MDD / IOP:UNI are connected according
to the following instructions:
If Quantum Atlas disk storage unit XP34550S (4,5Gbyte) is used
(Connected to IOP:UNI / SCSI-Interface)
i....NM:CP Devices, MDD

XP34550S
(4,5 Gbyte)
If HP disk storage unit MDD HP C2490A (2,1Gbyte) is used

(Connected to IOP:MDD or IOP:UNI)
i....NM:CP Devices, MDD

HP C2490A
(2,1 Gbyte)
If Fujitsu disk storage unit MDD M2263SA (780 Mbyte) is used

(Connected to IOP:MDD)
i....NM:CP Devices,
MDD M2263SA
(780 Mbyte)
No transport safety catches (bolts etc.) have to be removed in this disk generation.
Have one or both disk memories (MDD) been replaced or supplied after the
original installation?
PROC:CP113D 18
Y h ... 11
N h ... 12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
11
ITMN - OFFLINE
Check Switch Settings of Disk Storage Unit (MDD)

Check that switch settings are set according to the following instructions:
If Quantum Atlas disk storage unit XP34550S (4,5Gbyte) is used
If HP disk storage unit MDD HP C2490A (2,1Gbyte) is used
If Fujitsu disk storage unit MDD M2263SA (780 Mbyte) is used
12
i ... NM:CP Devices, MDD

XP34550S
(4,5 Gbyte)
i ... NM:CP Devices, MDD
HP C2490A
(2,1 Gbyte)
i ... NM:CP Devices,
MDD M2263SA
(780 Mbyte)
Check Cabling of MODs (Only in F:DEV(F))
Check the following cable connections of the MODs:
13
Correct attachment of the power supply plug to the MOD
Correct attachment of the power supply plug to the MOD-fan
Correct attachment of the SCSI bus cabling
For MOD Sony SMO-F531 (1,3 GB): check these cable connections according
to the instructions in
...... Devices,
NM:CP -
For MOD Sony SMO-F541 (2,6 GB): check these cable connections according
to the instructions in
...... Devices,
NM:CP -
MOD Sony
SMO-F531
MOD Sony
SMO-F541
Check Settings of the MODs (Only in F:DEV(F))
Check the following settings of the operation mode plug of the MODs:
14
Check the setting to the correct SCSI address (SCSI-ID 2)
Check the correct jumper setting in the operation mode plug for deactivating
the internal terminating resistor (Depending on the SCSI devices connected)
For MOD Sony SMO-F531 (1,3 GB): check these settings according to the
instructions in
...... Devices,
NM:CP -
For MOD Sony SMO-F541 (2,6 GB): check these settings according to the
instructions in
...... Devices,
NM:CP -
Screw in Fuse
Screw in fuse for MDD-0 (and MOD-0 in F:DEV(F))
(One fuse supplies the DCCs of both devices)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
MOD Sony
SMO-F531
MOD Sony
SMO-F541
...... 3.13.4)
(see Tab.
PROC:CP113D 19
ITMN - OFFLINE
15
Commissioning
System
Switch on MDD-0
......(see
Tab.
3.13.4)
Switch on DCC for MDD-0

LED of the DCC lights up
LED of the MDD lights up for approx. 30 s
16
Switch on MOD-0 (Only in F:DEV(F))
......(see
Tab.
3.13.4)
Switch on DCC for MOD-0

MOD fan starts up
MOD-LED lights up shortly
17
Screw in Fuse
......(see
Tab.
3.13.4)
Screw in fuse for MDD-1 (and MOD-1 in F:DEV(F))

18
Switch on MDD-1
......(see
Tab.
3.13.4)

LED of the MDD lights up for approx. 30 s
19
Switch on MOD-1 (Only in F:DEV(F))
......(see
Tab.
3.13.4)

MOD fan starts up
20
Installation of PC
Information about the inverter:

The 220V outputs of the inverter (220V, 1KVA and 2,5KVA) are floating. If test
devices are supplied by the inverter, electrostatical charging or grounding loops
may lead to faulty test results or defects.
Remedy: Grounding one line of the 220V output, before switching on the
inverter (If not already done by the manufacturer).
Switch on the inverter for the PC.
Installation of the PC according to
After the PC has been installed and a CP session opened
PROC:CP113D 20
......MMN:PC
BASIS
h ... 21
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
21
ITMN - OFFLINE
Prepare Switching on DCCs

Put all inhibit bit switches in module faceplates (on PIDAT, BCTI) in ON position
(up). Put the TEST switches on the faceplates of the CPCL modules (in BAP0/1
and IOC0/1) up to the ON position.
Make sure that all DCCs of the CP113D are switched off
22
Switch on DCCs
A distinction is drawn between the capacity stages of the CP113Ds. Because of

clock synchronization the module frames are tested in the following sequence :
...... 3.13.7)
(see Tab.
Screw in fuse for the first (next) module frame (see preceding table).
Switch on power with the switch on the assigned DCC module faceplates.
Caution: If there are several DCCs in one MI, CMY or IOP module frame, the
switches of all these DCCs must be switched on.
Are the green LEDs on the DCC modules lit?
23
Decision: Next Modules

Are all units listed in the table in operation?
24
Y h ... 23
N h ... 24
Y h ... 32
N h ... 22
Fault Clearance
Switch off the voltage converter(s) immediately and unscrew the assigned fuse
25
Check the Fuse for DCC

Is the corresponding fuse in the fuse panel defective?
26
Replace Fuse
Replace the fuse in the fuse panel
27
h ... 22
Decision Block: DCC

Has the current converter already been replaced?
28
Y h ... 26
N h ... 27
Y h ... 29
N h ... 28
Replace DCC
Replace the DCC with spare DCC
Mark the replaced DCC as defective
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 22
PROC:CP113D 21
ITMN - OFFLINE
29
Commissioning
System
Decision Block: Cable
Y i....NM:
Is a cable the next unit to be cleared of faults?
CP113D, TAB,
CP0050
N h ... 31
30
Decision Block
Y h ... 22
N h ... 31
Could the fault be cleared?
31

The fault could not be cleared by standard fault clearance measures. A system
specialist must carry out fault clearance.
h ... 22
After successful fault clearance
32
Diagnosis 0 CMY
The off-line diagnostics must be carried out on both CMYs one after the other.
Set the inhibit bit switches for the CMY to be tested on the BCTI modules of
both B:CMYs to the ON position
Press the DIAG key on the CMY to be tested
Diagnostic 0 is started and indicated by LED DIAG0. On completion, if no errors
have been found, 5AAA is displayed.
Is 5AAA displayed?
33
Y h ... 34
N h ... 33
Fault Clearance
Fault clearance according to
i....NM:CP113D,
TAB, CP053
PROC:CP113D 22
h ... 32
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
34
ITMN - OFFLINE
Diagnosis 2 CMY
Press RESET key on the CMY to be tested
The display shows E-01 (- = dark) and the DIAG0 LED goes out.
Press DIAG key on the CMY to be tested
Diagnostic 2 is started and indicated by the LED DIAG2. On completion, if no
errors have been found, 5AAA is displayed.
Diagnostic 2 can be restarted by pressing the DIAG key again. Diagnostic 3 can
only be started if diagnostic 2 ends with an error. Press the RES key again
(display then shows E-02) to start diagnostic 0 again.
Is 5AAA displayed?
35
Y h ... 35
N h ... 36
Decision: Next CMY

Switch the inhibit-bit switches for the tested CMY in the BCTI modules of both
B:CMYs to OFF
Have off-line diagnostics been performed on both CMYs?
36
Y h ... 37
N h ... 32
Diagnosis 3 CMY
Press RESET key on the CMY to be tested
The display goes dark and the DIAG2 LED goes out.
Press DIAG key on the CMY to be tested
Diagnostic 3 is started and indicated by the LEDs DIAG0 and DIAG2.
Diagnostic 3 can be restarted by pressing the DIAG key again.

Analyze track numbers and carry out fault clearance according to
i ... NM:CP113D,
TAB, CP053
37
h ... 35
Off-line Diagnostics IOC
Perform off-line diagnostics in both IOCs, and for further IOCs in the extension
frame R:CP113B, if present.
The TEST switch (down = OFF) on the CPCL module is used to switch off the
supervisory circuit (comparator).
The TEST switch should only be put in the OFF position during fault clearance
for test purposes.
The BOOT or RES key triggers a RESET in the IOC.
Diagnostics are started by pressing the RES and BOOT keys simultaneously.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 23
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
The display is changed with the DIAG switch.
Switch ON (up): The part of the diagnostic register belonging to the leading
processor half within the IOC is displayed.
Switch OFF (down): The part of the diagnostic register belonging to the
secondary processor half within the IOC is displayed.
The contents of the diagnostic registers are the same if PU-0 and PU-1 in an
IOC come to the same result during an audit.
Press RES key
Press RES and BOOT keys simultaneously
Off-line diagnostics are started. If executed without error, x55x appears in the
display. (x has no significance for the analysis).
Y h ... 39
N h ... 38
Is x55x displayed?
38
Fault Clearance
Analyze the track numbers
i....NM:CP113D,
Carry out fault clearance according to
TAB, CP052
h ... 39
After finishing fault clearance
39
Decision: Next IOC
Y h ... 40
N h ... 37
Have off-line diagnostics already been performed on all IOCs?
40
Off-line Diagnostics IOP
These off-line diagnostics must be run on all IK:DTD and IOP:SCDV modules.
When the off-line diagnostics are started on module IK:DTD, the MDD must be
switched on for the IOP:MDD and the MTD for the IOP:MTD. A tape must also
be mounted in the MTD, and the device must be switched on-line.
The PC must be ready for operation (a printer may not be
necessary)
Start the off-line diagnostics with the DIAG key on the faceplate of modules
IK:DTD and IOP:SCDV.
Track numbers of the RESET test are indicated by way of LEDs.
The LEDs go dark for 1 second on completion of the RESET test.
The IOP type is displayed for 1.5 secs.:
PROC:CP113D 24
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
LED display
IOP type
D3
D2
D1
D0
IOP:MTD
IOP:MDD
IOP:SCDX
The track numbers of the test/diagnostic programs are then displayed.

Following error-free execution, the LEDs on the IOP:MDD, IOP:MTD and the
IOP:SCDX go dark again.
The LEDs of the IOP:SCDV, however, light up.
Performing SCDV diagnostics is only possible if the firmware of module

IOP:SCDV is not issue G5.
Start off-line diagnostics by pressing the DIAG key on the faceplate of module
IOP:SCDV.
Track numbers of the RESET test are indicated by way of LEDs.
The LEDs go dark for 1 second on completion of the RESET test.
The IOP type is displayed for 1.5 secs.:
LED display
IOP type
D3
D2
D1
D0
IOP:SCDV
LED display goes dark for 1 second

The track numbers of the test/diagnostic programs are then displayed.
Following error-free execution, the LEDs on the IOP:SCDV, light up.
The printer and the screen of the PC output the following:
CP113 off-line diagnostics
Please enter the following characters:
ASDFGHJKL
Enter the string 'ASDFGHJKL' on the PC and confirm with <ENTER>
CP113 off-line diagnostics passed
LEDs on the SCDV module go out
Off-line diagnostics terminated without error?
41
Y h ... 42
N h ... 41
Fault Clearance
Analyze the LED display
i ... NM:CP113D,
h ... 42
TAB, CP054
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 25
ITMN - OFFLINE
42
Commissioning
System
Off-line Diagnostics IOP:TA

Press DISPLAY key in module faceplate of IOP:TA.
The following can be checked by pressing the DISPLAY key in the faceplate of
module IOP:TA:
Press key down = (off-line) the displays are checked.
Key up
= (on-line) the time is displayed.
Press the DIAG key in the faceplate of module IOP:TA.

Diagnostics are started. On completion without error, the display goes dark
again for a short time.
Off-line diagnostics terminated without error?
43
Y h ... 44
N h ... 43
Fault Clearance
Analyze the LED display
i....NM:CP113D,
h ... 44
TAB, CP054
44
Decision: IOPAUC
The IOPAUC is only used in CP113 of AC (authentication center)

Is there at least one IOPAUC in use
45
Y h ... 45
N h ... 47
Off-line diagnostics of IOPAUC

Press the RESET key on the front panel of the IOPAUC module
The progress of the test is indicated via the LEDs of the IOPAUC
For evaluating the LED displays of the IOPAUC see
i....NM:
CP113D, TAB,
CP0054
Has the diagnostics ended without faults?
46
Y h ... 47
N h ... 46
Fault clearance
i....NM:
CP113D, TAB,
CP0054
47
h ... 47
Prepare BAP Hardware Start-up

Flick all inhibit-bit switches to OFF
Switch off the DCCs connected to BAP-0 and BAP-1, if not already done
PROC:CP113D 26
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
48
ITMN - OFFLINE
Information about BAP Hardware Start-up
When the DCCs have been switched on, the initialization and test programs in
the individual processors are run (hardware start-up). Track numbers are
displayed which give information on the type of error if one occurs.
The BAP to which power is first applied becomes the MASTER, as long as this
BAP is error-free.
For start-up with the APS, it is necessary for the following units to be connected
to a B:CMY (displayed by reset inhibit bits (SPB LED = off)):
one BAP (SPB LED on module PIDAT A131 or A145)
one IOC (SPB LED on module PIDAT A163 or A175)
one CMY (SPB LED on module BCTI)
Ensure that the following IOPs can be reached via the IOC connected to the
B:CMY, and that they have the status shown in the table:
one IOP:MDD
one IOP:SCDV (for connection of the PC)
The BAP that becomes MASTER formats both CMYs first. Display on master:
A885' for approx. 5sec.
It then initializes BCMY0/1, and IOC0/1
Display: 'A8A5',...,'A8C5',...,'AB05'
When 'AB05' is displayed, the test APS is already being loaded from one of the
disks (MDD0 or MDD1). This can be seen by the rhythmic flashing of one of the
LEDs. (module IF:MDD H1-reading from MDD).
Displays on the other module faceplates after initialization, if no errors are found
in the processors during hardware start-up are given in:
49
...... 3.13.8)
(see Tab.
Switch on BAP0 and BAP1

Screw in the fuses for the DCCs of BAP-0 and BAP-1
Switch on DCCs in BAP0 and BAP1
Are the green LEDs on both DCC modules lit?
50
Y h ... 58
N h ... 50
Fault Clearance
Switch off the DCC on which the LED is not lit immediately and unscrew the
relevant fuse. After a successful test start-up, remove the fault from the defective unit with the test APS (provided a BAP can load the APS).
If only one BAP is defective, continue
If both BAPs are defective, the errors must be removed immediately
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 58
h ... 51
PROC:CP113D 27
ITMN - OFFLINE
51
Commissioning
System
Y h ... 52
N h ... 53
52
Replace Fuse
h ... 49
53
Decision Block: DCC
Y h ... 55
N h ... 54
54
Replace DCC
h ... 49
55
Y i....NM:
CP113D, TAB,
CP0050
N h ... 57
56
Decision Block
Y h ... 49
N h ... 57
57

h ... 49
58
Decision: Start-up with Test APS Possible
Y h ... 87
N h ... 59
Has the system been configured to allow start-up with the test APS?
59
Decision: BAP-0/-1 already Reset

Has the firmware been reinitiated in processor BAP-0/1 by means of the BOOT
key on the faceplate of module CPCL?
60
Y h ... 60
N h ... 61
Analyze Inhibit-bit LEDs

Analyze the inhibit-bit LEDs and eliminate errors using
i....MMN:CP113D
- FC
When errors have been successfully eliminated
PROC:CP113D 28
h ... 47
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
61
Decision: SPB0 and SPB1 Lit

Are the red SPB, SPB0 and SPB1 LEDs lit on the faceplates of modules BCTI
and PIDAT (F:MI 0, F:MI 1)?
62
ITMN - OFFLINE
Y h ... 63
N h ... 62
Check DCCs
Check that all DCCs have power ON
63
Decision: Inhibit-bit Switches

Is the corresponding inhibit-bit switch SPB still ON?
64
Inhibit-bit Switch
Flick corresponding inhibit-bit switch (SPB, SPB0 or SPB1) to OFF
65
Y h ... 64
N h ... 65
h ... 47
Decision: Other BAP MASTER
The inhibit-bit has been set by the firmware
66
If no start-up with the other BAP as MASTER has been attempted the startup has to be repeated with switching on the DCCs of BAP-0 and BAP-1 in a
different order
h ... 47
If a start-up with the other BAP as MASTER has already run through a
manual start-up must be attempted
h ... 66
Manual Start-up Part 1
BAP-0 becomes master if the inhibit-bit switch in BCMY-0 and BCMY-1 on

module PIDAT (mounting location 145) is put ON (up).
BAP-1 becomes master if the inhibit-bit switch in BCMY-0 and BCMY-1 on
module PIDAT (mounting location 131) is put ON (up).
BAP-0 becomes master with the procedure described below. If you want BAP-1
to be master, set the inhibit-bit switch accordingly and press the BOOT key on
module CPCL in BAP-1.
Flick the inhibit-bit switch to ON (up) in BCMY-0 and BCMY-1 on module PIDAT
(mounting location 145).
Related LEDs on the modules light up
Press BOOT key on faceplate of module CPCL in BAP-0.
When the DCCs have been switched on, the initialization and test programs
(hardware start-up) run in the individual processors. Track numbers are
displayed which give information on the type of fault if a fault occurs. The BAP-0
becomes MASTER.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 29
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
For start-up with the APS, it is necessary for the following units to be connected
to a B:CMY (displayed by reset inhibit bits (SPB LED = off)):
one BAP (SPB LED on module PIDAT A131 or A145)
one IOC (SPB LED on module PIDAT A163 or A175)
one CMY (SPB LED on module BCTI)
Ensure that the following IOPs can be reached via the IOC connected to the
B:CMY, and that they have the status shown in the table:
one IOP:MDD
one IOP:SCDV (for connection of the PC)
Displays on the module faceplates when the BOOT key has been pressed, if no
errors have been found in the processors during hardware start-up:
Has the system been configured so that start-up with the test APS is possible?
67
68
......(see
Tab.
3.13.8)
Y h ... 68
N h ... 67
Decision: Manual Start-up with second BAP

Repeat manual start-up with second BAP, if not already done
h ... 66
If the manual start-up has already been attempted with the second BAP, offline diagnostics must be executed
h ... 82

IPL113: MANUAL START - CURRENT CONFIGURATION
UNIT
STATUS
TEST
********************************************
BAP-0
ost
Test result
BAP-1
ost
Test result
B:CMY-0
ost
Test result
B:CMY-1
ost
Test result
CMY-0
ost
Test result
CMY-1
ost
Test result
IOC-0
ost
Test result
IOC-1
ost
Test result
IPL113: ENTER PARAMS
TO DIAGNOSE MEMORY
TO FORMAT
MEMORY
TO CONTINUE
: DIAG;
: FORMAT;
: ;ETX
Is the preceding message output?
PROC:CP113D 30
Y h ... 73
N h ... 69
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
69
Decision: Check IOP:SCDV/Cabling to PC

Have the switch settings on module IOP:SDCV and the cable connection to the
PC already been checked?
70
71
ITMN - OFFLINE
Y h ... 70
N h ... 71

h ... 66
h ... 82
Check Cabling to PC
Check and if necessary replace connecting cable to the PC or change plug position
72
Check Switches on IOP:SCDV
Check and if necessary adjust the switches on module IOP:SCDV. The

mounting location for this IOP can be found in the exchange configuration documents. The location and setting of the switches can be found in:
...... -MMN:CP113D
TAB
Switch off power at the switch on the DCC faceplate in the IOP module frame.
To connect the PC to the IOP:SCDV, check and if necessary adjust the settings.
Switch on power again
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 47
PROC:CP113D 31
ITMN - OFFLINE
73
Commissioning
System

Enter ; and press <ENTER>
IPL113: MANUAL START ENTER PARAMS
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
START APS MANUALLY

:
START INSTALLAT.RECOV :
START UTILITY(MONITOR) :
STOP INITIAL START
:
START APS AUTOMATICALLY:
MANUALLY;
INSTALLATION;
UTILITY;
STOP;
;ETX
Enter MAN; and press <ENTER>

IOC-0 MDD : BZS/AKD AND GENERATION LIST
The current generation list is output:

xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
99999999
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
MANUAL RECOVERY - LOADING VIA IOC : IOC-0;/IOC-1;
Enter IOC-0; or IOC-1; and press <ENTER>

LOAD.DEV. - *MDD* -GENERATION TO LOAD :NAME; (8 CHAR)
Enter the current APS generation 8 characters (in APS documentation or at the
place marked 9999999 in the generation list printed out previously).
Enter 'Generation-No.' and press <ENTER>
If the APS version is unknown and cannot be found out, enter *. For safety
reasons this must be repeated 3 times after system enquiry.
MANUAL RECOVERY - LTG LOADING : Y;/N;
Enter "N;" and press <ENTER>

Flick inhibit-bit switch in BCMY-0 and BCMY-1 on module PIDAT (mounting
location 145) to OFF (down).
Related LEDs on the modules go out
Manual start-up is initiated.

The track numbers to be run through on the module CPCL in the BAP master
are shown in block:
......(see 87)
To make things clearer, only the headline is given for the system messages.
Wait for the following system message:
ALL DOUBLE FILES SYNCHRONIZED
Was the manual start-up with the test APS successful?
PROC:CP113D 32
Y h ... 89
N h ... 74
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
74
Decision: Manual Start-up with other BAP

Has the manual start-up been attempted with another BAP?
75
Y h ... 76
N h ... 75
Boot Key
Press BOOT key of other BAP and repeat manual start-up
76
ITMN - OFFLINE
h ... 66
Decision: Manual Start-up via IOC-1

Branch to one of the following blocks
Repeat manual start-up via IOC-1, if not already done
If manual start-up via IOC-1 has already been attempted
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 66
h ... 77
PROC:CP113D 33
ITMN - OFFLINE
77
Commissioning
System
START/UTILITY
When working with the IMON, ensure that the PC can be reached via the IOC
specified in the Start Utility.
Press BOOT key in BAP-0
UNIT
STATUS
TEST
********************************************
BAP-0
ost
Test result
BAP-1
ost
Test result
B:CMY-0
ost
Test result
B:CMY-1
ost
Test result
CMY-0
ost
Test result
CMY-1
ost
Test result
IOC-0
ost
Test result
IOC-1
ost
Test result
TO DIAGNOSE MEMORY
TO FORMAT
MEMORY
TO CONTINUE
: DIAG;
: FORMAT;
: ;ETX
h ... 69
If the preceding message did not appear

TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
START APS MANUALLY

:
STOP INITIAL START
:
MANUALLY;
INSTALLATION;
UTILITY;
STOP;
;ETX
Enter UTI; and press <ENTER>

UTILITY - RECOVERY - DEVICE - TYPE TO USE : MDD;/MTD;
Enter MDD; and press <ENTER>

UTILITY - RECOV. - LOAD FROM MDD VIA : IOC-0;/IOC-1;

PLEASE ENTER UTILITY - FILE - NAME
Acknowledge this message with SY.INSTALL

IMON : V0031 START
IMON : ENTER COMMAND
Y h ... 79
N h ... 78
Was it possible to start IMON?
78
Fault Clearance
Check connection of MDD to IOP:MDD against the cable laying list.
Check switch settings and cable connections in the MDD against the manufacturer's documentation.
PROC:CP113D 34
h ... 47
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
79
ITMN - OFFLINE
Display Disk Contents

Display disk contents with the following commands:
DISP MDDIR:DEVIN=010E01; (for MDD-0)
DISP MDDIR:DEVIN=030E01; (for MDD-1)
All disk files of MDD-0 (MDD-1) are displayed

Branch to one of the following blocks according to the files displayed
80
If all system files are present continue
h ... 80
If not all system files are present the files must be copied again from tape to
disk. System test with test APS must be omitted
h ... 93
Decision: BAP Off-line Diagnostics

Have BAP off-line diagnostics been carried out?
81
Branch according to Off-line Diagnostics

If all off-line diagnostics have been terminated without error, one or more
system files have probably been destroyed. In this case the test with the test
APS must be omitted
Otherwise
82
Y h ... 81
N h ... 82
h ... 93
h ... 21
Prepare BAP Off-line Diagnostics (Special Fault Clearance)
Off-line diagnostics must be performed on both BAPs.

Flick the TEST switch on module CPCL to OFF to switch off the supervisory
circuit. It should only be switched OFF for test purposes. Diagnostics cannot be
initiated by MML or key when the supervisory circuit is switched off.
Initiate hardware start-up with the BOOT key on the CPCL module. The BAP in
which the BOOT key was pressed becomes the master.
Reset the processor with the RES key.
Start diagnostics by pressing the RES and BOOT keys simultaneously.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 35
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Change the display with the DIAD switch.
When the switch is ON (up), the part of the diagnostic register that belongs
to the leading processor half (PU) in the BAP is displayed.
When the switch is OFF (down) the part of the diagnostic register that
belongs to the secondary processor half (PU) in the BAP is displayed.
The contents of the diagnostic registers are the same if the PU-0 and PU-1 in a
BAP come to the same result in the audit.
Switch off the DCCs connected to BAP0/1
For the off-line diagnostics in the BAPs, disconnect the start-up lines and put the
corresponding PINs in the multilayer to 0 V.
Disconnect the start-up lines shown in the following table:
Rack
Frame
MUT
MOLOC
R:CP113A
P/IOC0
09
D179P3
D179P4
P/IOC1
10
D179P3
D179P4
Insert the following links:

Rack
R:CP113A
MUT
09
from
to
MOLOC
PIN
MOLOC
PIN
179
A248
179
C248
10
Switch on DCCs connected to BAP0/1
An initialization program runs in both BAPs
Is 'A435' displayed in at least one BAP?
83
Y h ... 84
N h ... 83

Carry out special fault clearance according to
i....NM:CP113D,
h ... 47
TAB, CP052
PROC:CP113D 36
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
84
ITMN - OFFLINE
Start BAP Off-line Diagnostics

Start diagnostics in the BAP with the correct display ('A435') by pressing the
RES and BOOT keys simultaneously.
Off-line diagnostics are started. On termination without error, xAAx is displayed.
(x has no significance for the analysis).
Is xAAx displayed?
85
Y h ... 86
N h ... 85
Fault Clearance
Analyze the track numbers and clear faults using
i ... NM:CP113D,
TAB, CP052
86
h ... 47
Check Internal Cabling
The BAP(s) is/are OK. The fault is in the cabling between BAP-0/1 and BCMY0/1, or in the cabling between BCMY-0/1 and CMY-0/1 or in the CMY-0/1.
Check the internal cabling of the R:CP113A against the cable laying list
If any faults have been found in the internal cabling, remove faults and
continue
h ... 47
If no faults have been found in the internal cabling, evaluate and clear faults
according to
i ... NM:CP113D,
h ... 47
TAB, CP052
87
Software Start-up with test APS
Software start-up is initiated as soon as the display of the CPCL module of the
BAP master changes from 'Axx5' to 'Bxx4'. (xx - different track points of start-up)
The following track points run trough:
Bx34
Bx54
Bx74
Bx94
or: Dxx2 or Exx1 (changes every 4 s)

(xx-arbitrary, with:
'Dxx2' the call processing load is shown in Erl.
'Exx1' the entire processor load in percent)
Have the track points shown above been run trough?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 88
N h ... 66
PROC:CP113D 37
ITMN - OFFLINE
88
Commissioning
System
System Messages
To make things clearer, only a headline is given for system messages.

If startup with test APS was successful the following message is output:
Wait for system message

Branch to the following blocks according to the system reaction:
h ... 89
h ... 66
h ... 71
ALL DOUBLE FILES SYNCHRONIZED is displayed

Any other message is displayed
No message is displayed
89
Enter USER-ID and Password
USER-ID and password will be interrogated.

For the first OMT EWSD0 and for further OMTs EWSD1, EWSD2,
EWSD3 has to be entered as USER-ID.
The password is SYSTEM-1.
(All inputs in capital letters)
Enter USER-ID and password
90
Enter Date and Time
Enter date and time:
ENTR TIME:DATE=yy-mm-dd,TIME=hh-mm-ss,WD=xx;
Secure time:
CORR TIME:MODE=SECURE;
91
Check Fan Alarms

Switch off the individual fans in each fan module by the switches on the
modules. After about 5 secs. this is logged on the printer.
Caution:
Do not leave the fans switched off for longer than 5 mins. as racks warm up rapidly, endangering components.
System message fan alarm
Switch on fans again (do not wait for longer than 5 mins.)
Y h ... 93
N h ... 92
Was it possible to generate this message from each fan module?
92
Check Alarm Lines

Check alarm lines from the fan modules to the IOP:TA against cabling list and if
necessary perform special fault clearance IOP:TA according to the MMN.
PROC:CP113D 38
h ... 91
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
93
ITMN - OFFLINE
Install Hardware APS
The term Hardware APS indicates that the APS contains only the data of the
hardware which is present in the exchange and no routing-, zoning-, or
subscriber-data.
The following is necessary before installing the hardware APS:
error-free configuration of CP113D with the test APS
APS documentation
Observe the notes in the APS documentation supplied.

Note:
The APS installation is to be carried out according to procedure SW140 (if delivered on Tape) or according to procedure SW141 (If delivered on MOD).
Install the APS, using one of the following procedures (According to the medium
on which the APS is delivered).
For APS delivered on tape
h ... NM:SW,
PROC:SW140
For APS delivered on MOD
h ... NM:SW,
PROC:SW141
END
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113D 39
ITMN - OFFLINE
PROC:CP113D 40
Commissioning
System
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.14
Switching on MTD STC 2922 of Storage Tek

MTD_STC2922
3.14.1
Introduction
The scope of delivery of the magnetic tape device STC 2922 of Storage Tek contains
a user manual.
MTD-fault clearance should only be carried out by especially trained personnel.
Basic test Magnetic Tape Device STC 2922

Check that interface cables to the IOP:MTD are connected according to
...... Devices,
NM:CP MTD:STC 2922
Open the door of MTD

Turn POWER switch to OFF
Unscrew the cover of MTD module frame (using special tool Torx 15) and
remove foam rubber in front of the modules.
Unplug the IFP module of the MTD
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:MTD_STC2922 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Observe the EGB regulations
......NM:CP
Devices,
The switch settings must be checked or set according to
MTD:STC 2922
Reconnect the IFP module
Replace the foam rubber in front of the modules and screw on the cover of the
MTD module frame
Open the cover of the tape path
Before testing the MTD, cleaning must be carried out according to the instructions given in
......MMN:CP113,
MAINT:MTD
STC 2922
The cleaning should be recorded in a copy of the maintenance list which accompanies the MMN. The list should be attached to the door of the rack.
If the cover does not close tightly due to a physical defect, the magnetic tape will
not be automatically threaded. In this case spare catches must be obtained and
exchanged.
......MMN:CP113,
MAINT:MTD
STC 2922
Close the cover of the tape path

Switch on the main supply switch at the rear of the MTD, if not already done
The location of the main supply switch is given in:
......NM:CP
Devices,
MTD:STC 2922
PROC:MTD_STC2922 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Switch on Magnetic Tape Device
A short self-test is carried out after switching on the power. Operating or hardware faults are shown on the MTD display. An explanation of the fault numbers
is to be found on the inside of the MTD door, or in Section "INTF FCD" (Fault
Code Dictionary 2921&2922 with Industry standard Interface) of the manual that
is supplied.
The tape leader must be cleanly cut, i.e. not have a plastic threading end (cut off
with a special tool) as this prevents the tape from being guided when it is
threaded in. If automatic tape threading is not possible, e.g. at altitudes over
1.800m, it must be threaded by hand. Manual threading is started by pressing
the LOAD-REW key twice. The magnetic spool must be turned so that the tape
is inserted into the suction opening. If SHUT DOOR is displayed on the MTD,
ensure that the MTD door is properly closed.
Screw in fuse 3 for MTD (in R:DEVD)
Close MTD door
Put POWER switch to ON position
If the self-test completes without finding a fault, - - - - is displayed.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:MTD_STC2922 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Diagnose Magnetic Tape Device
The following inputs relate to the MTD keyboard

Press the <ENTER ADDR> key, enter '1 F F A' and then press <ENTER>
(Request the firmware version)
D1 is shown in the MTD display
Press <ENTER>
'16' or '17' appears on the MTD display
MTDs with FW < D1 16 may not be used.

Open the MTD door
Insert a fault-free empty tape with a write enable ring, but do not load (Scratch
Tape)
Press <ENTER DIAG> enter '1 0' and then press <ENTER>
The last input starts the complete MTD device diagnostics. The magnetic tape is
automatically loaded after internal checks are carried out. Read/write tests with
both recording densities are then made. After a positive run the diagnostics end
with - - - - on the display. If there is a fault, a fault number is displayed. Details
about the cause of the fault together with fault numbers are listed in the STC
Manual, Section "INTF FCD" (Fault Code Dictionary 2921&2922 with Industry
standard Interface) . Fault clearance is explained in the section for Maintenance, Removal/Replacement, Diagnostics in the STC Manual.
Y h ... 5
N h ... 4
Is - - - - displayed after the diagnostics?
Fault clearance
Carry out fault clearance as described in STC Manual, sections Maintenance,
Removal/Replacement, Diagnostics
h ... 5
Check Tape
Open MTD door
The following test overwrites any files that may exist!

Press the door contact (below left) with a pen or any other suitable tool and hold
it down
Press <ENTER DIAG>, enter 'D' and then press <ENTER>
The tape is written to with higher recording density 6250 BPI and read in the
READ AFTER WRITE MODE. MTD Display: @D
'@D' appears in the MTD display
PROC:MTD_STC2922 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
The following 2 system responses are possible:
If the magnetic tape is fault-free, it is wound back when the end-of-tape mark
(EOT) is recognized.
If the magnetic tape is faulty it is stopped after 5 faults. MTD display: ODC
(In this case the tape cannot be used)
Is the tape fault-free?
Y h ... 6
N h ... 7
Unload fault-free tape

Unload tape and remove it
Remove pen (or tool) from the door contact.
Close the MTD door
Unload faulty tape

Rewind tape
Tape must not be used anymore
Close the MTD door
END
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:MTD_STC2922 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
PROC:MTD_STC2922 6
Commissioning
System
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15
Off-line Installation of CP113C/CR

CP113C/CR
3.15.1
Documents
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
AKUHW Lists (Equipment Lists)

Maintenance Manual MMN:CP113C/CR
Maintenance Manual MMN:PC - BASIS, Ordering no.: A30808-X3069-Y260- * 7620
MMN:SW
NM:CP113C/CR
NM:CP-Devices
Manuals required:
MTD
MDD
PC
PROC:CP113C/CR 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.2
Commissioning
System
Abbreviations
Abb.
3.15.3
B:CMY
bus to common memory
B:IOC
bus system for input/output control
BAP
base processor
CAP
call processor
CI
common interface
CMY
common memory
F:
frame
IOC
input/output control
IOP
input/output processor
LMY
local memory
MDD
magnetic disk device
MI
memory interface
MOLOC
mounting location
MTD
magnetic tape device
MUT
mounting unit
MYB
memory bank
MYC
memory control
PI
processor interface
PU
processor unit
R:
rack
Test Equipment and Resources
3.15.4
Meaning
APS (contained on both disks)

Multimeter (DMM)
Scratch tapes with write ring
General Information about Testing CP113C/CR

The coordination processor CP113C/CR undergoes a system test before leaving the
manufacturing plant. The individual racks are tested to check that the voltage
converters, the logic components and the internal cabling function correctly.
a) The cables of the CP rack row are supplied as a supplementary package to the coordination processor and are given a system test in the rack (except when cables are
supplied later).
PROC:CP113C/CR 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
b) Once accepted by the test department, all modules are protected from unauthorized
access (by means of a loop secured round each individual module frame).
c) The magnetic tape device, the disk drives and the personal computers are systemtested and separately packed for delivery. The disk storage units had the test-APS
copied onto them in the test department.
d) The coordination processor is checked in the system test department with a test
APS. This APS is located on both magnetic disks.
e) The CP113C/CR installation test can begin once installation is completed. The APS
on the disks is used for system testing.
f)
The CP113C/CR is tested in the following steps:

Off-line test:
Visual check of devices and cabling
Preset all devices (if not already done at the factory)
Start up the PC on-line following manufacturer's instructions (if not already done
by the manufacturer)
Start the fans
Switch on power to all equipment
Off-line diagnostics of CMY, IOC, IOP, (BAP/CAP only if faulty)
On-line test:
Start up hardware
Load application program system (test APS) and start operating system (APS
present on both system disks)
Configure the necessary operating states in the CP area
Check the logic components and devices:
common memory (CMY),
base processor (BAP),
input/output control (IOC)
input/output processor (IOP)
bus to common memory (B:CMY)
magnetic tape device (MTD) and
magnetic disk device (MDD)
using the appropriate test and diagnostic software
Introduce hardware modifications if necessary
Incorporate the current operating APS and repeat the on-line tests
g) Error messages output by the test programs are handled on the basis of the MMN.
h) Implementation of modifications according to instructions (notices are sent by the
modification service). The modification guidelines must be observed. If the installation tester does not carry out the modifications himself, he should at least know
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
which ones are made. Any faults that occur when the modifications have been incorporated must be eliminated with the operating APS and the MMN.
i)
After each hardware modification to a device, the modification service must be

informed of the new device issue.
j)
A fault report must be written on each hardware fault (for repairs and statistics).
k) Always disconnect power before unplugging modules and plugging them in again.
l)
PROC:CP113C/CR 4
If modules with DIP switches are replaced by spares, find the correct new settings
in the MMN:CP113C/CR - TAB.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.5
Overview of the Hardware Belonging to the CP Complex
Maximum Configuration
Minimum Configuration
IOP
IOP
IOP
IOP
IOC-3
IOC-1
IOC-2
IOC-0
CAP-0
CAP-5
BAP-0
BAP-1
B:IOC
B:IOC
LMY
LMY
LMY
LMY
LMY
LMY
PU PU
0 1
PU PU
0 1
PU PU
0 1
PU PU
0 1
PU PU
0 1
PU PU
0 1
CI
CI
CI
CI
CI
CI
PI
PI
PI
MI
PI
PI
PI
MI
PI
PI
MI
PI
MI
CMY-0
BCMY-0
PI
PI
PI
CMY-1
MYC
MYC
MYB MYB MYB MYB

0
3
1
2
MYB MYB MYB MYB

0
3
1
2
BCMY-1
Fig. 3.15.1 Overview: Hardware belonging to the CP-Complex
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.6
Processors
Commissioning
System
Overview of Interfaces B:CMY
Interface to the
processors
B:CMY
M:PIA 0
BAP-0
IOC-0
Interface to the
CMY
Stg 0
BAP-1
IOC-1
M:MTI
Stg 1
CMY0
Stg 0
CMY1
HW tracer
Stg 1
M:PIA 1
CAP-0
CAP-1
Stg 0
IOC-2
IOC-3
Stg 1
M:PIA 2
CAP-2
CAP-3
Stg 0
CAP-4
CAP-5
M:BCM
Stg 1
Stg 0
M:PIA 3
Stg 1
MP:
CP113C
Stg 0
Reserve
Control bus (doubled)

Stg 1
Address/ Data bus (ECC secured)
Capacity dependent part

of the BCMY
Fig. 3.15.2 Overview of Interfaces B:CMY
PROC:CP113C/CR 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.7
Overview IOPs (DE5/2)
GPS-Receiver
GPS-Receiver
IOP:TA
IOP:TA
Fan Alarms
Fan Alarms
CCG(A)-0
-1
IOP:MB 40
IOP:MB 41
SYPC
IOP:MB42
IOP:MB43
MB-0-0
1-0
IOP:MB 32
IOP:MB 33
MB-0-1
1-1
IOP:MB 34
IOP:MB 35
CCNP-0
MTD
MOD
IOP:MB 0
MDD
IOP:UNI-0
X.21
-1
IOP:MB 1
IOP:UNI-1
MDD
MOD
MTD
X.21
OMT-1
OMT-0
IOP:SCDP-0
IOP:SCDP-1
DC/AC-Conv. DCIRC
DC/AC-Conv. DCIRC
IOC-0
B:IOC
LMY
IOC-1
PU-0
PU-1
Fig. 3.15.3 Overview IOPs (DE5/2)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.15.8
3.15.8.1
Overview IOPs (DE5/4)

IOPs (DE5/4) Part 1
GPS-Receiver
GPS-Receiver
IOP:TA
IOP:TA
Fan Alarms
Fan Alarms
CCG(A)-0
-1
IOP:MB 40
IOP:MB 41
SYPC
IOP:MB42
IOP:MB43
MB-0-0
1-0
IOP:MB 32
IOP:MB 33
MB-0-1
IOP:MB 34
1-1
IOP:MB 35
MDD
MTD
MOD
MDD
X.21
IOP:UNI-0
IOP:UNI-1
MOD
MTD
X.21
OMT-1
OMT-0
IOP:SCDP-0
IOP:SCDP-1
DC/AC-Conv. DCIRC
DC/AC-Conv. DCIRC
IOC-0
B:IOC
LMY
IOC-1
PU-0
PU-1
Fig. 3.15.4 Overview IOPs (DE5/4) Part 1
PROC:CP113C/CR 8
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.8.2
IOPs (DE5/4) Part 2
MB-0-2
1-2
IOP:MB 36
IOP:MB 37
MB-0-3
1-3
IOP:MB 38
IOP:MB 39
CCNP-0
IOP:MB 0
Optional
-1
IOP:MB 1
Optional
B:IOC
IOC-2
LMY
IOC-3
PU-0
PU-1
Fig. 3.15.5 Overview IOPs (DE5/4) Part 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 9
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.9
3.15.9.1
Commissioning
System
Inverter
Cabling of the 230V Inverter DCIRC
Terminal strip
Load compensation
L1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
L2
11 ...
Feedtrough elements
230V/AC from WR-1

Connectors 3, 6, 9, 12, 15 are
internally grounded
230V/AC
To OEM-Devices
230V/AC
230V/AC to F:Modem
15
14
13
Terminal strip
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
Grounding!
To fuse panel
(20A fuse)
When installing the DCIRC into the

rack, this connector is to be used for
grounding the DCIRC
-UE2
+UE1
3
2
1
DCIRC
500 VA
3
2
1
inside
UA2
UA1
inside
+UE1
-UE2
E
N
L
WR-0
DCIRC
500 VA
inside
inside
UA2
UA1
WR-1
Fig. 3.15.6 Cabling of the 230V inverter DCIRC
PROC:CP113C/CR 10
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.9.2
230V AC-Connectors on Inverter DCIRC
Load comp.
- UE
Load comp.
Feedtrough elements
OMT-0
20 A
20 A
Modem
OMT-1
Modem
DCIRC 500 VA
DCIRC 500 VA
Fig. 3.15.7 230V AC-Connectors on Inverter DCIRC
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 11
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.10
Commissioning
System
Fan Alarm Cabling on CP113C/CR
RACK
SU 1
SU 2
AD:RAL
Cable:
AD:RAL - IOPTA
Alarm-Inputs
Switches for activating the

Alarm inputs
Wires
Plug position:
To fuse panel
(03 C329P4)
IOPTA-0
(07 C329P4)
IOPTA-1
04
FAN (AIC-2)
08
FAN (AIC-1)
Alarm-Switch
-UE
FANBOX (AIC-0)
+UE (GND)
Grounding bar
Fig. 3.15.8 Fan Alarm Cabling in CP113C/CR
PROC:CP113C/CR 12
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.15.11
3.15.11.1
ITMN - OFFLINE
SCSI Bus Cabling CP113C/CR

SCSI Bus with 1 MTD
Rear view of the rack
IOP:UNI0
MTD0
MTD1 MTD0
IOP:UNI1
Terminating
resistor
(active)
MDD1 MOD1
MDD0
R:CP113C/CR
R:DEV(B)
MTD-0 can be
plugged as
MTD-1 onto
the other bus
MDD0
IOP:UNI0
SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)
SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z56...)
MDD1
MTD0
Terminating
resistor (active)
MOD1
IOP:UNI1
SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)
SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z56...)
Fig. 3.15.9 SCSI bus cabling for MDD, MOD and MTD
(CP113C/CR)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 13
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.11.2
Commissioning
System
SCSI-Bus with 2 MTDs

MTD1
IOP:UNI0
MTD0
Terminating
resistor
(active)
IOP:UNI1
Terminating
resistor
(active)
MDD1
MDD0
R:CP113C/CR
MDD0
IOP:UNI0
SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)
R:DEV(B)
MTD0
MOD0 (Option)
SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z56...)
Terminating
resistor (active)
MTD1
MDD1
IOP:UNI1
SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)
SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z56...)
Terminating resistor
(active)
Fig. 3.15.10 SCSI bus cabling of 2 MTDs (CP113C/CR)
PROC:CP113C/CR 14
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.15.11.3
ITMN - OFFLINE
SCSI Bus with MDD and MOD

IOP:UNI0
IOP:UNI1
MOD0
MDD1 MOD1 MDD0
R:CP113C/CR
IOP:UNI0
MDD0
SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)
IOP:UNI1
SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)
R:DEV(B)
MOD0
Terminal
resistor
(active)
MDD1
MOD1
Terminal
resistor
(active)
Fig. 3.15.11 SCSI bus cabling with MDD and MOD

(CP113C/CR)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 15
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
3.15.12
001
F:DEVF Overview
029
015
049 056
081
067
115 122
095
FAN
FAN
MDD0
MDD1
MOD0
MOD1
DCCDA
DCCDA
support plate
Fig. 3.15.12 F:DEVF front view

from
IOP:UNI0
from
IOP:UNI1
DCCDA
DCCDA
MDD1
MOD1
MDD0
MOD0
ribbon cable
ribbon cable
to MTD-1
to MTD-0
Fig. 3.15.13 F:DEV(F) rear view with cabling to:

MDD, MOD and MTD (CP113C/CR)
PROC:CP113C/CR 16
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.15.13
ITMN - OFFLINE
Maintenance Panel MP:CP113C

An outline functional description and short introduction to the MP follows below.
Complete operating instructions for the MP are contained in NM:CP113C/CR.
3.15.13.1
Performance Features
The maintenance panel unit is remote from the PC and can be connected via a cable
simultaneously with a maximum of three different units of the CP.
These units are:
Processor (BAP, CAP, IOC)
Common memory (CMY0, CMY1)
Bus to the Common memory (BCMY0, BCMY1)
Input/output processor of the peripheral devices (IOP:UNI)
The MP is connected to these units, via the module front-facing connector, which are
situated on the following modules for the above-named units:
Unit
Module with front connector for

MP
Processor
M:PEX
CMY
M:CMYC
BCMY
M:BCM
IOP:UNI
M:IOP:UNI
Tab. 3.15.1 Modules with front connector for MP:CP113C

The maintenance panel is for the display or input of data and commands relating to the
CP units to which it is connected. The MP power supply is realized via the current
converter module DCCMC.
Several of these DCCMCs are located in each CP module frame.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 17
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.13.2
Commissioning
System
Overview of MP:CP113C
RESET-key
LCD-display,
consists of 4 LCD rows
SELECT UNIT
Potentiometer for
LCD-brightness
Menu keys
Cable to:
Power
connection
Unit 1
Unit 2
Unit 3
Fig. 3.15.14 Overview of MP:CP113C
3.15.13.3
Operation of the MP
There are 5 keys and one LCD display for operating the MP. The "SELECT UNIT" key
is on the left of the LCD display. The other four are directly beneath the LCD display.
They have various uses which can be read off in the last line of the LCD display. The
LCD display has 4 lines with 20 characters each and basically provides three different
types of display:
normal display, extended display and fault display. This short description only refers to
the normal display:
Command field (six characters)
Data field (eight characters)
Unit identification (four characters)
Unit 1: Data 1 Comm.1

Unit 2:
Comm.2
Unit 3:
Comm.3
disp | req | cmd | send
Fig. 3.15.15 Normal display of MP:CP113C
PROC:CP113C/CR 18
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.15.13.4
ITMN - OFFLINE
Key Functions of MP
Key
Key function
SELECT UNIT
MENU KEYS
Meaning
Selects the unit for which a command is to be entered
The selected unit is shown inverted in the display
Their function is
shown in the last
line of the display
disp
switches between normal and extended display
esc
ends the current input or output and reactivates the latest valid
menu key assignment
cmd
selects the next command from the currently valid command list
(dependent on the selected unit) and shows the selected unit in
the command field
beg
jumps to the first command of the current command list
send
carries out the displayed command
Tab. 3.15.2 Key functions of MP

A list of all menu key functions as well as all possible commands is in the MP Operating
Instructions in NM:CP113C/CR.
3.15.13.5
New Start of the MP

A new start is made by pressing the "RESET" key or by unplugging the MP transformer
and plugging it in again.
Notes for use:
The MP:CP113C can be unplugged or plugged in again without interrupting the

computer.
After pulling MP:CP113C the processes which were started by the MP in all
connected CP units are reset.
The CP unit to be controlled must be in MBL status.
The serial interface of the MP:CP113C functions with TTL level and is therefore
compatible to a standard V.28 interface.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 19
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.14
3.15.14.1
Commissioning
System
Rack Equipment
Rack (R) for CP113 COMPACT
FU
FU
01
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
Fuse panel, AD:RAL
F:PIOP 2
F:PIOP 0
C
A
P
4
C
A
P
2
I
O
C
2
I
O
C
0
F:PBC 0
F:PBC 1
F:PIOP 1
B
A
P
1
C
A
P
3
C
A
P
0
IOPG 2
C
A
P
1
I
O
C
1
BCMY 1
MUT03
MUT04
CMY 0
F:PIOP 3
F:DEV (F)
I
O
C
3
M
O
D
0
M
D
D
0
CMY 1
MUT06
MUT07
IOPG 1
MUT08
MUT09
IOPG 3
M
O
D
1
Fanbox
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
M
D
D
1
MUT10
MUT11
33
31
30
32
FU
Frame
Units
01
F:DEV (F)
MOD 0,
MDD 0
02
F:PIOP 2
CAP 4
03
F:PIOP 0
CAP 2
04
F:PIOP 2
IOC 2
05
F:PIOP 0
IOC 0
06
F:PIOP 2
M:LAUB
07
F:PIOP 0
M:LAUB
08
F:PIOP 2
IOPG 2
09
F:PIOP 0
IOPG 0
12
---
Fans
(MUT04)
13
F:PBC 0
BAP 0
14
F:PBC 0
CAP 0
15
F:PBC 0
BCMY 0
16
F:PBC 0
M:BCM 0
17
F:PBC 0
CMY 0
18
F:PBC 1
BAP 1
19
F:PBC 1
CAP 1
20
F:PBC 1
BCMY 1
21
F:PBC 1
M:BCM 1
22
F:PBC 1
CMY 1
23
F:PIOP 1
CAP 3
24
F:PIOP 3
CAP 5
25
F:PIOP 1
IOC 1
26
F:PIOP 3
IOC 3
27
F:PIOP 1
M:LAUB
28
F:PIOP 3
M:LAUB
29
F:PIOP 1
IOPG 1
30
F:PIOP 3
IOPG 3
31
---
Fanbox
32
---
Fans, optional
(MUT08)
33
F:DEV (F)
MOD 1,
MDD 1
MUT05
Fans
C
A
P
5
20
MUT02
IOPG 0
BCMY 0
18
MUT01
Fans
B
A
P
0
21
19
Fig. 3.15.16 Rack R:CP113C
PROC:CP113C/CR 20
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.15.14.2
ITMN - OFFLINE
Rack (R) for CP113 COMPACT RURAL

FU
01
FU
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
Fuse panel, AD:RAL
F:SMSC 0
F:PIOP 0
MUT04
IOPG 0
MUT03
Fans
F:PBC 0
F:PBC 1
B
A
P
0
BCMY 0
B
A
P
1
BCMY 1
MUT08
CMY 0
MUT05
CMY 1
MUT06
Fans
I
O
C
1
F:PIOP 1
F:DEV (F)
M
O
D
0
MUT09
IOPG 1
M
D
D
0
MUT07
M
O
D
1
Fanbox
20
MUT02
SMSC 1
I
O
C
0
18
MUT01
SMSC 0
F:SMSC 1
21
19
M
D
D
1
MUT10
23
22
25
24
27
26
29
28
33
31
30
32
FU
Frame
Units
01
F:DEV (F)
MDD 0,
MOD 0
02
F:SMSC 0
SMSC 0
04
F:SMSC 0
SMSC 0
05
F:PIOP 0
IOC 0
06
F:SMSC 0
SMSC 0
07
F:PIOP 0
M:LAUB
08
F:SMSC 0
SMSC 0
09
F:PIOP 0
IOPG 0
10
F:SMSC 0
SMSC 0
12
---
Fans
(MUT08)
14
F:PBC 0
BAP 0
15
F:PBC 0
BCMY 0
16
F:PBC 0
M:BCM 0
17
F:PBC 0
CMY 0
19
F:PBC 1
BAP 1
20
F:PBC 1
BCMY 1
21
F:PBC 1
M:BCM 1
22
F:PBC 1
CMY 1
23
F:SMSC 1
SMSC 1
25
F:SMSC 1
SMSC 1
26
F:PIOP 1
IOC 0
27
F:SMSC 1
SMSC 1
28
F:PIOP 1
M:LAUB
29
F:SMSC 1
SMSC 1
30
F:PIOP 1
IOPG 1
31
---
Fanbox
32
---
Fans
(MUT09)
33
F:DEV (F)
MDD 1,
MOD 1
MUT11
Fig. 3.15.17 Rack R:CP113 CE
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 21
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.15.15
3.15.15.1
Commissioning
System
Fuse Assignment
Fuse Assignment for R:CP113C
MUT
01
02
03
Frame
AD:RAL
F:PIOP(A)
F:PIOP(A)
FU
Plug
position
of supply
plug
Supplied
module
Mounting location of
the supplied module
Allocated unit
12
external devices, e.g.Tracer
31
external devices
02
C101
DCCMC
C101
CAP 4
04
C127
DCCMC
C127
IOC 2
06
C249
M:LAUB
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
08
C337
DCCMC
C337
IOPG 2
03
C101
DCCMC
C101
CAP 2
05
C127
DCCMC
C127
IOC 0
07
C249
M:LAUB
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
09
C337
DCCMC
C337
IOPG 0
F2 (-UE)
FAN
04
FAN
12
05
F:PBC(A)
13
C101
DCCMC
C101
BAP 0
14
C125
DCCMC
C125
CAP 0
15
C151
DCCMC
C151
BCMY 0
16
C159
M:BCM
C167
M:BCM0
17
C339
DCCMC
C339
CMY 0
18
C101
DCCMC
C101
BAP 1
19
C125
DCCMC
C125
CAP 1
20
C151
DCCMC
C151
BCMY 1
21
C159
M:BCM
C167
M:BCM1
22
C339
DCCMC
C339
CMY 1
23
C101
DCCMC
C101
CAP 3
25
C127
DCCMC
C127
IOC 1
27
C249
M:LAUB
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
29
C337
DCCMC
C337
IOPG 1
F2 (-UE)
FAN
06
07
F:PBC(A)
F:PIOP(A)
08
FAN
32
09
F:PIOP(A)
24
C101
DCCMC
C101
CAP 5
26
C127
DCCMC
C127
IOC 3
28
C249
M:LAUB
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
30
C337
DCCMC
C337
IOPG 3
Note: every fuse is 10 A
Tab. 3.15.3 Fuse Assignment R:CP113C
PROC:CP113C/CR 22
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
MUT
10
Frame
F:DEV(F)
FU
Plug
position
of supply
plug
Supplied
module
01
33
11
FANBOX
the supplied module
Allocated unit
DCCDA
A056
MDD 0
DCCDA
A049
MOD 0
DCCDA
A122
MDD 1
DCCDA
A115
MOD 1
X22 (-UE)
FANBOX
31
Tab. 3.15.3 Fuse Assignment R:CP113C
3.15.15.2
Fuse Assignment for R:DEVB

MUT
Equipment
FU
Ampere
04
MTD
05
10
07
MTD
02
10
10
DCIRC0
19
20
11
DCIRC1
20
20
Tab. 3.15.4 Fuse Assignment R:DEVB
3.15.15.3
Fuse Assignment to Fans

Rack
CP113C
Fuse
Fan in MUT
Remarks
12
04
Fan and external devices, e.g. HW tracer
32
08
Fan (if available)
31
11
Fan and external devices
Tab. 3.15.5 Fuse Assignment to fans
3.15.15.4
Fuse Assignment for R:CE (CP113 Compact Rural)

MUT
01
Frame
AD:RAL
FU
Plug
position
of supply
plug
Supplied
module
the supplied module
12
external devices
31
external devices
Allocated unit
Tab. 3.15.6 Fuse Assignment for R:CE (CP113 Compact Rural)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 23
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
MUT
02
Frame
F:SMSC(C)
FU
Plug
position
of supply
plug
Supplied
module
the supplied module
02
DCCCR
C101
SYP
04
DCCCR
C153
CCG-0
06
SYPD-0/1
08
10
C343
DCCDE
C259
MB-0
DCCMC
C343
SN-0
11
03
04
05
06
07
F:PIOP(A)
F:SMSC(C)
F:PBC(A)
F:PBC(A)
F:PIOP(A)
Allocated unit
ext. hooter/ ext.

Alarms
03
C101
DCCMC
C101
05
C127
C127
IOC-0
07
C249
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
09
C337
C337
IOPG-0
23
DCCCR
C101
CDEX
25
DCCCR
C153
CCG-1
27
DCCDE
C259
MB-1
29
C343
DCCMC
C343
SN-1
13
C101
DCCMC
C101
BAP 0
14
C125
DCCMC
C125
CAP 0
15
C151
DCCMC
C151
BCMY 0
16
C159
M:BCM
C167
M:BCM0
17
C339
DCCMC
C339
CMY 0
18
C101
DCCMC
C101
BAP 1
19
C125
DCCMC
C125
CAP 1
20
C151
DCCMC
C151
BCMY 1
21
C159
M:BCM
C167
M:BCM1
22
C339
DCCMC
C339
CMY 1
24
C101
DCCMC
C101
26
C127
DCCMC
C127
IOC 1
28
C249
M:LAUB
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
30
C337
DCCMC
C337
IOPG 1
08
FAN
12
F2 (-UE)
FAN
09
FAN
32
F2 (-UE)
FAN
10
F:DEV(F)
01
DCCDA
A056
MDD 0
DCCDA
A049
MOD 0
DCCDA
A122
MDD 1
DCCDA
A115
MOD 1
X22 (-UE)
FANBOX
33
11
FANBOX
31
Tab. 3.15.6 Fuse Assignment for R:CE (CP113 Compact Rural)
PROC:CP113C/CR 24
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.15.16
ITMN - OFFLINE
Memory Organization
Two different types of modules M:CMYM can be used in the CMY:
Serial Number
Memory capacity of a CMYM

module in Mbyte
..Q1256-X100
64
..Q1256-X200
128
Tab. 3.15.7 Memory organization
3.15.17
Sequence for Switching on the Modules in R:CP113C
3.15.17.1
Sequence for Switching on the Modules in R:CP113C
Fuse
MUT
Supplied module
the supplied module
Allocated unit
Frame
16
05
M:BCM
C167
*)
PBC0
21
06
M:BCM
C167
*)
PBC1
15
05
DCCMC
C151
BCMY0
PBC0
20
06
DCCMC
C151
BCMY1
PBC1
17
05
DCCMC
C339
CMY0
PBC0
22
06
DCCMC
C339
CMY1
PBC1
05
03
DCCMC
C127
IOC0
PIOP
09
03
DCCMC
C337
IOPG0
PIOP
25
07
DCCMC
C127
IOC1
PIOP
29
07
DCCMC
C337
IOPG1
PIOP
07
03
M:LAUB
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
PIOP
27
07
M:LAUB
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
PIOP
Remark
Remark
Minimum
configuration
Parallel
Parallel
*) Note: The fuses for M:BCM supply the DCCs on board. These DCCs supply the clock generator on the module directly,
so that the clock generator is still able to work, even if the DCC of the corresponding BCMY is switched off or defective.
The LEDs of the modules M:BCM remain dark when these fuses are screwed in
Tab. 3.15.8 Sequence for switching on the modules R:CP113C
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 25
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Fuse
MUT
Supplied module
the supplied module
Allocated unit
Frame
14
05
DCCMC
C125
CAP0
PBC0
19
06
DCCMC
C125
CAP1
PBC1
03
03
DCCMC
C101
CAP2
PIOP
23
07
DCCMC
C101
CAP3
PIOP
04
02
DCCMC
C127
IOC2
PIOP
08
02
DCCMC
C337
IOPG2
PIOP
26
09
DCCMC
C127
IOC3
PIOP
30
09
DCCMC
C337
IOPG3
PIOP
06
02
M:LAUB
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
PIOP
28
09
M:LAUB
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
PIOP
02
02
DCCMC
C101
CAP4
PIOP
24
09
DCCMC
C101
CAP5
PIOP
Remark
Remark
Extension
Parallel
Parallel
Tab. 3.15.8 Sequence for switching on the modules R:CP113C
3.15.17.2
Sequence for Switching on the Modules in R:CE
Fuse
MUT
Supplied module
the supplied module
Allocated unit
Frame
16
05
M:BCM
C167
*)
PBC0
21
06
M:BCM
C167
*)
PBC1
15
05
DCCMC
C151
BCMY0
PBC0
20
06
DCCMC
C151
BCMY1
PBC1
17
05
DCCMC
C339
CMY0
PBC0
22
06
DCCMC
C339
CMY1
PBC1
05
03
DCCMC
C127
IOC0
PIOP
09
03
DCCMC
C337
IOPG0
PIOP
26
07
DCCMC
C127
IOC1
PIOP
30
07
DCCMC
C337
IOPG1
PIOP
07
03
M:LAUB
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
PIOP
28
07
M:LAUB
C153, C177, C199, C221
LAU
PIOP
Remark
Parallel
Parallel
Tab. 3.15.9 Sequence for switching on the modules R:CE
PROC:CP113C/CR 26
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
3.15.18
3.15.18.1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Displays on Module Faceplates

Displays after Successful Hardware Start-up
Unit
B:CMY-0
B:CMY-1
CMY-0
Module
BCM
Display
LED
Remarks
MST
green
CG0
green if selected/red if not
CG1
green if selected/red if not.

one LED must be green, the other is automatically red
ILBS
green if the ILB is reset

red if the ILB is set
PIA
MST
green
PIA
MST
green
PIA
MST
green
PIA
MST
green
MTI
MST
green
BCM
MST
green
CG0
CG1

one LED must be green, the other is automatically red
ILBS
green if the ILB is reset

red if ILB is set
PIA
MST
green
PIA
MST
green
PIA
MST
green
PIA
MST
green
MTI
MST
green
CMYC
MST
green
ILB0
green if the ILB is reset to B:CMY0

red if the ILB is set to B:CMY0
ILB1

CMYM0
MST
green
CMYM1
MST
green
CMYM2
MST
green
CMYM3
MST
green
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 27
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Unit
CMY-1
BAP-0
Module
Display
CMYC
LED
Remarks
MST
green
ILB0

ILB1

CMYM0
MST
green
CMYM1
MST
green
CMYM2
MST
green
CMYM3
MST
green
PEX
Display at the MP
The sequence of the BAP master is described in the procedure
(DY A925 if manually booted with BAP-0)
BAP-1
PEX
Display at the MP
The sequence of the BAP master is described in the procedure
(DY A925 if manually booted with BAP-1)
IOC-0
IOC-1
IOP
PEX
PEX
IOP:TA
DY A385
Display at the MP (A1A5 is also possible)

MST
green
ILB0
green if the ILB is reset to the B:CMY0

ILB1

red if ILB is set to B:CMY1
DY A385
Display at the MP (A1A5 is also possible)

MST
green
ILB0

ILB1

*******
* Time is displayed for approx. 5 mins. if the display key

is pressed
IOP:MB
IBREQ
green for a few minutes
IOP:UNI
MST
green
3.15.19
Commands for Creating CAPs

List of CAPs and corresponding PBI-numbers
PROC:CP113C/CR 28
CR CAP:CAP=0,PBI=4;
CR CAP:CAP=1,PBI=6;
CR CAP:CAP=2,PBI=8;
CR CAP:CAP=3,PBI=9;
CR CAP:CAP=4,PBI=10;
CR CAP:CAP=5,PBI=11;
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Check the Basic State (Preparation) of Racks R:CP113C / R:DEVB / R:CE
Check the basic state of the racks R:CP113C / R:DEVB / R:CE

Y h ... 3
N h ... 2

h ... 1
Switch off DCCs

Switch off all DCCs
Check Mechanical Layout

Check racks and module frames (R:CP113C / R:DEVB / R:CE) to see if any
parts are touching, or if there is any foreign material or transport damage.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place
If any transport damage or damaged seals have been detected, the rack layout
(R:CP113C and R:DEVB) / R:CE has to be checked against the equipment list.
Check the layout of the module frames and the standard cabling plan
Break module seal
Check connections between wire wrap field and chassis ground bus.
Check cabling against cable laying list A30808-A....-X...- * -33
Automatic Memory Setting
No manual memory setting is necessary for CP113C/CR.

An address decoder is loaded when the voltage is switched on via the CMY-FW.
This enables memory modules of the most differing level of component placement and DRAM layout to be mixed in a CMY.
The memory is distributed on one till four modules (M:CMYM0 - M:CMYM3).
Two different types of modules can be used:
...... 3.15.7)
(see Tab.
The CMY has no set BCMY connection number in the hardware. This is allocated with the RESET incode from BCMY during the system run-up, and stores
them in the RAM of the MC and in ASIC MFC.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 29
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Check Cabling of Fan Alarm Lines
......(see
Fig. 3.15.
8)
......(see
Fig. 3.15.
8)
Check cabling between AD:RAL and both IOP:TA

Check switches for activating the alarm inputs in AD:RAL
Test fans
Insert the following fuses (depending on the rack to be switched on) one after
the other and switch on the fans:
Rack
Fuse
Fan in MUT
Remarks
R:CP113C
FU 12
04
Fan and external devices e.g. HW Tracer
FU 32
08
Fan (if available)
FU 31
11
Rack
Fuse
Fan in MUT
Remarks
R:CE
FU 12
08
Fan and external devices e.g. HW Tracer
FU 32
09
Fan (if available)
FU 31
11
Y h ... 9
N h ... 8
Are the corresponding LEDs lit?

h ... 7
Basic State DCCs

Make sure that all DCCs of the CP113C/CR are switched off
10
Switch on DCCs
To prevent module damage and because of clock synchronization the module

frames are switched on in a special sequence:
Sequence for switching on the modules in R:CP113C
......(see
Tab.
3.15.8)
Sequence for switching on the modules in R:CE
......(see
Tab.
3.15.9)
Screw in the first (next) fuse (see table mentioned above).
PROC:CP113C/CR 30
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
The following system responses are possible, according to the fuse screwed in:
Fuse for M:BCM:

The DCCs on board of the corresponding module M:BCM are supplied with
system voltage but the LEDs on the module faceplate remain dark.
Fuse for DCCMC:

No system reaction until the corresponding DCC is switched on
Fuse for M:LAUB:

LEDs on the corresponding module M:LAUB light up
Switch on power with the switch on the assigned DCC module faceplates.
(Except for M:LAUB and M:BCM which are directly connected to the fuse)
The following system responses are possible, according to the module switched
on:
DCCMC:
Green LED on the module faceplate of the DCCMC lights up
The green LEDs of the DCCs for IOPG and IOC only light up if both
DCCMCs have been switched on
DCCMC for BCMY0:

LED on M:BCM in F:PBC0 lights green immediately
DCCMC for BCMY1:

LED on M:BCM in F:PBC1 lights yellow for approx. 5 sec. and then green
Does the LED of the module switched on light as shown in the preceding list?
11
Decision: Next Module

Are all units listed in the table in operation?
12
Y h ... 11
N h ... 12
Y h ... 22
N h ... 10
Fault Clearance
Switch off the voltage converter immediately and unscrew the assigned fuse
13

14
Replace Fuse
15
Y h ... 14
N h ... 15
h ... 10
Decision Block: DCC

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 17
N h ... 16
PROC:CP113C/CR 31
ITMN - OFFLINE
16
Commissioning
System
Replace DCC
h ... 10
17
Decision Block: Module
Y h ... 19
N h ... 18
Have all corresponding modules already been replaced?
18
Replace the Corresponding Modules

Replace modules of the affected unit successively by spare modules.
If the green LED of the DCC is still not lit after replacing a module, the spare
module has to be replaced with the original module again.
h ... 10
After each module replacement
19
Y i....NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB, CP0050
N h ... 21
20
Decision Block
Y h ... 10
N h ... 21
21

22
Information Block: SCSI Bus
The cabling of the complete SCSI bus is shown in
23
h ... 10
......(see 3.15.11)
Switch on Magnetic Tape Device

Branch to one of the following MTD procedures according to the MTD used:
Switching on MTD: STC 2925 of Storage Tek
i....PROC:
Switching on MTD: HP 88781 A of Hewlett Packard
i....PROC:
MTD:STC2925
MTD:HP
88781A
After successful MTD start-up, continue:
PROC:CP113C/CR 32
h ... 24
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
24
ITMN - OFFLINE
Check Cabling of Disk Storage Unit (MDD)
The following cabling of the MDDs has to be checked:
Correct connection of the power supply plug to the MDD
Correct connection of the SCSI-bus cabling to MDD
For MDD HP C2490A (2,1 GByte), check cabling according to:
...... Devices,
NM:CP MDDHP
C2490A
(2,1 GByte)
For MDD Quantum Atlas XP34550S (4,5 GByte), check cabling according to:
...... Devices,
NM:CP MDD
XP34550S
(4,5 GByte)
25
26
Check Switch Settings of Disk Storage Unit (MDD)

For MDD HP C2490A (2,1 GByte): check that switch settings are set according
to:
...... Devices,
NM:CP MDD
For MDD Quantum Atlas XP34550S (4,5 GByte): check that switch settings are
set according to:
...... Devices,
NM:CP MDD
HP C2490A
(2,1 GByte)
XP34550S
(4,5 GByte)
Check Cabling of MODs
Check the following cable connections of the MODs:
Correct attachment of the power supply plug to the MOD
Correct attachment of the power supply plug to the MOD-fan
Correct attachment of the SCSI bus cabling
For MOD Sony SMO-F531 (1,3 GB) check cabling according to
...... Devices,
NM:CP MOD Sony
SMO-F531
For MOD Sony SMO-F541 (2,6GB) check cabling according to
...... Devices,
NM:CP -
MOD Sony
SMO-F541
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:CP113C/CR 33
ITMN - OFFLINE
27
Commissioning
System
Check Settings of the MODs
Check the following settings of the operation mode plug of the MODs:
Check the setting to the correct SCSI address (SCSI-ID 2)
Check the correct jumper setting in the operation mode plug for deactivating
the internal terminating resistor (Depending on the SCSI devices connected)
For MOD Sony SMO-F531 (1,3 GB) check settings according to
......NM:CP
Devices,
MOD Sony
SMO-F531
For MOD Sony SMO-F541 (2,6GB) check settings according to
......NM:CP
Devices,
MOD Sony
SMO-F541
28
Screw in Fuse
Screw in fuse for MDD-0 and MOD-0
29
Switch on MDD-0
......(see 3.15.15)
......(see 3.15.15)

LED of the MDD lights up
30
Switch on MOD-0
......(see 3.15.15)

MOD fan starts up
31
Screw in Fuse
Screw in fuse for MDD-1 and MOD-1
32
Switch on MDD-1
......(see 3.15.15)
......(see 3.15.15)

LED of the MDD lights up
PROC:CP113C/CR 34
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
33
Switch on MOD-1
ITMN - OFFLINE
...... (see 3.15.15)

MOD fan starts up
34
Installation of PC
Information about the inverter:

The 230V outputs of the inverter (230V, 500 VA) are floating.
Before switching on the inverter one line of the 230V output has to be grounded.
Normally the grounding is already done by the manufacturer but has to be
checked again now.
Check / establish the correct grounding of the inverter
Switch on the inverter for the PC.
(To this inverter no further PCs can be connected)
Installation of the PC according to
After the PC has been installed and a CP session opened
35
...... 6)(see Fig. 3.15.

...... 7)(see Fig. 3.15.
...... BASIS
MMN:PC h ... 35
Connecting the Maintenance Panel
The Maintenance Panel (MP) can be connected in any order with up to three
units and the voltage supply of any unit of the CP113C/CR. An interference of
active units by a non-initialized MP is excluded.
Connect the Maintenance Panel to the voltage supply on the front panel plug of
any DCCMC voltage converter of the CP113C/CR.
After connecting the operating voltage to the MP, self-tests are first carried out
by the FW.
After a successful test the following text is displayed on the MP:
**************************
*
*
* MP:CP113C, FW xxxx
*
* Selftest OK !!
*
* -------------------- *
* Hit any key to start *
*
*
**************************
FW xxxx identifies the current firmware version

Has the self-test been terminated successfully?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 37
N h ... 36
PROC:CP113C/CR 35
ITMN - OFFLINE
36
Commissioning
System
Fault Clearance
......NM:
CP113C/CR,
Carry out fault clearance according to the instructions of the MP, given in
TAB
h ... 35
37
Diagnosis 0 CMY
The off-line diagnostics must be carried out on both CMYs one after the other.
Connect the maintenance panel via the front panel plug to the module M:BCM
of both BCMYs and to the M:CMYC module of the CMY to be tested.
The interface lock bits of the CMY to be tested must be set to both BCMYs as
follows.
Select BCMY0 with the "SELECT UNIT" key.
Enter the command "SILBM0" ("SILBM1") with the menu keys for setting the
interface lock bits to the CMY0 (CMY1).
Enter the command "SILBM0" ("SILBM1") with the menu keys for setting the
The interface lock bits of the CMY0 (CMY1) are set to both BCMYs.
Select CMY with "SELECT UNIT" and enter the command "RESET" for the
CMY with the menu key.
The module is reset (otherwise the diagnostic command is ineffective).
Enter the command "DIAG0" for the CMY with the menu keys.
Diagnostics 0 is started (complete CMY diagnostics). The LED MST on module
M:CMYC flashes green. (Diagnostics ends after approx. 10 seconds, even if the
LED continues to flash).
The diagnostics result can be found in the fourth entry of the trace RAM.
Enter the command "TRINF" for the CMY with menu keys.
**************************
*
*
* CMYx < list > TRINF
*
* Show trace RAM
*
* FAILNR 4: 5AAA5AAA
*
* disp ---- ++++
end *
*
*
**************************
<- positive pattern after the diagnostics
Is "5AAA5AAA" displayed for FAILNR?
PROC:CP113C/CR 36
Y h ... 39
N h ... 38
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
38
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fault Clearance
i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB:CP053
39
h ... 37
Diagnosis 2 CMY
Enter the "RESET" command for the CMY with the menu keys
The module is reset (otherwise the diagnostics command is ineffective)

Enter the "DIAG2" command for the CMY with menu keys (diagnostics of the
CMY memory medium)
Diagnostics 2 is started (diagnostics of the CMY memory medium). The LED
MST flashes green on module M:CMYC. (The diagnostics ends after approx. 10
secs., even if the LED continues to flash).
**************************
*
*
*
* Show trace RAM
*
* FAILNR 4: 5AAA5AAA
*
* disp ---- ++++
end *
*
*
**************************
<- positive pattern after the diagnostics
The diagnostics 2 can be restarted by repeatedly entering the DIAG2 command.

Diagnostics 3 can only be started if the diagnostics 2 has ended with faults.
Is "5AAA5AAA" displayed for FAILNR?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 41
N h ... 40
PROC:CP113C/CR 37
ITMN - OFFLINE
40
Commissioning
System
Diagnosis 3 CMY
Enter the "RESET" command for the CMY with the menu keys
The module is reset (otherwise the diagnostics command is ineffective)

Enter the "DIAG3" command for the CMY with menu keys
Diagnostics 3 is started (localizing the defect RAM chip). The LED MST flashes
green on the M:CMYC module. (The diagnostics ends after approx. 10 secs.,
even if the LED continues to flash).
**************************
*
*
*
* Show trace RAM
*
* FAILNR 4:
*
* disp ---- ++++
end *
*
*
**************************
<- Result after the diagnostics
i....NM:
Make an evaluation of the track numbers and carry out fault clearance
according to
CP113C/CR TAB:CP0053
h ... 41
41
Reset Interface Lock Bits

Enter the "RESET" command for CMY with the menu keys
Enter the command "RILBM0" ("RILBM1") with the menu keys for resetting the
Enter the command "RILBM0" ("RILBM1") with the menu keys for resetting the
The interface lock bits of the CMY0 (CMY1) are reset again.
Y h ... 43
N h ... 42
Has the off-line diagnostics been carried out at both CMYs?
42
Decision Block: other CMY

Repeat CMY-diagnosis for other CMY (Carry out the details in parentheses)
PROC:CP113C/CR 38
h ... 37
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
43
ITMN - OFFLINE
Off-line Diagnostics IOC
Off-line diagnostics must be carried out for IOC0 and IOC1 as well as other
IOCs in case expansion module frames are available.
The command "NOTEST" switches off the supervisory circuit (comparator in the
M:PEX module). The command "NOTEST" can therefore only be used for test
purposes when fault clearing.
The command "RESET" releases an impulse in the RESET line.
The "DIAGP" command releases an impulse in the RESET and the BOOT line
which starts the processor diagnostics.
Connect the maintenance panel via the front panel plug of the M:PEX module
(plug position 700) with the IOC to be tested.
Select the IOC to be tested with the "SELECT UNIT" key.
Enter the command "RESET" for the IOC with the menu keys.
Enter the command "DIAGP" with the menu keys.
The off-line diagnostics is started. The LED MST on module M:PEX flashes
green.
" DY 3AAC" appears in the display of the maintenance panel

when the diagnostics has run fault-free.
Has DY 3AAC been displayed?
44
Fault Clearance
Make an evaluation of the track numbers and carry out fault clearance
according to
45
Y h ... 45
N h ... 44
i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB:CP0052
h ... 45
Decision: Next IOC

Has the off-line diagnostics been carried out for all IOCs?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 46
N h ... 43
PROC:CP113C/CR 39
ITMN - OFFLINE
46
Commissioning
System
Off-line Diagnostics IOP:UNI
This off-line diagnostics must be carried out for all M:IOP:UNI modules.
The interfaces to the devices are not tested by the test program, but only the
IOP:UNI. This test includes all test/diagnostics programs which do not access
B:IOC.
The interfaces are only tested by the device tests so that in case there is a fault
only the device and not the IOP:UNI is taken out of service.
After the off-line diagnostics are carried out the IOP must be reset with RESET.
Connect the maintenance panel via the front panel plug with the M:IOP:UNI of
the IOP:UNI to be tested.
Select the IOP:UNI to be tested with the "SELECT UNIT" key.
Enter the command "RESET" with the menu keys.
IOP:UNI is reset
Switch to extended display on the MP by pressing the "disp" key.
Enter the command "DIAG" with the menu keys.
A short diagnostics procedure is started in the IOP:UNI
"NO FAULT FOUND" appears in the MP display.

If a fault has been found, the LED MST of the IOP:UNI lights red and a fault
message appears in full text in the MP display.
Has the off-line diagnostics been ended without faults?
47
Y h ... 48
N h ... 47
Fault Clearance
Evaluate the fault messages of the MP and clear faults accordingly.
48
h ... 48
Reset IOP:UNI
Enter the "RESET" command for the IOP:UNI with the menu keys at the MP.
The IOP:UNI is reset.
PROC:CP113C/CR 40
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
49
ITMN - OFFLINE
Off-line Diagnostics IOP:TA
The IOP:TA must be inactive before starting off-line diagnostics.

This means that a value other than "AC" must be displayed in the status display
of the M:IOP:TA module.
Press the diagnostics key on the front panel of the M:IOP:TA module
until decimal points appear in the "Status" display.
Diagnostics is started (approx. 7 sec.)
"OF" appears in the "Status" display.
The progress of the diagnostics is shown in the display "Minutes" (00 - 9D)
"PU" or "IA" appears in the "Status" display after successful diagnostics (without
CCG the "CF" message appears). The "Hours" display must not indicate "FF".
50
Y h ... 51
N h ... 50
Fault Clearance
Evaluate the display and carry out fault clearance according to
i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB, CP0054
51
h ... 51
Decision: IOPAUC
The IOPAUC is only used in CP113C of AC (authentication center)

Is there at least one IOPAUC in use
52
Y h ... 52
N h ... 54
Off-line diagnostics of IOPAUC

Press the RESET key on the front panel of the IOPAUC module
The progress of the test is indicated via the LEDs of the IOPAUC
For evaluating the LED displays of the IOPAUC see
i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB, CP0054
53
Y h ... 54
N h ... 53
Fault clearance
i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB, CP0054
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 54
PROC:CP113C/CR 41
ITMN - OFFLINE
54
Commissioning
System
Prepare BAP Hardware Start-up

Switch off the DCCs connected to BAP-0 and BAP-1, if not already done
55
Information about BAP Hardware Start-up
The fuses for the voltage converters BAP0 and BAP1 must both be screwed in
before switching on the voltage converter.
After switching on the voltage converter there is a sequence of initializing and
test programs (HW start-up) in the individual processors).
The BAP where the power is switched on first becomes MASTER, but only on
condition that this BAP is fault-free. The MP should be connected to the BAP
master and the corresponding IOC before switching on the voltage converter,
because track numbers are used for displaying the boot status and are shown
on the MP display if the MP is connected.
For start-up with the APS, the following units have to be connected to a B:CMY
(is displayed by reset interface lock bits (LED ILB = green is displayed).
one BAP (ILB LED on module PEX)
one IOC (ILB LED on module PEX)
one CMY (ILB LED on module CMYC)
Ensure that one IOP:UNI (for the connection from MDD and PC) can be
reached via the IOC connected to the B:CMY, and that it has the status shown
in:
......(see
Tab.
3.15.10)
The BAP, which becomes MASTER, first formats both CMYs.

Display at the MP: " DY A885" for BAP master.
Then it initializes IOC0/1
Display at the MP: " DY A8A5",...," DY A8B5",...," DY A8C5" for BAP master'
When DY AB05 ( DY AD05) is displayed, the test APS is already being
loaded from one of the disks (MDD-0 or MDD-1).
Displays on the other module panels, or on the MP display after initialization (in
case no fault is found in the processors during the HW start-up):
56
......(see
Tab.
3.15.10)
Switch on BAP0 and BAP1

Screw in the fuses for the DCCs of BAP-0 and BAP-1
Switch on DCCs for BAP0 and BAP1
Are the green LEDs on both DCC modules lit?
PROC:CP113C/CR 42
Y h ... 67
N h ... 57
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
57
ITMN - OFFLINE
Fault Clearance
Switch off the DCC on which the LED is not lit immediately and unscrew the
relevant fuse. After a successful test start-up, remove the fault from the defective unit with the test APS (provided a BAP can load the APS).
If only one BAP is defective, continue
If both BAPs are defective, the errors must be removed immediately
58

59
h ... 56
Decision Block: DCC

61
Y h ... 59
N h ... 60
Replace Fuse
60
h ... 67
h ... 58
Y h ... 62
N h ... 61
Replace DCC
62
Decision Block: PEX

Has the corresponding PEX already been replaced?
63
h ... 56
Y h ... 64
N h ... 63
Replace PEX
Replace the corresponding PEX with spare module.
Mark the replaced module as defective
64
h ... 56

Y i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB, CP0050
N h ... 66
65
Decision Block
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 56
N h ... 66
PROC:CP113C/CR 43
ITMN - OFFLINE
66
Commissioning
System

h ... 56
67
Decision: Start-up With test APS Possible
Y h ... 92
N h ... 68
Has the system been configured to allow start-up with the test APS?
68
69
Decision: Other BAP MASTER

If no start-up with the other BAP as MASTER has been attempted the startup has to be repeated with switching on the DCCs of BAP-0 and BAP-1 in a
different order
h ... 54
If a start-up with the other BAP as MASTER has already run through a
manual start-up must be attempted
h ... 69
It is best to carry out the manual recovery in the following way:
The access to the bus is taken from one of both BAPs. This can be best
achieved by switching off the processor.
Afterwards the BOOT key on the front panel of the M:BCM module allocated
to the other BAP must be pressed.
Only after successful installation is the BAP to be switched on again and

configured.
Switch off BAP-1 (BAP-0).

Activate the BOOT key on the front panel of the M:BCM module in the F:PBC0
for BAP-0 (F:PBC1 for BAP-1).
After switching on the voltage converter the initialization and test programs run
in the individual processor (HW recovery).
Track points which are shown on the MP display are used to display the boot
status. The MP also must be connected to the BAP master and the corresponding IOC before switching on the voltage converter.
The BAP-0 (BAP-1) becomes MASTER.
PROC:CP113C/CR 44
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
For start-up with the APS, the following units have to be connected to a B:CMY
(is displayed by reset interface lock bits (LED ILB = green is displayed).
one BAP (ILB LED on module PEX)
one IOC (ILB LED on module PEX)
one CMY (ILB LED on module CMYC)
Ensure that one IOP:UNI (for the connection from MDD and PC) can be
reached via the IOC connected to the B:CMY, and that it has the status shown
in:
Displays on the other module panels, or on the MP display after initialization (in
case no fault is found in the processors during the HW start-up):
Has the system been configured so that start-up with the test APS is possible?
70
71
...... 3.15.10)
(see Tab.
...... 3.15.10)
(see Tab.
Y h ... 71
N h ... 70

h ... 69
h ... 87

UNIT
STATUS
TEST
********************************************
BAP-0
ost
Test result
BAP-1
ost
Test result
B:CMY-0
ost
Test result
B:CMY-1
ost
Test result
CMY-0
ost
Test result
CMY-1
ost
Test result
IOC-0
ost
Test result
IOC-1
ost
Test result
TO DIAGNOSE MEMORY
TO FORMAT
MEMORY
TO CONTINUE
: DIAG;
: FORMAT;
: ;ETX
Is the preceding message output?
72
Y h ... 77
N h ... 72
Decision: Check IOP:UNI / Cabling to PC

Have the device settings on module IOP:UNI and the cable connections to the
PC already been checked?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 73
N h ... 74
PROC:CP113C/CR 45
ITMN - OFFLINE
73
74
Commissioning
System
Decision: Manual Start-up with Second BAP

h ... 69
h ... 87
Check Cabling to PC
Check and if necessary replace connecting cable to the PC or change plug position
75
Check Device Data in the IOP:UNI

Connect the MP to the front panel of the M:IOP:UNI module.
Call up the IOP:UNI with the "SELECT UNIT" key.
Enter the "SHOWCF" command with the menu keys.
The device data of the IOP:UNI are displayed.
Y h ... 54
N h ... 76
Are the device data correctly set?
76
Modify Device Data in the IOP:UNI

Transmit the "CONFIG" command with the menu keys.
Modify or regenerate the device settings with the "mod" or "crea" keys.
After modifying the device settings, the modifications must be retrieved by
pressing the "ok" key.
(The configuration can be interrupted without any modification by pressing the
"end" key)
After modifying the device settings
PROC:CP113C/CR 46
h ... 54
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
77
ITMN - OFFLINE

TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
START APS MANUALLY

:
STOP INITIAL START
:
MANUALLY;
INSTALLATION;
UTILITY;
STOP;
;ETX
Enter MAN; and press <ENTER>

The current generation list is output:

xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
99999999
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
MANUAL RECOVERY - LOADING VIA IOC : IOC-0;/IOC-1;

LOAD.DEV. - *MDD* -GENERATION TO LOAD :NAME; (8 CHAR)
Enter the current APS generation 8 characters (in APS documentation or at the
place marked 9999999 in the generation list printed out previously).
Enter 'Generation-No.' and press <ENTER>
If the APS version is unknown and cannot be found out, enter *. For safety
reasons this must be repeated 3 times after system enquiry.
MANUAL RECOVERY - LTG LOADING : Y;/N;
Enter "N;" and press <ENTER>
Manual start-up is initiated.

The track numbers to be run through which are shown in the MP display for the
BAP master are shown in block:
...... (see 55)
To make things clearer, only the headline is given for the system messages.
Wait for the following system message:
Was the manual start-up with the test APS successful?
78
Y h ... 78
N h ... 79
Second BAP
Switch on the second BAP again
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
h ... 94
PROC:CP113C/CR 47
ITMN - OFFLINE
79
Decision: Manual Start-up with other BAP

Has the manual start-up been attempted with another BAP?
80
Y h ... 81
N h ... 80
Boot Key
Repeat the entire sequence with the other BAP (Details in Parentheses)
81
Commissioning
System
h ... 69
Decision: Manual Start-up via IOC-1

Branch to one of the following blocks
Repeat manual start-up via IOC-1, if not already done
If manual start-up via IOC-1 has already been attempted
PROC:CP113C/CR 48
h ... 69
h ... 82
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
82
ITMN - OFFLINE
START / UTILITY
When working with the IMON, ensure that the PC can be reached via the IOC
specified in the Start Utility.
Switch off BAP-1 (BAP-0)
Press the BOOT key on the front panel of the M:BCM module in the F:PBC0 for
BAP-0 (F:PBC1 for BAP-1).
UNIT
STATUS
TEST
********************************************
BAP-0
ost
Test result
BAP-1
ost
Test result
B:CMY-0
ost
Test result
B:CMY-1
ost
Test result
CMY-0
ost
Test result
CMY-1
ost
Test result
IOC-0
ost
Test result
IOC-1
ost
Test result
TO DIAGNOSE MEMORY
TO FORMAT
MEMORY
TO CONTINUE
: DIAG;
: FORMAT;
: ;ETX
If the preceding message did not appear
h ... 72

TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
START APS MANUALLY

:
STOP INITIAL START
:
MANUALLY;
INSTALLATION;
UTILITY;
STOP;
;ETX
Enter UTI; and press <ENTER>

UTILITY - RECOVERY - DEVICE - TYPE TO USE : MDD;/MTD;/MOD;
Enter MDD; and press <ENTER>

UTILITY - RECOV. - LOAD FROM MDD VIA : IOC-0;/IOC-1;

PLEASE ENTER UTILITY - FILE - NAME
Acknowledge this message with SY.INSTALL

IMON : V0031 START
IMON : ENTER COMMAND
Was it possible to start IMON?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 84
N h ... 83
PROC:CP113C/CR 49
ITMN - OFFLINE
83
Commissioning
System
Fault Clearance
......NM:CP
Devices, MDD
Check connection of MDD to IOP:UNI according to
HP C2490A
(2,1 Gbyte)
Check switch settings and cable connections in the MDD against the manufacturer's documentation.
h ... 54
84
Display Disk Contents

Display disk contents with the following commands:
DISP MDDIR:DEVIN=010C01; (for MDD-0)
DISP MDDIR:DEVIN=030C01; (for MDD-1)
All disk files of MDD-0 (MDD-1) are displayed

Branch to one of the following blocks according to the files displayed
85
If all system files are present continue
h ... 85
If not all system files are present the files must be copied again from tape to
disk. System test with test APS must be omitted
h ... 98
Decision: BAP Off-line Diagnostics
Y h ... 86
N h ... 87
Have BAP off-line diagnostics been carried out?
86
Branch according to Off-line Diagnostics

If all off-line diagnostics have been terminated without error, one or more
system files have probably been destroyed. In this case the test with the test
APS must be omitted
Otherwise
PROC:CP113C/CR 50
h ... 98
h ... 9
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
87
ITMN - OFFLINE
Prepare BAP Off-line Diagnostics (Special Fault Clearance)
The off-line diagnostics must be carried out in both BAPs.

After connecting the MP at the front panel plug of the M:PEX module the off-line
diagnostics can be started with the command "DIAGP".
The test is made parallel, i.e. the test programs are processed synchronously in
both halves of the processor. The comparator between both halves which
causes a resetting of the processor in the case of disparity, is generally locked.
It is only released for special test stages. The comparison between the
processor halves runs via the software.
The processor is reset with the "RESET" command. (Impulse on the RESET
line)
The diagnostics is started with the "DIAGP" command. (Impulse on the RESET
and the BOOT line)
The register contents, not only the leading but also the current processor
halves, are displayed on the MP display.
The content of the diagnostics register is the same when PU-0 and PU-1 reach
the same result for an audit within a BAP.
Switch off the DCCs connected to BAP0/1
Connect the maintenance panel with BAP0 and BAP1 via the front panel plug of
the M:PEX module.
Switch on DCCs connected to BAP0/1
An initialization program runs in both BAPs
Does the display on the MP show " DY A435" for at least one BAP?
88
Y h ... 89
N h ... 88

Carry out special fault clearance according to
i ... NM:
CP113C/CR TAB, CP0052
89
h ... 54
Start BAP Off-line Diagnostics

Select the BAP with the "SELECT UNIT" key for which "DY A435" was
displayed.
Transmit the "DIAGP" command with the menu keys for this BAP.
The off-line diagnostics are started. After the diagnostics have run fault-free "
DY 3AAC" is displayed.
Is DY 3AAC displayed?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 91
N h ... 90
PROC:CP113C/CR 51
ITMN - OFFLINE
90
Commissioning
System
Fault Clearance
i....NM:
Analyze the track numbers and clear faults using
CP113C/CR TAB, CP052
h ... 54
91
Check Internal Cabling
The BAP(s) is/are OK. The fault is in the cabling between BAP-0/1 and BCMY0/1, or in the cabling between BCMY-0/1 and CMY-0/1 or in the CMY-0/1.
Check the internal cabling of the R:CP113C / R:CE against the cable laying list
If any faults have been found in the internal cabling, remove faults and
continue
h ... 54
If no faults have been found in the internal cabling, evaluate and clear faults
according to
i....NM:
CP113C/CRTAB, CP052
h ... 54
92
Software Start-up with Test APS
The SW recovery begins as soon as the display on the MP for the BAP master
jumps from " DY Axx5" to " DY Bxx4". (xx - different track points of the recovery)
The following track points (among others) run trough:
DY Bx34
DY Bx54
DY Bx74
DY Bx94
or: DY Dxx2 or DY Exx1 (changes every 4 s)

(xx-arbitrary, with:
'Dxx2' the call processing load is shown in Erl.
'Exx1' the entire processor load in percent)
Have the track points shown above been run trough?
PROC:CP113C/CR 52
Y h ... 93
N h ... 69
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
93
ITMN - OFFLINE
System Messages
To make things clearer, only a headline is given for system messages.

If start-up with test APS was successful the following message is output:
Wait for system message

Branch to the following blocks according to the system reaction:
ALL DOUBLE FILES SYNCHRONIZED is displayed
Any other message is displayed
No message is displayed
94
h ... 94
h ... 69
h ... 74
Enter USER-ID and Password
USER-ID and password will be interrogated.

For the first OMT EWSD0 and for further OMTs EWSD1, EWSD2,
EWSD3 has to be entered as USER-ID.
The password is SYSTEM-1.
(All inputs in capital letters)
Enter USER-ID and password
95
Enter Date and Time
Enter date and time:
ENTR TIME:DATE=yy-mm-dd,TIME=hh-mm-ss,WD=xx;
Secure time:
CORR TIME:MODE=SECURE;
96
Check Fan Alarms

Switch off the individual fans in each fan module by the switches on the
modules. After about 5 secs. a system message must be output.
Caution:
Do not leave the fans switched off for longer than 5 mins. as racks warm up rapidly, endangering components.
System message fan alarm
Switch on fans again (do not wait for longer than 5 mins.)
Was it possible to generate this message from each fan module?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 98
N h ... 97
PROC:CP113C/CR 53
ITMN - OFFLINE
97
Commissioning
System
Fault Clearance: IOP:TA
Prerequisites:
Cabling between fans and AD:RAL / between AD:RAL and IOP:TA has been
controlled according to:
......(see
Fig. 3.15.
8)
Perform fault clearance of IOP:TA according to the MMN.
h ... 96
98
Install Hardware APS
The following is necessary before installing the hardware APS:
error-free configuration of CP113C/CR with the test APS
APS documentation
Observe the notes in the APS documentation supplied.

Note:
The APS installation is to be carried out according to procedure SW140 (if delivered on Tape) or according to procedure SW141 (If delivered on MOD).
Install the APS, using one of the following procedures (According to the medium
on which the APS is delivered).
For APS delivered on tape
h ...NM:SW,
PROC:SW140
For APS delivered on MOD
h ...NM:SW,
PROC:SW141
END
PROC:CP113C/CR 54
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.16
Switching on MTD STC 2925 of Storage Tek

MTD:STC2925
3.16.1
Introduction
The scope of delivery of the magnetic tape device STC 2925 of Storage Tek contains
a user manual: 2925 SCSI Maintenance Manual
Check cabling to IOP:UNI

Check that interface cables to the IOP:UNI are connected according to
...... MTD:STC
NM:CP2925
Check switch settings

Open the door of MTD
Turn POWER switch at the front of the MTD to OFF
Unscrew the cover of MTD module frame (using special tool Torx 15) and
remove foam rubber in front of the modules.
Unplug the IF card of the MTD
!
...... MTD:STC
NM:CP2925
Reconnect the IF card

Unplug the CS card of the MTD
!
...... MTD:STC
NM:CP2925
Reconnect the CS card

Replace the foam rubber in front of the modules and screw on the cover of the
MTD module frame
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:MTD_STC2925 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Switching on main supply switch/ cleaning tape path

Open the cover of the tape path
Before testing the MTD, cleaning must be carried out according to the instructions given in
......MMN:
CP113C/CRMAINT
MTD STC 2925
If the cover does not close tightly due to a physical defect, the magnetic tape will
not be automatically threaded. In this case spare catches must be obtained and
exchanged.
......MMN:
CP113C/CRMAINT
MTD STC 2925
Close the cover of the tape path

Switch on main supply switch at the rear of the MTD, if not already done
......NM:CPMTD:STC 2925
The location of the main supply switch is given in:
Switch on magnetic tape device
A short self-test is carried out after switching on the power. Operating or hardware faults are shown on the MTD display. An explanation of the fault numbers
is to be found on the inside of the MTD door, or in Section "2925 SCSI FCD
(Fault Code Dictionary 2925 with SCSI Interface) of the manual that is supplied.
The tape leader must be cleanly cut, i.e. not have a plastic threading end (cut off
with a special tool) as this prevents the tape from being guided when it is
threaded in. If automatic tape threading is not possible, e.g. at altitudes over
1.800m, it must be threaded by hand. Manual threading is started by pressing
the LOAD-REW key twice. The magnetic spool must be turned so that the tape
is inserted into the suction opening. If SHUT DOOR is displayed on the MTD,
ensure that the MTD door is properly closed.
Screw in fuse for MTD (in R:DEVB)
Close MTD door
Put POWER switch to ON position
If the self-test completes without finding a fault, - - - - is displayed.
PROC:MTD_STC2925 2
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
Diagnose magnetic tape device
The following inputs relate to the MTD keyboard

Open the MTD door
Insert a fault-free empty tape with a write enable ring, but do not load (Scratch
Tape)
Press <ENTER DIAG> enter '1 0' and then press <ENTER>
The last input starts the complete MTD device diagnostics. The magnetic tape is
automatically loaded after internal checks are carried out. Read/write tests with
both recording densities are then made. After a positive run the diagnostics end
with - - - - on the display. If there is a fault, a fault number is displayed. Details
about the cause of the fault together with fault numbers are listed in the STC
Manual, Section "2925 SCSI FCD (Fault Code Dictionary 2925 with SCSI Interface) . Fault clearance is explained in the section for Maintenance,
Removal/Replacement, Diagnostics in the STC Manual.
Is - - - - displayed after the diagnostics?
Y h ... 7
N h ... 6
Fault clearance
Carry out fault clearance as described in STC Manual, sections Maintenance,
Removal/Replacement, Diagnostics
h ... 7
Check Tape
Open MTD door

Press the door contact (below left) with a pen or any other suitable tool and hold
it down
Press <ENTER DIAG>, enter '47' and then press <ENTER>
The tape is written to with higher recording density 6250 BPI and read in the
READ AFTER WRITE MODE.
The following 2 system responses are possible:
If the magnetic tape is fault-free, it is wound back when the end-of-tape mark
(EOT) is recognized.
If the magnetic tape is faulty, 47B or 47C is shown in the MTD-Display

(In this case the tape cannot be used)
Is the tape fault-free?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 8
N h ... 9
PROC:MTD_STC2925 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System

Close the MTD door
Unload faulty tape

Rewind tape
Tape must not be used anymore
Close the MTD door
END
PROC:MTD_STC2925 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
3.17
Switching on the MTD HP 88781A of Hewlett Packard

MTD:HP 88781A
3.17.1
Introduction
The scope of delivery of the magnetic tape device HP88781A contains a user
manual: Tape Drive Users Guide.
For fault clearance of the magnetic tape device a service manual, Part No.: 8878190030 can be obtained from HP.
The magnetic tape device has only two jumpers on the SCSI-interface module which
have to be set. All other settings can be input at the control panel.
The configuration data of the magnetic tape device can be saved on a magnetic tape
or can be read in from a save tape.
The device settings are stored in a non volatile memory. This memory is supplied by
a 3V battery on the buffer module.
(Lifetime of the battery approx. 10 years - type: BR 2335)
The magnetic tape is to be threaded manually
The door has to be closed after threading the magnetic tape
The tape is automatically wound to the beginning-of-tape mark and the MTD
switches to the ONLINE state
During ONLINE state the door is always locked
The door can be unlocked by pressing the RESET key (ONLINE-display is switched
off)
All inputs in the following procedure relate to the MTD keyboard
Check cabling to IOP:UNI

Check wether interface cables to the IOP:UNI are connected according to
...... MTD:HP
NM:CP-
Switch off power supply

Switch off power supply switch at the front of the MTD
Switch off power supply switch at the rear of the MTD
The location of the power supply switches is given in:
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
...... MTD:HP
NM:CP-
PROC:MTD_HP 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
Check/set jumper settings on SCSI-interface module

Unscrew the six screws (Torx 25) of the Interface module at the rear of the MTD
and take it out (Jumpers are located on the Interface module)
Use grounding strap (According to ESD regulations)
......NM:CPMTD:HP
......NM:CPMTD:HP
Check or set the settings of the two jumpers according to:

Mount the Interface module at the rear of the MTD again
Switch on power supply/clean tape path
......NM:CPMTD:HP
......NM:CPMTD:HP
Plug in Hubbel-plug (Power supply) at the rear of the MTD

Plug in Interface-cable (The fasten plug (grounding) is not plugged in for this
MTD)
Screw in MTD fuse
......NM:CPMTD:HP
Switch on power supply switch at the rear of the MTD

Open MTD door
Switch on power supply switch at the front of the MTD
......MMN:CP113MAINT
Clean tape path, instructions are given in:
MTD HP
Check Device-Address
(The Device-Address (SCSI-ID) has to be set to 4)
Press RESET key

Display: READY
Press OPTION key

Display: TEST *
b
b
Press NEXT key until ID * is displayed

Press ENTER key
Display: ID 4
ID 4 indicates, that ID is set to 4

Has ID 4 been displayed?
PROC:MTD_HP 2
Y h ... 7
N h ... 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
6
b
b
ITMN - OFFLINE
Set Device-Address
Press NEXT or PREV key until 4 is displayed
Press ENTER key
Display: SET 4
Press OPTION key

Display: READY
Information block: Configuration data
The device settings are stored in a non volatile memory. This memory is
supplied by a 3V battery on the buffer module.
(Lifetime of the battery approx. 10 years - type: BR 2335)
The configuration data of the MTD are already adapted to the system for
delivery of the complete EWSD-exchange.
In case a magnetic tape device has to be replaced, the configuration data can
be saved to a save tape beforehand.
This save tape must for safety reasons be set up directly at the time of the
system initial switch on.
Load magnetic tape to save the configuration data

Load a small magnetic tape to save the configuration data and close the door.
Tape will be positioned to the beginning-of-tape mark (BOT), MTD switches to
ONLINE
Has the tape already been configured to save the configuration data?
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Y h ... 10
N h ... 9
PROC:MTD_HP 3
ITMN - OFFLINE
9
b
b
b
b
Commissioning
System
Prepare save tape for configuration data (Test 150)

Press RESET key
Press OPTION key
Press NEXT key until TEST * is displayed
Press ENTER key
Display: TEST 0 (number 0 is blinking)
b
b

Press ENTER key
Display: ONCE *
Press ENTER key

Display: A 6250 (Number 6250 is blinking indicating the recording
density)
Press ENTER key

Display: RUN 150 (After termination PASS 150)
Magnetic tape has been written to with recording density of 6250 BPI and
rewound
Press OPTION key

Display: BOT
10
b
b
Saving configuration data (Test 128)

Press OPTION key
Press NEXT key until TEST * is displayed
Display: TEST *
Press ENTER key

Display: TEST 0 (Number 0 is blinking)
b
b

Press ENTER key
Display: ONCE *
Press ENTER key

Display: RUN 128 (After termination PASS 128)
Magnetic tape has been written to
Press OPTION key

Display: IDLE
Press REW/UNLD key (Tape is rewound)

Display: BOT
Press REW/UNLD key (Tape is completely rewound)

Display: UNLOAD, READY
Unload tape, label and store it
PROC:MTD_HP 4
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
11
ITMN - OFFLINE
Off-line-Diagnosis of magnetic tape device (Test 1)

Open MTD-door
Insert a fault-free empty tape with write enable ring (Scratch Tape)
A small magnetic tape is sufficient for the diagnosis, because the time for the
diagnosis increases with the tape length.
Close MTD door. (Tape is loaded, door is locked, MTD switches to ONLINE)
b
b
Press RESET key (Display ONLINE switched off)

Press OPTION key and select the Function TEST * with the NEXT key (if TEST
* is not displayed automatically)
Display: TEST *
Press ENTER key

b
b
Select Number 1 with NEXT key (Test 1)

Press ENTER key
Display: ONCE *
Press ENTER key

Display: RUN xyz (Test-Numbers)
The following system reactions are possible:

Display: PASS 1
Display: FAIL 1
12
b
h ... 12
h ... 13
Off-line-Diagnosis was successful

Press OPTION key
Display: BOT

Unload test tape
13
b
h ... 14
Off-line-Diagnosis was faulty

Press ENTER key. Alternately the error number and the test number are
displayed. e.g.:
Display: ERR 78 und TEST 165
(The fault number and the test number must be written down)
Fault clearance on site should only be carried out by trained O&M personnel.
(faults can also be caused by a defective magnetic tape)
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:MTD_HP 5
ITMN - OFFLINE
Commissioning
System
For hints for fault clearance refer to:
NM:CP113C-MTD:HP
HP Service Handbook, chapter 8
Press OPTION key

Display: IDLE
Press REW/UNLD key (Tape is rewound)

Display: BOT

Unload test tape
14
Test magnetic tape (Test 2)
The quality of magnetic tapes can be tested with the magnetic tape device.
(Off-line diagnosis, test 2)
The test takes about 23 minutes for a magnetic tape of 730 m (big reel)
Load magnetic tape which is to be tested (With write enable ring)
Close door - Tape is loaded
b
b
Press RESET key (Display ONLINE is switched off)

Press OPTION key and select the Function TEST * by pressing the NEXT key (If
TEST * is not automatically displayed)
Display: TEST *
Press ENTER key

b
b
Select Number 2 by pressing NEXT key (Test 2)

Press ENTER key
Display: ONCE *
Press ENTER key

Display: RUN xyz (Test-Numbers)
The magnetic tape is tested with recording modes GCR (Group Code Recording
6250 CPI) and PE (Phase Encoded 1600 CPI).
The following 2 system reactions are possible:
PASS 2 (Magnetic tape is error-free)
FAIL 2 (Magnetic tape is faulty)
15
h ... 15
h ... 16

Close the MTD door
PROC:MTD_HP 6
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
16
ITMN - OFFLINE
Unload faulty tape

Rewind tape
Tape should not be used anymore
Close the MTD door
END
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
PROC:MTD_HP 7
ITMN - OFFLINE
PROC:MTD_HP 8
Commissioning
System
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
4 Tables
This register remains free for editorial reasons.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
TABIN 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
TABIN 2
Commissioning
System
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
Commissioning
System
ITMN - OFFLINE
5 Appendix (APP)
This register remains free for editorial reasons.
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630
APP 1
ITMN - OFFLINE
APP 2
Commissioning
System
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

SIEMENS D900 Commissioning ITMN Offline

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIEMENS D900 Commissioning ITMN Offline

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Commissioning

Important Notice on Product Safety

Copyright (C) Siemens AG 1997

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 12

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . TABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 2

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROCIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . TL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 2

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . APP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 2

This document consists of a total of 368 Pages

Procedures (PROCIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCIN - 1

Appendix (APP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APP - 1

Functional areas in a network node together with the subsystems . . IN - 1

Fig. 3.3.18 R/T and E+M interfaces in F:SYPC

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 7

3.12.4 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 400 . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 6

Overview IOPs (DE5/4) Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 9

CCG Racks and Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 5

Tab. 3.11.9 Mounting locations for module types

Overview of functional areas and subsystems

Common channel signaling

Basic training on SSS-NE (EWSD)

Practical experience in the operation of SSS-NE (EWSD systems) and clearance of

General knowledge of how to use D900/D1800 documents such as maintenance

Handling of fault reports:

Locating Modules and Test Points

Meaning of the test points (SIVAPAC) e.g:

List of Universal Measurement and Test Equipment

Digital multimeter, e.g. Siemens VMG-3

Continuity tester, e.g. Cirtest PS 12

Test headset 600/10000 ohms

System Voltages in the SSS-NE

e.g.: DAS = Digital announcement unit

Error Reports on the Installation Test Manual

Dealing with Defective Modules

Procedure in the Event of Faults

Procedure in the Event of Serious Faults

short circuits, breaks in cables

description of the test step attempted

Checking the Scope of Delivery and the Installation Work

Check the installation work

Check the software

Check the documentation

A check should also be made, using superordinate documents, to ascertain that

This applies in particular to: Manuals

Check the equipment

Visual check of the entire system

Interpretation of Exchange Configuration Documents

Installation Test Sequence of Register OFFLINE

Part in the ITMN-OFFLINE

The INTRO section contains basic information

The CCG has a special position in the installation test sequence.

Installation test of MB(B)

Installation test of SYP and plug in the USER-PROM

Installation test of CCNC

Installation test of LTG

DAS 300 TEST

Installation test of DAS 300

Manual MMN:DSU/DLUB/DLUD, TAB, MOD

Manual MMN:PC Register BASIS

Fig. 2.1.1 Installation Test Sequence of Register OFFLINE

Precautionary measures for electrostatic-sensitive components

Extracting and inserting modules

Explanations of the Procedure Elements

Commentary are always written in italics